신학자료 전용 사이트

샤프-헤르초크 종교백과

Schaff-Herzog Religious Encyclopaedia

백과사전 Schaff et al. 1882 general

지원 언어 현황

영 한1%

영 6639/6639 원문 · 한 75/6639 번역 · 0 검수

6639개 항목

한영 비교 보기
IRREGULARITY Irregularity

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IRREGULARITY:** In canon law, a defect or impediment which excludes a person otherwise qualified from due reception or exercise of holy orders. Canonists divide these into two classes, irregularities through defect and through fault. Under the former come (1) those through natal defects, affecting all who are not born of a legitimate or at least a putative marriage, and removable by subsequent legitimation or by taking monastic vows. (2) Through bodily defects, affecting those whom illness or mutilation has rendered incapable of performing sacred functions, or of performing them without lowering the dignity of the office or giving offense to the people. (3) Through defects in age, when the canonical age (q.v.) has not been attained. (4) Through defects in knowledge, when the requisite knowledge for the order in question is lacking. (5) Through defects of faith, affecting neophytes and those not yet confirmed, who are presumably insufficiently established in the faith. (6) Through sacramental defects, arising from certain conditions in regard to a previous marriage of the candidate. (7) *Ex defectu perfectae lenitatis, * attaching to those who (though in a lawful way) have contributed to the death or maiming of a fellow-man, such as soldiers, criminal judges, prosecutors, jurymen, or witnesses, but not physicians and surgeons. (8) Through defects in reputation. (9) Through defects in the matter of liberty, preventing the ordination of slaves without their masters' consent, married men without that of their wives, or guardians and trustees before release from their obligations. Irregularity through faults occurs as a consequence of criminal acts publicly known or proved before a court or of certain misdeeds, even if not known; the latter include the killing or maiming of another person, heresy, apostasy, abuse of the sacraments of baptism or orders; and the same effect is produced by what is technically known as constructive bigamy, the marriage (if consummated) with any woman not a virgin, which, though not forbidden by ordinary law, is yet considered a sufficient declension from the ideal of marriage (cf. Lev. xxi. 13, 14) to disqualify a man for ordination. In case a man has been ordained in spite of his irregularity, his orders are valid, but he is not permitted to exercise them. Dispensation from irregularity can be granted as a rule by the pope alone?only in some exceptional cases by the bishop. (P. HINSCHIUS†.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Bingham. *Origines,* IV., iii.-vii.; L. Thomassin, *Vetus et nova ecclesiae disciplina,* II., i. 62-63, 3 vols., Paris, 1728; F. E. a Boenninghausen, *Tractatus juridicocanonicus de irregularitatibus,* part iii. Münster, 1867; P. Hinschius, *Das Kirchenrecht . . . in Deutschland,* i. 7 sqq., Berlin, 1869; E. Friedberg, *Lehrbuch des . . . Kirchenrechts,* pp. 134 sqq., Leipsic, 1895.
IRVING, EDWARD Irving, Edward

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IRVING, EDWARD:** Scotch Presbyterian, usually regarded as the founder of the Catholic Apostolic Church (q.v.), whose members are popularly known as Irvingites; b. at Annan (15 m. e.s.e. of Dumfries), Dumfriesshire, Aug. 4, 1792; d. in Glasgow Dec. 7, 1834. At thirteen he was sent to the University of Edinburgh, and at seventeen he became a teacher of mathematics in the school at Haddington. A year later he took charge of a new academy at Kirkcaldy, but still kept up his theological studies and a more or less regular attendance on the university lectures. It was at this period that he made the acquaintance of Thomas Carlyle (the author, to be distinguished from a later apostle of the same name), who has left the most vivid picture of his development. In 1815 he passed his theological examinations and received a license to preach from the presbytery of Kirkcaldy. After three years, not very successful as a preacher, and weary of teaching, he went back to Edinburgh and occupied himself with linguistic and scientific studies. He was seriously thinking of going as a missionary to Persia when, in Oct., 1819, the position was offered him of assistant to Dr. Chalmers at St. John's, Glasgow. Overshadowed by Chalmers, and unpopular with the majority of the congregation, he was glad to exchange this position in 1822 for that of minister of the small congregation in London connected with a Scotch asylum in. Hatton Garden. He received ordination at the hands of the presbytery of Annan, and took his leave of Glasgow in a remarkable sermon which called for a complete revision of the methods of Christian preaching. In London he at once made an impression, which was partly due to his striking appearance; he was over six feet tall, his pale face framed 2 in dark locks which fell almost to his shoulders. No one could hear him without being conscious of a powerful and dominating personality. His flowery, rhetorical style soon attracted a large circle of hearers, for which the little church was too small. A new one was built in Regent Square, and for a time he was the fashionable preacher of London. He appealed especially to the educated classes; and it was to them that he spoke in his first published work, *For the Oracles of God, Four Orations. For Judgment to Come, an Argument in Nine Parts * (London, 1823). The attention attracted by his writings increased his popularity, and at the same time heightened his self-consciousness; he felt himself called to be the prophet of his people, and scornfully rejected the well-meant warnings of many members of the Evangelical party. The upheaval of the French Revolution had aroused in England a strong tendency to apocalyptic and millenarian thought, which 3 found expression in numerous writings. Among those most strongly impressed by this thought was Henry Drummond (q.v.), a rich banker who had gathered around him a circle of like-minded friends, devoted to gaining general recognition for their apocalyptic views. Irving adopted the singular exegesis and the whole train of thought of Drummond's circle, which opened to him an entirely new field as a preacher of repentance. In a long discourse, later printed with enlargements (*Babylon and Infidelity Foredoomed of God,* Glasgow, 1826), preached at the anniversary of the Continental Society in 1825, he developed these thoughts and foretold the second coming of the Lord for the year 1864. Next he published, with an introduction of 200 pages, a recasting of a work published pseudonymously in 1818 by Lacunza, a Spanish ex-Jesuit, under the title *The Coming of Messiah in Glory and Majesty * (London, 1827). Meantime a regular "school of the prophets" had gathered around him, who, from the end of 1826, met annually at Drummond's country-seat of Albury, near Guildford. From 1829 to 1833 they published a periodical, *The Morning Watch, a Journal of Prophecy.* A sectarian tendency soon developed. Irving had been saying from 1824 on that since the fivefold office of apostles, prophets, evangelists, 4 pastors, and teachers had disappeared from the Church, the Holy Ghost had deserted it. Irving thus showed an increasing tendency to depart from the principles of Scotch Presbyterianism. He now denied predestination; following the High-church teaching of Hooker, he felt himself a priest and required his people so to regard him; and toward the end of 1827 he gave utterance to Christological views which were regarded as the grossest heresy, speaking of the "sinful substance" of the body of Christ. In defense of his view, he wrote a long rhetorical treatise on the Incarnation which forms the third and fourth parts of his *Sermons, Lectures, and Occasional Discourses* (3 vols., London, 1828). This attitude, combined with his apocalyptic vagaries, damaged his position in London. About this time a union of prayer was formed to beseech a new outpouring of the Holy Spirit, and Irving's assistant, Alexander Scott, expressed the hope that the special *charismata * of the primitive Church might once more be bestowed in answer to these supplications. Fresh excitement was aroused by two preaching-tours of Irving's through Scotland in 1828 and 1829, and in Mar., 1830, occurred the phenomena elsewhere detailed (see CATHOLIC APOSTOLIC CURCH), which were taken as a fulfilment of these hopes. At least a commission from London, of which the lawyer Cardale was the most prominent member, accepted them as the expected renewal of the primitive gifts, and a confirmation of the whole trend of apocalyptic preaching. Similar phenomena now occurred at gatherings in Cardale's house; prophecy and speaking with tongues became more and more frequent. Irvine attempted for a time to keep these manifestations separate from the church services proper, while he welcomed them and made use of the messages thus delivered, and looked to the revival of the offices already recognized as essential. But revelation succeeded revelation, and presently Irving could no longer hold back the growing enthusiasm. In Oct., 1831, it took possession of his church, amid scenes of great excitement. When Irving was summoned, in 1830, before the general presbytery of the Scotch churches in London to answer for his Christological views, and denied their jurisdiction, appealing to the general synod in Scotland, his own presbytery had stood by him. But now it accused him of violation of the liturgical ordinances in allowing women, and men who were not properly ordained ministers, to speak in his church. Sentence of deposition was pronounced on May 2, 1832. Four days later Irving began independent services in a hall with about 800 communicants, and in October he removed to a remodeled studio in Newman Street, leaving behind him the last remnants of the old Presbyterian order. Though Irving was the "angel" of the Church, the voices of the prophets left him little hearing. Cardale, Drummond, and the prophet 5 Taplin took the lead of the movement, and the new organization proceeded rapidly. New functionaries were created as the Spirit bade, on the analogy of New Testament indications, and presently there were six other congregations in London, forming, with Irving's, the counterpart of the seven churches of the Apocalypse. Irving accepted the whole development in faith, although he had conceived the apostolic office as something different, which should not interfere with the independence of himself as the "angel." But he had lost control of the movement, and those who now led it lost no opportunity of humiliating the man to whose personality they had owed so much. When the sentence of deposition was confirmed by the presbytery of Annan, and then by the Scottish general synod, and he returned to London strong in the consciousness of his call by God to the office of angel and pastor of the church, he was not allowed to baptize a child, but was told to wait until, on the bidding of the prophets, he should be again ordained by an apostle. His health was now failing, and his physician ordered him, in the autumn of 1834, to winter in the south. He went, however, to Scotland, where the prophets had promised him great success in the power of the Spirit, and died in Glasgow, where he is buried in the crypt of the cathedral. (T. KOLDE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Irving's *Collected Writings * were edited by his nephew, G. Carlyle, 5 vols., London, 1864-65. Besides the literature under CATHOLIC APOSTOLIC CHURCH, especially the biography by Mrs. Oliphant, and Carlyle's *Reminiscences,* consult D. Brown, *Personal Reminiscences of Edward Irving, * in *Expositor, * 1887; C. K. Paul, in *Biographical Sketches * London, 1883; W. A. Smith, *"Shepherd" Smith, the Universalist, * London, 1892.
IRVINGITES. Irvingites.

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IRVINGITES.** See CATHOLIC APOSTOLIC CHURCH; and IRVING, EDWARD.
ISAAC Isaac

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISAAC** (Hebr. *yizlutk,* more rarely *yishak,* the laugher"; LXX, *Isaak,* Vulg. *Isaac*): the son of Abraham and Sarah, who served as an object for testing his father's faith and obedience. He was born (according to P) in Abraham's hundredth year and in Sarah's ninetieth. Gen. xxi. 6 (E?)--cf. xvii. 17 (P), xviii. 12 sqq. (J)--brings the name into connection with his birth. Abraham's obedience was shown in the circumcision of the boy eight days after his birth (Gen. xxi. 4, P), and in his readiness to sacrifice, at God's command, this son for whom he had so ardently longed (chap. xxii.). Isaac in this submitted to the will of his father, just as he did later in his marriage with Rebekah, although he was then forty years old. Few details are given in regard to the remainder of Isaac's life, and he appears as a rather weak copy of his father. He manifested a lesser fondness for journeying, since his travels were confined to the southern portion of the land, the Negeb, and the neighboring territory. In this desolate region, the well Lahai-roi (Gen. xxiv. 62; the modern Munailah), Gerar, the Philistine city (xxvi. 1; the modern Jerar), the valley of Gerar (xxvi. 17), Beersheba (xxvi. 23), and finally Hebron (xxxv. 27), are places where he sojourned for a time. When at Gerar, according to Gen. xxvi. 7 sqq., he had an experience with King Abimelech similar to his father's (Gen. xx. 1 sqq., E, xii. 10 sqq., J). The similarity of the three accounts does not necessarily imply that they are variations of the same incident; but borrowings and substitutions may have taken place in oral tradition. Isaac was characterized, as contrasted with Abraham, by a certain advance in civilization. In Gerar he devoted himself both to the raising of flocks and herds and to agriculture. His food was game and his drink was wine, while Abraham obtained the latter only from some other prince. Isaac appeared always as pacifically inclined, yielding to his envious neighbors when they disputed with him the possession of wells, and yet he enjoyed a singular respect on the part of strangers, who considered it desirable to be on friendly footing with the "blessed of the Lord" (Gen. xxvi. 28 sqq.). The principal significance of Isaac is that he carried over the divine blessing of the covenant from Abraham to Jacob, the ancestor of Israel. After his wife had been for a long time barren (Gen. xxv. 21), twin children of very different characters, Esau and Jacob, were granted to him in answer to his prayer. Although the father clung to the elder, when old and blind he was forced by the stratagem of his wife to bestow upon his younger son, Jacob , the blessing which had been bequeathed to him by Abraham (Gen. xxvi. 3 sqq., 24). Isaac showed little independence either at home or abroad, in place of which his submission to the decrees of the Almighty gave him his position between Abraham the faithful and Jacob, the champion of the faith. In this trio Isaac represents that pious fidelity which guards the inherited blessing, more occupied with its preservation than with any idea of further gain. For later Jews he appears as "the chief of the bound and tortured" (Midrash to Esther), that is, the prototype of martyrs. The Story of Isaac is made up from the three Pentateuchal sources, which agree essentially in their narratives and guarantee the historical character of Isaac's personality. His name does not yield to the explanation that it belonged to a divinity or a tribe, the significance "he laughs" being inappropriate to both. The designation of God as "the fear of Isaac" (Gen. xxxi. 42, 53) is peculiar. Since this "fear" was sworn by, it must mean "divinity," corresponding to the Greek *sebas * in the sense of *sebasma,* "an object of awe or reverence." (C. VON ORELLI.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: A. Bernstein, *Ursprung der Sagen von Abraham, lsaak und Jakob, * Berlin, 1871; J. Popper, *Ursprung des Monotheisrnus,* pp. 261 sqq., ib. 1879; J. B. Mozley, *Ruling Ideas in Early Ages, * chaps. ii.-iii., New York, 1879; E. C. A. Riehm, *Handwörterbuch des biblischen Altertums,* pp. 791-792, Leipsic, 1893; G. B. Gray, *Studies in Hebrew Proper Names,* p. 214, London, 1896; G. Maspero, *Struggle of the Nations,* p. 68, ib. 1896; *DB,* ii. 483-485; *EB,* ii. 2174-2179 (stimulating); *JE,* vi. 616-618. Consult also the appropriate sections in works on the history of Israel and the commentaries on Genesis.
ISAAC OF ANTIOCH Isaac of Antioch

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISAAC OF ANTIOCH:** The name of a writer (perhaps of several writers) of the early Syrian Church. Jacob of Edessa (cf. W. Wright, *Catalogue of the Syriac Manuscripts in the British Museum,* ii. 603-604, London, 1871) distinguishes three of the name, two whom he calls orthodox and a third whom he styles a Chalcedonian heretic. The first was a disciple of Ephraem, and went to Rome in the time of Arcadius; on his return he was kept for some time in prison in Constantinople, and later became presbyter of Amida. The second, presbyter of Edessa, went to Antioch in the time of the Emperor Zeno and the patriarch Peter the Fuller (see MONOPHYSITES, §§ 4 sqq.), and preached against the Nestorians, taking his text from a parrot which he had heard screech the trisagion with the addition "crucified for us." The third, also from Edessa, was orthodox in the time of Bishop Paul (512 sqq.), but Nestorian under Asclepius (522 sqq.). Gennadius knows of two writers of the name. The second (*De vir. ill.*, lxvi.), presbyter of Antioch, lived to an advanced age and wrote much, including an elegy on the fall of Antioch (459); he died under Leo and Majorian (between 459 and 461). Zacharias Rhetor (ed. K. Ahrens and G. Krüger, Leipsic, 1889, p. *20) mentions "Isaac, the teacher of Syria," with Dada in the time of Arcadius and Theodosius. Dionysius of Telmahre knows of poems by Isaac on the capture of Rome by the Goths (410) and the secular games of 404. Johannes bar Shushan (d. 1073), who collected the writings of Isaac, calls him a disciple of Ephraem's disciple, Zenobius. There is an edition of his works (incomplete) by G. Bickell (2 vols., Giessen, 1873-77); thirty-seven productions out of about two hundred are given, including a poem of not less than 2,136 lines on the parrot and the trisagion, and another of 1,928 lines on repentance. A volume of Isaac's homilies has been published by P. Bedjan (Paris, 1903). E. NESTLE. BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. S. Assemani, *Bibliotheca orientalis,* i. 207-304, Rome, 1719; P. Zingerle, in *TQ*, lii (1870), 92-114; G. Cardahi, *Liber thesauri de arte poetica Syrorum,* pp. 21-25, Rome, 1875; W. Wright, *Short Hist. of Syriac Literature, * pp. 51-54, London, 1894; R. Duval, *Littérature syriaque,* pp. 340-341, Paris, 1900; *DCB,* iii. 295-296.
ISAAC OF NINEVEH Isaac of Nineveh

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISAAC OF NINEVEH:** Bishop of Nineveh in the seventh century. He was made bishop by the patriarch George (660-680), in succession to Moses, but retired after five months, and died, almost blind from much study, in the monastery of Rabban Shabor. One of his works exists in Syriac, Arabic, and Ethiopic, and also in a Greek translation by two monks, Patricius and Abraham, of the monastery of Mar Saba, southeast of Jerusalem, and published by Nicephorus (Leipsic, 1770; in *MPG,* lxxxvi. 799-888). A Latin translation under the title *Isaac Syrus, liber de contemptu mundi * in fifty-three chapters is in the *Bibliotheca magna * (Cologne, 1618, VI., ii. 688; Gallandi, *Bibliotheca,* xii. 3). Another work entitled "Letter to the Holy Father Simon in the Wonderful Mountain" is published in Greek in Mai's *Nova Bibliotheca, * vol. viii., part 3 (Rome, 1871), pp. 156-188; it is interesting for its information about Malpat of Edessa, the originator of the Messalians, and the knowledge it shows of apocalyptic literature. E. NESTLE. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The earlier literature, viz., J. S. Assemani, *Bibliotheca orientalis,* i. 44, Rome, 1719; W. Wright, *Short Hist. of Syriac Literature, * London, 1894; and J. B. Chabot, *De S. Isaaci Ninivitae vita, scriptis et doctrina,* Paris, 1892, is to be corrected by *Jésusdenah, évêgue de Bacrah, le livre de la chasteté, * ed. J. B. Chabot, Rome 1896, cf. J. B. Chabot in *Revue sémitique,* 1896, p. 254. Consult also: *DCB,* iii. 291-292; W. Wright, *Catalogue of Syriac MSS.,* ii. 569-581, London, 1870-72.
ISAAC BEN SHESHET BARFAT Isaac Ben Sheshet Barfat

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISAAC BEN SHESHET BARFAT:** Spanish Jewish talmudist; b. at Valencia in 1326; d. at Algiers in 1408. He studied at Barcelona, where he also began his life-work, early gaining a reputation as a talmudist and being called upon for legal opinions. When fifty he became rabbi, removed later to Saragossa, and thence to Valencia. In 1391, in consequence of persecution of the Jews, he fled, going to Algiers, where he was made rabbi. He was the author of 417 "responsa" which have been highly valued by competent authorities, published as *She 'elot u-Teshubot * (Constantinople, 1546-47); and possibly of an unpublished commentary on the Pentateuch. BIBLIOGRAPHY: *JE,* vi. 631-632.
ISAACS, ABRAM SAMUEL Isaacs, Abram Samuel

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISAACS, ABRAM SAMUEL:** Jewish rabbi; b. in New York City Aug. 30, 1852. He was educated at New York University (B.A., 1871) and the University of Breslau (1878), and since 1886 has been connected with New York University, where he has been professor of Hebrew (1886-94) and German (since 1887). He was also preacher to the East 86th Street Synagogue, New York City, in 1886-87, and since 1896 has been rabbi of B'nai Jeshurun Congregation, Paterson, N. J. He was editor of *The Jewish Messenger * from 1878 to 1903, and has written, *Life and Writings of Moses Chaim Luzzatto * (New York 1878) and *Stories from the Rabbis * (New York, 1894).
ISAIAH Isaiah

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### ISAIAH. The Prophet and his Times. Reports concerning Isaiah (§ 1). Chronology of the Period (§ 2). External Events (§ 3). Relation of Events to Faith (§ 4). Ideals Underlying Prophecies (§ 5). Isaiah's Life and Character (§ 6). The Book of Isaiah. Its Place in the Canon. The Text. Authorship. Prophetic Authorship in General (§ 1). Interrelations of i.-xxxv, and xl. Ixvi (§ 2). Authorship substantially Isaianic (§ 3). Isaianic Authorship of xxviii, xxxv (§ 4). Chapters ii.-xii (§ 5). Chapters xiii.-xzvii (§ 6). Results of the Investigation (§ 7). The Critical View. The Problem (§ 1). Structure of the Book (§2). Results of Criticism (§ 3). Analysis of Isa. i.-xxxix (§ 4). Analysis of Isa. xl.-lxvi (§ 5). Conclusion (§ 6). **I. The Prophet and His Times:** The name rendered "Isaiah" in English has in the Hebrew two forms, *Yesha'yah, * and *Yesha'yahu, * the latter in his book, II Kings xviii.-xxi., and I Chron. xxv. 3, 15, xxvi. 25, II Chron. xxvi. 22, xxxii. 32, the former in I Chron. iii. 21; Neh. xi. 7. In the Septuagint it varies greatly, taking the forms *lesias, lessias, Ioseas, Hesaias, Isaias, Osaias. * The derivations and meanings given are quite varied. Outside the book called by his name and II Kings xviii.-xxi., Isaiah the prophet is mentioned only twice in the Bible. II Chron, xxvi. 22 1 states that the acts of Uzziah of Judah were written down by Isaiah the prophet, the son of Amoz. The method of citation here deviates from the usual formula, so that either incompleteness or defacement of the text is suspected, while the Septuagint lacks the phrase " son of Amoz " and has further variations. The passage adds nothing to knowledge of the prophet gained elsewhere. It has been taken, in connection with Isa. i. 1, as ground for the conjecture that the prophet lived through the entire reigns of the four kings mentioned, and that Isa. vi. tells of a renewed call of the prophet after a period of quietness. This is favored by the position of chap. vi., and modern students are inclined to attribute chaps, i.-v. wholly or in part to the early years of Uzziah. II Chron. xxxii. 32 speaks of a record in the "Vision of Isaiah" of the deeds of Hezekiah which is in the Book of Kings. The Septuagint, Vulgate, and Targum place an "and" before "in the book," thus mentioning two sources. It is to be noticed that "Vision of Isaiah" was the title of the canonical Book of Isaiah (Isa. i. 1). The passage was early taken as indicating an independent "Vision of Isaiah," and an apocryphal book of that character was cited by Origen, and is perhaps the "Martyrdom (or Ascension) of Isaiah" known in the Ethiopic (see PSEUDEPIGRAPHA, OLD TESTAMENT, II. 34), dealing with the martyrdom of Isaiah under Manasseh. This tradition of a martyrdom appears also in the Gemara (*Yebamot* 49b) as drawn from "an early genealogical record" and due to a condemnation of certain utterances of the prophet. Another tradition connects the death of Isaiah with his condemnation of the act of Manasseh recorded in II Kings xxi. 7, and brings into relation with this event the passage Isa. lxvi. 1 sqq., and a prediction of the coming of Nebuchadrezzar to destroy the temple. This aroused the wrath of Manasseh, who ordered the prophet to be brought and slain. Isaiah fled and took refuge in the heart of a tree, which closed about him and hid him. But his pursuers sawed through the tree until the blood of the prophet flowed forth as water. The passages II Kings xxi. 16, xxiv. 3-4 are brought into relation with this tradition and the event is said to have occurred on Tammuz 17, corresponding to July 6, given in the Roman Catholic calendar (cf. *ASB,* July, ii. 250 sqq.; A. Klostermann, *Das Datum des Martyrium Jesaias im römischen Kalendar, * in *TSK,* 1880, pp. 536 sqq.). The one tradition of value seems to be that which places his death in the reign of Manasseh. This tradition may be brought into connection with the title of the book by way of defining the period of activity of the prophet. To 2 the period of the four kings mentioned in the title may be added an undefined but short period under Manasseh, and Isa. vi. 1 is often taken as indicating the entry of Isaiah upon prophetic work in the last year of Uzziah. Supposing that he was then twenty years old, his age at the accession of Manasseh would be eighty-one; thus: the destruction of Jerusalem was in 586 B.C., the, eleventh year of Zedekiah; then, according to the reckoning of the Book of Kings, Manasseh began to reign in 696 B.C., Hezekiah in 725 B.C., Ahaz in 741 B.C., Jotham in 757 B.C., and the death of Uzziah would fall in 758 B.C. [or 757]; the siege of Samaria under Shalmaneser began in the fourth year of Hezekiah, 722 B.C., and its capture by Sargon in Hezekiah's sixth year, 720 B.C. If it is assumed, as is most probable, that the sign on the dial of Ahaz is to be connected with the eclipse of Mar. 14, 711 B.C. (F. K. Ginzel, *Spezieller Kanon der Sonnen- und Mondfinsternisse,* Berlin, 1899), visible in Jerusalem, then the foregoing statements in general and the assignment of the year 711 B.C. for the healing of Hezekiah tally with astronomical data. Therefore the embassy from Merodach-baladan (Isa. xxxix. 1) would fall at the earliest in 711 B.C., and Hezekiah's determination to throw off Assyrian overlordship would fall in 710 B.C. The Ptolemaic Canon allows to a Mardokempados twelve years as king of Babylon, and to his conqueror, Sargon, five years; then the last year of Mardokempados is the thirty-eighth of the era of Nabonassar, and the first year of Sargon is 709 B.C. Then that the "king of Babylon," Merodach-baladan (Isa. xxxix. 1), is not an indefinite usurper of that name, but that the Mardokempados of the Ptolemaic Canon is the Merodach-baladan of the Assyrian inscriptions does not imply error either in that he is called "son of Yakin" in the Canon or that he is called "son of Baladan" in Isa. xxxix. The former is accounted for by his capital being at Bit Yakin or Dur Yakin, evidently taken as named for an eponymous ancestor, and the latter may have arisen from a like connection with a supposed ancestor mentioned in the second element of his own name. Thus the Assyrian data harmonize with the foregoing calculations. According to contract tablets adduced by G. Smith (*Assyrian Eponym Canon, * London, 1875, pp. 86-87), Sargon's fourteenth year fell in the eponymate of Samashupahir, and his fifteenth year as king of Assyria is stated to have been his third as king of Babylon; his thirteenth year over Assyria was therefore his first over Babylon, i.e., 709 B.C., and his reign over Assyria began 722-721 B.C.; Sargon's seventeenth and last regnal year was 705 B.C., and the first of his successor, Sennacherib, was 704 B.C. The Eponym Canon and the Ptolemaic Canon give assistance from this point on. From Assyrian records it is clear that the regnal year of Sargon began in the middle of an eponymate. The discrepancy between the Biblical date of 720 B.C. and the apparent Assyrian of 722 B.C. is explained partly by confusion between the beginning of the eponymous year and the regnal year of the king, and partly by a transposition occurring in the Canon lists. Concerning the relation of Shalmaneser to his predecessor, Tiglath-Pileser, nothing can be said, as the Canons fail here. But if the first regnal year of Sennacherib fell in the last part of the eponymate of Nabudinipus and the first part of the latter's successor's, Sennacherib can not have made an expedition to the West in Hezekiah's fourteenth year (Isa. xxxvi. 1), which expedition he states that he made in his own third year, when he shut Hezekiah up "like a bird in a cage" (Schrader, *KAT*, p. 293). If it be assumed that Sennacherib's full regnal year is meant, it might fall in 702-701 B.C., and with this would agree the supposition that the surely erroneous dating in Hezekiah's fourteenth year of Isa. xxxvi. 1 is due to a previous mention of his twenty-fourth year. So that in 702 B.C., according to the Assyrian basis, began the Assyrian subjection of Judah and Hezekiah. Then Isaiah's activity as a prophet would fall between 758 and 690 B.C. at the latest, a period of singular moment. The Assyrians, in 3 their conquest of Syria and Palestine, laid a basis for further conquests in the northwest and southwest, hindered, however, by the danger from the Medes and other peoples in their rear. By the movements which went on about them, the Jews were brought into contact with world politics, and in the Book of Isaiah the fortunes of distant and neighboring peoples receive larger notice than had been customary. The northern kingdom fell from the high estate it achieved under Jeroboam II. after a career in which the most contradictory state policies had been pursued. It had become identified with an attempt to unite Syria, Israel, and Judah against Assyria, in which the refusal of Judah had led to an attempt to set aside the Davidic dynasty in Judah. Uzziah had thought to strengthen his own kingdom by securing his boundaries with fortresses and by heaping up the means and materials of war to furnish material guaranties for the faith of the Jews in the security of the city of Yahweh and of the dynasty. Ahaz preferred to depend upon the clemency of the Assyrian king. Hezekiah rejected this means of quiet, and put his trust in Yahweh without using human means. The lessons of the period for the pious of Israel and of all times are that Yahweh reaches the ends corresponding to his being through 4 the history of his people and of the world. It does not follow that he repudiates his people or his promises to their fathers, nor yet that he makes the foundation of his kingdom dependent upon the hegemony of any earthly state where his worship should be conducted. While he permitted the Davidic kingdom to fall apart and Jerusalem to become the capital of the smaller division, allowed Israel's land to receive a new population, and the Davidic king to become a vassal of Assyria, while he brought to nought Sennacherib's plans against Jerusalem, the purpose seemed to be to purify the faith of the people that his might and will should ordain healing or destruction. The Israelites had supposed God's interests bound up with those of his people in his land and its institutions. But they had to learn through discipline that the people to whom his promises came and to whom they applied was a people which corresponded in its essence to his own sanctity and were not dependent upon mere fleshly hopes. It contravened past experience that he who had promised to be the savior of his people should permit them to be beaten and subdued, while to tyrants whose purpose he hated he had given the victory. The kingdom of Jeroboam, founded on cunning and force, was no better than other kingdoms; nor was the kingdom of Judah, with its externals of sacrifice, that to which he had made his promises. Of course, the conquerors, who thanked themselves and their gods for the victory, were even less fitted to be his servants. The destruction of the foe at the pinnacle of his greatness and the restoration of his people were to reveal the fulfilment of his promises, no more to be endangered by the rule of sin. Yet Yahweh had not given over his land, destroyed his people, laid in ruins the house of David and Jerusalem, burned up the world and 5 destroyed mankind in order to create a new earth. Rather the idea was that symbolized by the plant world, where the dying vegetation promises new life by its seeds and its shoots. So in the dying Israel there was an imperishable remainder, which was to survive destruction and to live again in unassailable dominion, to be menaced neither by sin nor the anger of God. The people which had been destroyed was to be awakened to new life, and the house of David was to rise to renewed kingly power in the son of a young woman. But this was to take form neither in nation, state, nor race. The germ can be considered only as an invisible church known only to Yahweh. And since in Israel the prophet of Yahweh is he who learns the will of Yahweh in the conditions of things and translates the dark sayings of God as uttered in the events of history, so the people gathered by the prophet's word and unified by it is the indestructible Zion, the enduring remainder of Israel which makes the prophet's teachings the ground of its inner life. The prophet is the medium of this new life. His conduct in life, his hope in sorrow, are the prefigurement and pledge of that which is destined for the community. Such a person does Isaiah appear in the testimony, direct and indirect, which his book carries. Outside of the reports of his life already considered, 6 it may be gathered that he was a citizen of Jerusalem; that he had several children, one of whom, a son, must have been born in Jotham's reign (vii. 3), and another during the Syrian-Ephraimitic war (viii. 1 sqq.); that he regarded wife, children, and the events of family life as living pictures and true signs of the prophecies he uttered; that he looked back upon the hour of consecration pictured in chap. vi. as pivotal, and as conditioning his inner life (viii. 11 sqq.). Since his care and hopes were so different from those which public life offered, he deemed it his duty to implant in continuing security in the heart of a receptive circle, for use in the future, the divine knowledge which had come to him. In chap, vii., in the midst of the Syrian-Ephraimitic crisis, Isaiah sought in vain to direct the policy of the Davidic house away from dependence upon Assyria to trust in Yahweh, and in chap. viii. testified that the waters of Shiloah were sufficient to withstand the turbulence of Rezin and Pekah, and they did not need the addition of the flood of Assyrian might, which would overflow the land it was designed to protect. Later Isaiah again sought to stem the course of public events among his people by glowing predictions of positive success. Such a case is presented in the reign of Hezekiah when the foe was drawn away from Jerusalem and the danger to the city was averted by the catastrophe which befell the enemy. **II. The Book of Isaiah.--1. Its Place in the Canon:** In the Hebrew Bible Isaiah stands first in the division of the so-called later prophets and precedes Jeremiah and Ezekiel evidently upon the ground of priority in history, but in the Septuagint it is preceded by the book of the Minor Prophets (cf. Jerome, *Ad Paulinum, Prologus galeatus*). The Hebrew order is confirmed by the treatment in Ecclus, xlviii. 22-xlix. 10. The Talmudic tract *Baba bathra* (col. xiv., col. 2) makes Jeremiah follow Kings and puts Isaiah between Ezekiel and the Twelve according to the principle which arranges books approximately in order of length. Reasons for this difference in order are variously given: Vitringa thought that the placing of Jeremiah first was due to the tradition that Jeremiah had composed the Books of Kings; Lightfoot alleged apologetic interests which used the order in which Jeremiah stood first to show that Matt. xxvii. 9 was not in error, since the whole of the prophetic canon might then be called after the name of the first book; still others thought it might be due to the fact that after Jeremiah and Ezekiel had taken form, Isaiah had been changed or that it had taken form only in the time of Cyrus. But these methods of reasoning are not conclusive. **2. The Text:** The variety of contents and style, the idealistic character of the oracles and the originality of thought have from earliest 7 times made this book difficult to understand. Much read and often edited, it could not maintain its original form, and it became the object of an exegesis which sought to come to an understanding with the traditional text as an inviolable and sacred thing. The condition of the text in chaps, xl.-lxvi. may be seen in Klostermann's commentary (Munich, 1893) of chaps. xxxvi.-xxxix. in the same author's commentary on the parallel section in Kings (Munich, 1887) and in *TSK*, 1884. And revision of the whole text of chaps. i.-xxxv. is required before exegesis can be securely founded, an especially difficult task, for which the test of meter and artistic form, so often suggested, is of very little value. Indeed, changes of form by the prophet or his disciples are not excluded from consideration; for example, in the great picture of the judgment under the figure of an earthquake in xxiv., at verse 7 there is the beginning of an alphabetical elegy in six-lined strophes, the first two strophes of which are present and complete, while of the third only the first half is given. Similarly in xxiii. 16 only the beginning of a known song is cited, and this may explain the break at the end of xxiv. 12. Not to be disregarded are the paraphrases of Jonathan, the fragments of Aquilas, Theodotion, and Symmachus as they have come 8 down with the marginal notes of the Hexapla and from the notes of Jerome. These will at times serve to indicate the introduction of errors in later times. Thus, Jonathan indicates in viii. 14 the loss of "for you" after "he shall be," a conclusion supported not only by the Vulgate, but by the second person in the Septuagint. Doubled readings or translations in these texts are often a guide to the original text, since they point to a misreading or a misunderstanding of a reading to which such misunderstanding is a direct guide, as in xxxiii. 7, where "their valiant ones" was read by the translators in a double sense as the object of fear and as the subject, which led to further changes in the text of the verse. The Septuagint shows a similar doubled reading in ii. l6b through a mistake of the eye involving further changes in the text. Sometimes a doubled reading is merely a mistake in copying produced by itacism, as in viii. 23, codex 304. But a critical text of the Septuagint will show that sometimes the translator in deciphering his Hebrew exemplar has in a surprising manner gone wrong through too great confidence in his apprehension of the context. Such a case is presented in viii. 7-8. Examinations of the Septuagint make it perfectly clear that its present text is the result of a long period of correction of a text which sought to give the sense of the prophetical deliverances without having a sure insight into the meaning and the form of the original. But the early text together with the corrections themselves and the differences between them often put the student upon the track of a better Hebrew text than the one which has been transmitted. There is in mind here not only the 111 of xxix. 3 in the Septuagint, which alone explains why Yahweh, who is beleaguering Ariel in verse 1, has made mention of the siege of Ariel by David in early times, but also the *toi agapetoi sou* of xxvi. 17. In this latter case the 11`t'~, which apparently lay before the translator, goes back to an original IVA which belonged to verse 18 and marks 112V:-.as superfluous, suggested indeed by the doubled G1a of Jonathan. Such cases as this, which are frequent, are sufficient to enable the student to correct the errors and sometimes the gaps which occur in the synagogue text of the Hebrew. Again, the original of x. 11 was doubtless originally "shall I not also do so to Samaria and her idols and to Jerusalem and her images." The present text sets the lot of Samaria as a type and prophecy of the lot of Jerusalem, and pictures the fall of Samaria as a past event, which is the result of a redaction which changed the text of the prophet to square with a later historical situation. Mistakes of pointing are also to be noted, as when 1bD0 in i. 7 is thus pointed as a noun instead of il nefd'I as a verb, or in x. 13 the waw in VOW and 't''ft1 is given the simple shewa instead of kamets. Still worse is the pointing 1a1 for `111 in ix. 8, for which the Septuagint has *thanatos,* "death," which corresponds closely to the "pestilence" for which the proposed reading stands. Accentuation and vocalization are both astray in ix. 1, "in the former time," where for 11317 should be read (11)J1y5 and the words should be joined with the clause which goes before. Part of the errors of text are due to the difficulties which underlay the consonantal form. This especially occurs in transferring an initial 7 to the end of the preceding word, but appears also in the loss of the letter in the middle or end of a word, as when C51410t for t115 hN`1N was given the form n5H'1m. A similar case occurs in viii. 6, where the double reading J1NV'J 11N1V(b) came to be written lltittltV(D), and then was changed into rite Iblft. Other changes are caused by the inclusion in the text of notes originally made in the margin, for a case of which cf. vii. 8-9 with verse 4. With such enlargements of the text correspond also gaps, which are the result of carelessness or chance, or which rest upon intended shortening of the reading or upon customary abbreviations. A case of the last is found in viii. 21, where "curse by their king and their God" should read "curse the house of their king and their God," where the letter beth, represented in the English by "by," is an abbreviation or a mistake for *beth, * "house." Between "for" and "head" in viii. 8 has fallen out the word xlo~t, "I will take away." If, as in the last case cited, a word may fall out, so frequently from a word a letter may be missing, of which numerous examples might be cited. To these causes of change may be added exchanges of letters which either look or sound alike. Thus, in xi. 4, j?'1y demanded by the parallelism appears as r1K, and in i. 7, xxv. 2, and xxix. 5, instead of a''Tt there appears b'1t. Intentional amendment appears in the change from the third person to the first in v. 3-6, influenced by verse 2. Indeed, the riddles of interpretation in whole sections of Isaiah, such as the six deliverances of chaps. xxviii.-xxxv., the section xxiv.-xxvii., and their relation to other parts of the book require as a preliminary to their solution the amendment of the text, which is a preliminary to the work of the higher criticism and the determination of the time to which these sections belong. **3. Authorship: ** It is evident that a prophet who intervened in public affairs in crises so important, whose experiences were so large, who, 9 even in the quiet of private life, was unwearyingly diligent in instructing a band of disciples with a broad future in view, employed writing not only for the purpose of extending his personal activity beyond his immediate environment, as, for example, to the Israelites in exile, to the end that they might have his words of comfort in their original form, but that he had an outlook upon the more distant future. This must have been especially the case when the subject matter was issued at the joining-point of the past and the future when old things were becoming new, when the utterances were needed as a means of recognizing God's work at the time and for the time. It must have been in such a spirit that the prophets wrote their books and unified their earlier utterances in written discourse. They were enabled in this way to supplement by adding historical notices and even to refer to the words of earlier prophets. Since, in the book ascribed to Isaiah, there exist in the first person recollections of the fifty-second year of Uzziah, and in close connection with these and in similar style discourses which relate to affairs at least sixteen years later in the time of Ahaz, and inasmuch as these latter approve themselves as Isaianic by their congruity with the activities and character of Isaiah as shown in chaps. xxxvi.-xxxvii., and further, since in this book there appear whole series of addresses parallel in matter with the occasions of the time, and setting forth the same main idea, it is a fair presumption that Isaiah undertook a collection of his prophecies. The question is whether the present book contains only his sayings, or contains them in full, or in their original order. Until this is settled, it is of little use to quote what Sirach, Ambrosius, Jerome, Cyril, and others down to the present have said as to the worth of Isaiah from a Christian, ethical, or esthetic standpoint. To judge of all this a thoroughly new working over is required, a historical investigation, and for this there is no better and no other 10 starting-point than the section in chaps. xxxvi-xxxix., a trustworthy narrative which has found place also in the Books of Kings (xviii. 13 sqq.). This narrative is interjected by the compiler of the book between two well-arranged collections of anonymous addresses, the first of which have relation to the Assyrian period and correspond to the contents of chaps. xxxvi.-xxxvii., while the second series has relation to the Babylonian side and corresponds to chap. xxxix. The second of the two series of addresses begins with a command to give comfort as the first closed with encouragement (xxxv. 3 sqq.); the second comes to a close in an opposition of Edom and Zion (lx. 1-lxiii. 6) just as does the first (xxxiii. 13-xxxv. 10). Since in both the general view of the Holy Land and Jerusalem is that of a desolate and depopulated region, to be repeopled by the return of the exiled, doubtless the editor meant to convey the idea that, of both parts, the Isaiah of xxxvi.-xxxix. is the prophetic author. It is therefore unscientific arbitrariness, instead of setting apart chaps. xxviii.-lxvi, and employing chaps. xxviii.-xxxix. as the key to xl.-lxvi., to break off after xxxv.-xxxix. and to imagine oneself in a new region. He who reads xxxv. 3-4 does not stumble at xl. 1; and only he who reads xxviii.-xxxix. can understand xlviii. 3-11, and can regard the same prophet as basing a second prediction upon the fulfilment of the first. He can apply xlii. 19 to the downfall of the northern kingdom, and xliii. 8-10 to the deliverance from Sennacherib, and Ivi. 9-Ivii. 21 to the end of the Isaianic times. Whoever dares to read the six addresses of a nameless prophet in xxviii.-xxxv. beginning with "Woe" and to regard them as Isaianic as a whole and to follow this out in such alleged exilic pieces as xxxiv.-xxxv. has no philosophical reason for the timidity with which he refuses to recognize xl.-Ixvi. as also Isaianic. A hindrance to this has been the obviousness with which Cyrus is mentioned even by name, and the assurance with which the downfall of Babylon and the freeing of the Israelites is announced, predictions which the modern construction of all elements of the prophetic consciousness on the basis of our knowledge of his times seem to make impossible. But the Servant of Yahweh who is named Righteous is as concretely and definitely indicated as Cyrus and his relations to Babylon and Israel; and the hegemony of the restored Jerusalem and the repopulating of the Holy Land is more definitely portrayed than the downfall of Babylon. And, although the one fits better with Jesus of Nazareth, and the other with the Jerusalem of Herod's time, at least in externals, than with any other prophet or with the Jerusalem of any other time, yet the refusal is made so to relate the connections. If the enthusiastic utterances of a prophet work out into realization 500 years later, why could they not with reference to Cyrus? In fact, the book does not predict a coming victor to bear the name of Cyrus, but says of one who has come that he is the realization of predictions made long before for Jerusalem; the victory and success of Cyrus had been so directly indicated that it was evident that he could use his victory only as Yahweh willed, and the honor was to come not to him, but to Yahweh and his people. Thus Yahweh had laid violent hands upon the prophet when he seized upon the Isaianic period in which to bring before the prophet's vision this picture of the future. Isaiah realized that the present conqueror had been predicted long before as called from the East to carry out Yahweh's purposes of punishment, but that he had been driven back when in wilfulness he had attempted to go farther than Yahweh's purposes had carried. Why, then, should he not foresee a second conqueror, coming from the East and more completely realizing God's designs, who, by the very misfortunes which he brought, should create the desire in the heathen world for Yahweh, the only healing God, who is to be found in the midst of his people (xlv. 14-25)? And why should he not foresee the prophet who should so complete the work of renovation as to bring about the regeneration of the community? And to what prophet could ouch a vision so appropriately have come as to Isaiah, a man who, in the midst of the most untoward circumstances, could see around him the promise of a brilliant and righteous future? If this be true, a new exposition of chaps. xl.-lxvi. is required (the view-point of which was indicated in the *Lutherische Zeitschrift, * 1876) 11 and a new investigation of the framework. But it will not do to resolve the section into a threefold arrangement, each part having nine chapters. As the first part is introduced by xl. 1-11, the second part is prefaced by xlviii. 16-22. The more naturally the investigation proceeds, the surer does it become that xl.-lxvi. does not as such proceed from Isaiah, but that it arranges and works over older prophecies. The tendency of modern criticism is to distinguish the "Servant of Yahweh section" and a "Trito-Isaiah," and, indeed, as many Isaiahs as differences in style suggest; yet by retaining for them the name Isaiah this criticism follows a correct instinct. The editor urges chaps. xxxvi.-xxxix. upon the reader as the key to the meaning of both xl.-lxvi. and xxviii.-xxxv., and as the vindication of these parts as Isaianic in substance. It appears from the book of Isaiah that at least from the thirteenth year of Hezekiah till after the 12 campaign of Sennacherib the prophet wielded a weighty and acknowledged authority with king, court, and priests, that he made predictions which were observably realized, that he assured the continuance of Jerusalem and Judah beyond the period of Assyrian stress and storm, while Assyria was to become a possession of Babylon; but besides this, it is clear that Hezekiah's resolution to withstand the Assyrian demands rested upon Isaiah's warnings and promises, and that the prophet was the responsible guarantor of a seemingly impossible fortunate issue. Indeed, xxxvii. 26 indicates a prediction by Isaiah of the Assyrian victories before Sennacherib's appearance. Upon the verification of this word of Yahweh as the Lord of the world was built the assurance that in the very moment when Assyrian victories were made the basis of belief that Yahweh was overcome the impotence of the Assyrian against him would be made manifest, and this dispensation would reveal decisively Yahweh's relation to Jerusalem and to the Davidic house. In view of this, the six woes which appear indissolubly woven together in chaps. xxviii.-xxxv. impress one as rendering exactly the historical position of the Isaiah of chaps. xxxvi.-xxxix. and as belonging to the texture of thought which is there demonstrably that of Isaiah. It maybe asked whether these were put together by the prophet or by one of his disciples out of his deliverances. A doubt has been raised by the passage xxx. 6-7, a piece which is related to the "burdens" of chaps. xxi.-xxii.; but the interconnection of xxx. 5 with verse 8 indicates a continuity of thought. Moreover, chaps. xxxiii.-xxxv. are inseparably bound together, as was long ago recognized by Ewald; the direction in xxxiv. 1 sqq. to all peoples to listen to the story of the coming judgment is parallel to that in xxxiii. 13 warning the nations to take to heart the judgment upon the Assyrian host. If they do this, they may be exempt from the general judgment to be executed upon the peoples hostile to Yahweh, which is to find its chief exemplification in the punishment of Idumea (xxxiv. 6). Yet when Ewald remarked that xxxv. must be regarded as Isaianic, while of xxxiv. so much can not be certainly affirmed, he was within the bounds of probability, since it is likely that the prophet here used earlier predictions. The passage xxxiv.-xxxv. would never have been taken for exilic had not first the waste in xxxv. been arbitrarily and unnaturally regarded as the desert between Babylon and Judea, and if, in the second place, the "book of Yahweh" of xxxiv. 16 had not been foolishly regarded as the book of our prophet. This book is indeed the book of the kingdom, in which the future world-king Yahweh has entered the names of his peoples with their provinces (Ps. Ixxxvii.), a book that was known to Isaiah, (iv. 3); while the play of this pictorial representation of the depopulation of a land exactly corresponds to that in xxxiii. 23, in xxx. 32-33, 23-24, and to the taunting, enigmatical character which all these discourses show. If now chaps, xxxiii.-xxxv. belong together as a sixth discourse, Isaiah is the originator, and the present arrangement corresponds to his intention. Then the foreign elements, whether by another author or by himself from another occasion, can not be separated from the whole. It is a distortion to regard xxviii. 1-6 as an oracle concerning Samaria; rather is xxviii. the first of six oracles about Judah and Jerusalem, dating from the time before the fall of the northern kingdom as a state, and belonging with iv. 2 sqq., as the resemblance between that passage and xxviii. 5--6 shows. It is true that here, as in ii.-iv., the prophet has employed other oracles, either his own or those of another prophet; moreover, to remove xxviii. 1-6 would leave what followed without a beginning and destroy the cycle of oracles. Accordingly the prophet and the editor of these six deliverances are essentially the same, while the relation is different from that in xl.-Ixvi. But the editor put these passages before xxxvi.-xxxix. as he put xl.-lxvi. after them because of their formally and essentially similar situation. Isaiah could not publish this book without indicating his part in it; and it is possible that Isa. i. was the introduction to the book xxviii.-xxxv. when Isaiah or his disciple published it as a monument of his activity in the brilliant prophetic period of Hezekiah for the following generation, and that the editor inserted between i. and xxviii. the parts which have their own titles (ii. 1 and xiii. 1). 5. Chapters ii.-xii. There is now in our possession an assured basis from which to consider and decide how far the two sections ii.-xii. and xiii.-xxvii., which bear Isaiah's name, do so with justice. There is not only a large number of parallels with chaps. xxviii.-xxxix., but there is a remarkable agreement in situation, in spite of the intermingling of varied fragments and complete sections. There come out particularly the ingratitude and obstinacy of Judah and Jerusalem and the consequently necessary purging by punishment (ii.-iv.). It seems credible that Isaiah himself arranged ii.-iv.; and as he surely wrote vi. and xii. as components of a connected whole, all the individual parts of v.-xii. are traceable to him, though that interpolations have taken place need not be denied. It is possible that these last were, according to the custom of the times, attributed to Isaiah, and that the editor had the book in manuscript form before him in which the individual pieces had been inserted unintelligently among others which were then laid aside or put in other connections, and that transpositions were made which brought these parts into positions earlier or later in the book than they originally occupied. 6. Chap. xiii.-xxvii. In the second part, which separates into the four "burdens" of xiii.-xviii. and the six of xix.-xxiii., there are certain guiding threads which come both from i.-xii. and from xxviii.-xxxv. The "burden" of the beasts of the South in xxx. 6 sqq. finds its counterparts in the "burdens" of xix.-xxiii.; and xxxiv. 1 sqq. agrees with xviii. 3. On the other hand, the note of the leveling of the heights found in chap ii. is repeated in xix. and xxiii., while the doing away of the lordship of Jacob and of the remains of Damascus in xviii. 12 sqq. is anticipated in viii. 7-10. Indeed, chap. xviii. comes into connection with both xi. 11 and lxvi. 20-21 in its thought of the return of the Hebrews from distant lands. The "burdens" are marked out from all other prophetic oracles by the fact that they bear the impress of having been delivered in the ecstatic state, and besides this they deal with the immense or the distant in time. They take on a different coloring entirely from those prophecies which come out of the prophet's own life or relate to the history of the times. Thus it comes about that they are separated from the other deliverances of the prophet and appear as cycles of deliverances distinguished by their tone. So their titles arise from a catchword, or a subject, or a locality, or an emblem some of which can be shown to rest upon mistakes of the text (xxi. 1). Under these circumstances it is necessary to ask whether they are arranged after the literary ideas of the prophet Isaiah. It is remarkable that the oracle on Philistia (xiv. 29 sqq.), the people on the western border, passes on in xv.-xvi. to Moab and Edom, on the east and southeast, and in xvii. 1 to Damascus and the Holy Land in order to portray the extreme need in Israel and the overpowering revolution in the salvation of Jerusalem (xviii. 7). This corresponds to the way in which Amos reached the expression of the judgment upon Israel (Amos i.-ii). In xv.-xvi. Isaiah has so remodeled an old prophecy that it now has a relation to the foregoing "burden"; x. 5-12 is specifically Isaianic, so that the arrangement of at least three of these "burdens" is his. But there is a clear connection of these with the oracle in xvii. 12-xviii. 7, which shows a deliverance in Zion and the substitution of the government of a Davidic rule in place of that of the condemned tyrant of the peoples. This tyrant, the king of the satirical song in xiv. 4 sqq., is an ideal representation of the tyranny which is opposed to God, which subdues the world and oppresses God's people, but is cast into the depth of Hades. By his overthrow Yahweh frees the world of its incubus, and Zion becomes the refuge of the peoples under the Davidic dynasty. Similarly, the downfall of Babylon is pictured in xiii., and it is possible that in chap xix. the tyrant who oppresses the Egyptians is this same ideal tyrant by whose overthrow Egypt is to become a province of Canaan. The explanation of the position of xxi.-xxii. between the entirely parallel "burdens" of xix.-xx. and xxiii. is more difficult. In xxi. clearly the fate of heathen cities is determined by the decrees of Yahweh, for the execution of which the watchers are waiting. Chap. xxii. shows a contrast in the view of the valley of vision, where the watcher bewails the coming misfortune, while in the second part the expectations of Shebna for a quiet death and honorable burial in a chosen place are predicted to be baseless. The two chapters seem to show the necessity of the purgation of sin through death, out of which resurrection is to come. But this is related to the portrayal in xxiv. The succeeding chapters seem to portray like processes through which alike Israel and the nations are to pass the particular judgments upon the nations which have been passed in review being generalized until there comes into view the salvation of the once rejected people, awakened into new life (xxvi. i-19, cf. ix. 2). So that in the second half the ruling idea is the universal kingdom of Yahweh as it arises out of the judgment of the nations and the humiliation of human might and centers of power, the earthly representation of which is the throne and city of David rained to a glorious eminence. 7. Results of the Investigation. The transmission and arrangement of this book demand of the reader that he view as the source of its peculiar prophetic content and as its predictive subject the historically known Isaiah, who orally and by writing sought to mold public opinion and reared up by esoteric instruction the followers and disciples (viii. 16 sqq., lix. 21) who were heirs of his prophecy to continue his testimony. These heirs of Isaianic prophecy received his testimony and made it fruitful partly by publishing in book form his oral and written testimony for "Judah and Jerusalem" (i. 1), and partly by reproducing in the circles of the faithful the esoteric instruction given them (xlviii. 16) and making it the basis and guide of their addresses. In order to preserve essentially and in completeness the testimony of Isaiah, these developments of Isaianic contents required later fixation in writing and union with the then existing book of Isaiah. Since the author of the addition in Ixiii. 7-lxvi. 24, whose theodicy reproduces Isaianic declarations, looked back upon the destruction of the temple, and since the preacher of xli. 1 sqq. had seen the victorious march of Cyrus, the origin of the present book is later than 550 B.C. This method of treating the Isaianic deliverances, apart from other results, was worked out in abbreviations (as in ii.-iv.), enrichment (as in the lyrics of the Deutero-Isaiah), and reinterpretation (e.g., xiv. 5 sqq.). In view of these results fuller justice is done the book if its relation to the historical Isaiah is the guide to its exegesis than if the tradition regarding its authorship is disregarded and its authors are scattered along through the centuries. (AUGUST KLOSTERMANN.) III. The Critical View: 1. The Problem. The Book of Isaiah in its present form is very generally regarded as possessing a certain unity of plan and purpose. The traditional view has from time immemorial discovered, in this unity, the pen of a single author, Isaiah, the contemporary of Hezekiah, while recent critical scholarship maintains that this writing was arranged and edited by some unknown scribe or scribes, acting as diaskeuasts in the first quarter of the first century B.C. In a little over a quarter of a century, after Döderlein (1775) in his commentary on Isaiah first threw serious doubt on the genuineness of Isa. xl.-lxvi., a fragmentary hypothesis of the origin of this prophetic work gradually gained in popularity. The latter view was first enunciated by Koppe in his notes to Bishop Lowth's work on Isaiah (1779-81). Koppe's theory, that the canonical Book of Isaiah was made up of eighty-five fragments, never won general acceptance as it was strenuously opposed by the Hebraist Gesenius and the commentator Hitzig. But a new form of the fragmentary hypothesis (see below, §§ 3 sqq.), differing materially from that of Koppe, has won many adherents among Biblical scholars since it vas brilliantly advocated by Duhm (1892), Cheyne (1895), and Marti (1900). 2. Structure of the Book. To understand fully the history of critical opinion, and especially its latest phases, one must note the structure of the book. All commentators, modern as well as ancient, have observed the threefold division into which the Book of Isaiah naturally falls: (1) i.-xxxv., (2) xxxvi.-xxxix., (3) xl.- lxvi. The second of these groups, giving an account of Isaiah's activity in the crisis produced by Sennacherib's invasion, 701 B.C., was excerpted from the Book of Kings. Chapters xxxvi.- xxxix. form the dividing line between the two main sections of the work. The passages on one side differ from those on the other in historical background, point of view, theological conceptions, diction and phraseology. The earlier chapters reflect the historical changes and movements of 740-701 B.C.; the monarchs mentioned--Hezekiah, Sargon (xx. 1), Sennacherib (xxxvi., xxxvii. 17, 21, 37), and Merodach-Baladan (xxxix. 1)--are those of the eighth century. In the third section (xl.-lxvi.) Cyrus is in the flood tide of his victorious career (xliv. 28, xlv.; cf. xli. 2-3, 25, etc.); the Assyrian has disappeared from the stage of history, and in his stead Israel's oppressors are the Babylonians (xliii. 14, 25, xlvii. 1 sqq., xlviii. 14, 20). In the third section Jerusalem is described as lying in ruins and desolate (xliv. 26b, lviii. 12, lxi. 4, lxiii. 18, lxiv. 10-11), while in the first part she is still standing, the object of her enemies' attacks and the special ward of Jehovah (i.-xxix. 1-8, 36-39). In addition to these distinguishing features, the two parts differ greatly in spirit; the latter is a book of consolation, the very first word being " comfort " (xl. 1), while the former is made up of threatening and judgment, the tone of arraignment struck in chap. i. appearing in one form or other clear through to chap. xxxv. While in this connection stress is not laid upon the fact that the phraseology is in striking contrast, as this frequently leads to a mechanical argument, the difference in diction may not be passed over lightly, as the careful reader notices the change even in the English version, while one accustomed to using Hebrew almost instinctively notes the passing from a piece of literature in a style " condensed, lapidary and plastic," to one that is clear and flowing. In chaps. i.xxxix. the emphasis is laid upon the majesty of Yahweh (ii. 10 sqq., 17, 19 sqq., x. 5 sqq., etc.), in xl.-lxvi. on his infinitude (xl. 12-26-xli. 4, etc.), in the third section the personal Messiah is depicted as the righteous and suffering servant (xlii. 1-4, xlix. 1-6, l. 4-9, Iii. 13-liii. 12) instead of the ideal king of the future (vii. 14, ix. 1-6, xi. 1-5). Such differences as these were deemed valid grounds for dating Isa. xl.-lxvi. in the sixth century by almost every great commentator of the last century (Gesenius, Ewald, Knobel, Dillmann, Delitzsch in his last edition, Cheyne, Orelli,S. Results Duhm, G. A. Smith). Dillmann characterized this view as results of modern literary investigation." Since Delitzsch in the fourth edition of his commentary (1889) went over to this position, it may truthfully be said that no scientific exegetical work has held to the traditional view of the unity of the Book of Isaiah. In America the assignment of Isa. xl.-lxvi. to the sixth century was strenuously opposed in magazine articles by Prof. W. H. Green of Princeton *(Presbyterian and * *Reformed Review, vol. * iii.), but this school of theology has produced no work of exposition on the prophecies of Isaiah since the appearance of that commentary of first rank by J. A. Alexander (1846,rev. ed. 1865). The argument from " the analogy of prophecy " worked this complete revolution in critical opinion. That a prophet primarily addresses his contemporaries; that, however far he may project himself into the future, his point of departure is his own age; that he paints the distant scene of the remotest future in the colors of his own day; that he plants his feet firmly upon the events of his own time, before he attempts to scan the distant horizon these are principles recognized as axiomatic by all interpreters of prophecy. If they are correctly assumed, Isa. xl.-lxvi. can not be assigned to Isaiah, the son of Amoz. In fact, the exilic background of these chapters has been recognized by some of the most zealous defenders of the Isaianic authorship, but it has been attributed to "the prophet's ideal point of view" (Keil; cf. Hengstenberg). Having attained this result, criticism did not halt, for the argument from the analogy of prophecy will not leave the first part of the work intact (chaps. i.-xxxv.). As early as Eichhorn (1783) it was applied to this section, and resulted 13 in the denial of the genuineness of a number of passages. (1) The oracle on the fall of Babylon (xiii. 1 xiv. 23) was assigned to the Babylonian exile, because the Medes are mentioned as the instruments of the destruction (xiii. 17), and Babylon is described as the supreme world power of that age (xiii. 11, 19, xiv. 4-5, 12 sqq., 16-17). (2) In the critical disposition of passages, xxi. 1-10 is naturally associated with xiii. 1-xiv. 23, for in it the prophet describes the fall of Babylon, and refers to Elam and Media (verse 2) in terms which would be more natural to a prophet of the sixth century than to Isaiah of the eighth. (3) With these two sections just noted go chaps. xxxiv. and xxxv. The latter is a beautiful lyric which is a mosaic of phrases and imagery borrowed from Deutero-Isaiah (the title provisionally assigned to the author of part three); the former is assigned to the exile, because of the bitter hatred and dire vengeance against Edom which it breathes (xxxiv. 5 sqq., 8 sqq.; cf. Ps. cxxxvii. 7). (4) While, in regard to the section Isa. xxiv.-xxvii. there is a general agreement that it is not the work of Isaiah, no consensus of opinion has been reached as to the age to which it should be assigned. Conservative critics are inclined to be satisfied with placing it in the days of the Persian empire. Dates, varying from the reign of Darius Hystaspis (520-485) to that of Artaxerxes Ochus (359-339), have been given. Here the argument from Biblical theology overshadows that based upon the analogy of prophecy. No explicit historical references occur; the imagery is apocalyptic in character, which in itself points to the age of the decay of prophecy. The writer's ideas of the future life-immortality, xxv. 8, and the resurrection, xxvi. 19--are distinct advances on those of Isaiah's age, but the traces of Persian angelology commonly alleged are not so evident. Critical opinion is divided about the age of chap. xxiii. The only reason for denying the Isaianic character of this passage is the occurrence of the phrase "Behold the land of the Chaldeans " (verse 13). The text is extremely uncertain and has led to emendations; instead of Chaldeans, Ewald suggested Canaanites, and Duhm offers Chittim. It may justly be regarded as an Isaianic passage to be assigned either to 723 or to 701 B.C. Such was the view of critical scholarship before the rise of the modern fragmentary hypothesis which has been advocated by Duhm and Marti in their commentaries (1892, 1900), and by Cheyne in his *Introduction to the Book of Isaiah* (1895). These three exegetes leave only a very small part of chaps. i.-xxRix, to Isaiah, and Cheyne has tersely enunciated the principles and results of this school It is too bold to maintain that we still have any collection of Isaianic prophecies which in its present form goes book to the period of the prophet" (*EB,* ii. 2194). Cheyne in his *Introduction to the Book of Isaiah* assigns only the following passages of i.-xxxix. to Isaiah: i. 5-31, ii. 6-21, iii. 1, 4-5, 8-9 (2-3, 6-7 may be Isaianic), 12-15, 16-17, 24, v. 1-14, 17-22, 23-25b, 26-29, vi. 1-13, vii. 2-8a, 9-14, 16, 18-20, viii. 1-4, 5-6, 7a, 8-18, ix. 7-12, 15-x. 4, x. 5-9, 13,-14, 28-32, xiv. 24-27 (omit 25b), 29-32, xvi. 14, xvii. 1-6, 9-14, xviii. 1-6, xx. 1, 3-6, xxi. 16 sqq., xxii. 1-5, 6-9a, 11b-14, 15a, 16-18, xxiii. 1-2, 3(?), 4, 6-12, 14, xxviii. 1-4, 7-19, 21-22, xxix. 1-4a, 6, 9-10, 13-14, xxix. 15, xxx. 1-7a, 8-17b, xxxi. 1-5a. 5. Analysis of Isaiah xl.-lxvi. Before the advent of this fragmentary school, Isa. xl.-lxvi. was looked upon as a literary unity, and was attributed to a single prophet, commonly termed the "Great Unknown of the Exile" or Deutero-Isaiah. This prophecy was regarded as falling into three sections marked by the refrain xlviii. 22, Ivii. 21 (Rückert Hitzig, and Delitzsch). Ewald first propounded a theory, the forerunner of the one now to be considered. He maintained that Isa. xl.-Ixvi. was a collection of "pamphlets or fly-leaves which the surging stream of time drew forth, one after another, from the prophet." The writer arranged these pamphlets in two books, xl.-xlviii., xlix.-Ix., to which were added an epilogue, Ixi. i-Ixiii. 6, and an appendix, lxiii. 7-lxvi. 24. According to Ewald, Deutero-Isaiah borrowed xl. 1, 2, Iii. 13-liii. 12, Ivi. 9-lvii. 11 from a prophet of Manasseh's reign, and lvii. 1-lix. 20 from a contemporary of Ezekiel. Dillmann and his school have always stood for the substantial unity of this section of the Book of Isaiah (cf. Dillmann's *Kommentar, * ed. Kittel, Leipsic, 1898). The earlier efforts to deny the unity of Deutero-Isaiah bore fruit in the commentary of Duhm already mentioned. In this epoch-making book, Duhm maintained that Isa. xl.-lxvi. is the work of three different writers. (1) Deutero Isaiah is reduced to xl, lv., and then one-fourth of its contents is subtracted as later additions. Deutero-Isaiah is supposed to have written his work about 540 B.C. in Lebanon or Phenicia. Duhm regards the following verses as later additions: xl. 5, 31b, xli. 5, xlii. 12, 15-24, xliii. 20b, 21, xliv. 9-20, 28b, xlv. 10, 13b, xlvi. 6-8, xlvii. 3a, 14b, xlviii. 1 in part, 2, 4, 5b, 7b, 8b-10, 16b-19, 22, l. 10, 11, li. 11, 16, 18, Iii. 3-6, liv. 15, 17b, Iv. 3a, 7. (2) From chaps. xl.-Iv. several passages, the so-called "Servant of Yahweh Songs" (xlii. 1-4, xlix. 1-6, I. 4-9, Iii. 13-liii. 12), were exscinded and assigned to a later date. Duhm takes pains to show that these lyrics are dependent on Jeremiah, Job, and Deutero-Isaiah, although the last-named does not show any acquaintance with them. The Servant of Yahweh Songs were read by Trito-Isaiah, and influenced Malachi; the literary connections thus traced point to a member of the Jewish Church of the first half of the fifth century B.C. as their author. Marti differs from Duhm in regarding these songs as an integral part of Deutero-Isaiah. (3) The closing section, chaps. Ivi.-lxvi., is attributed to a third writer, who is designated Trito-Isaiah. He writes in the same measure as Deutero-Isaiah, imitates his style, and agrees with him in proclaiming the future glory of Jerusalem. From the internal evidence, it is argued that he was a resident of Jerusalem, and wrote shortly before the mission of Nehemiah. It is to be noted that Cheyne analyzes this section, and regards it as a compilation from several sources. 6. Conclusion. Sanity and common sense suggest that the literary criticism of the fragmentists has overreached itself. The arguments from the analogy of prophecy and Biblical theology as applied by Cheyne, Duhm, and Marti necessarily imply a minute knowledge of history such as we do not possess. While this is true, historical criticism has reached some assured results. It has been proved that chaps. xxxvi.-xxxix, were excerpted from the Book of Kings, and certain passages of chaps. i.-xxxix. can not have been written by Isaiah (see above). The literary history of chaps. xl.-lxvi, is not as simple as it once was supposed to be. Of these chapters, xl.-lv. may confidently be assigned to Deutero-Isaiah, xl.-xlviii, being written in the exile (c. 546), and xlix.-lv. in Palestine shortly after the return. The manner and date of origin of lvii.-lxvi. can not be determined with certainty; probably they were written in the age of Ezra and Nehemiah, and were the product of a school of writers rather than of a single pen. JAMES A. KELSO. BIBLIOGRAPHY: On the Life and Times of Isaiah the best work is S. R. Driver, *Isaiah, his Life and Times,* London, 1893. Consult further: A. H. Sayce, *Life and Times of Isaiah Illustrated by Contemporary Monuments,* ib. 1889; J. Meinhold, *Jesaia und seine Zeit,* Freiburg, 1898; R. Sinker, *Hezekiah and His Age,* ib. 1897; F. Küchler, *Die Stellung des Propheten Jesaia zum Politik seiner zeit,* Tübingen, 1906; *DB,* ii. 485-486; *EB,* ii. 2180-2190; *JE,* vi. 635-636; F. Wilke, *Jesaja und Assur,* Leipsic, 1905. On the text consult A. Klostermann Deuterojesaja, Munich, 1893; T. K. Cheyne, *Notes and Criticisms on the Hebrew Text of Isaiah * London, 1868; idem *Isaiah, * in *SBOT; * idem, *Critica Biblica, * London, 1904; R. L. Ottley, *Book of Isaiah according to the LXX., * 2 vols., New York, 1904-07; G. H. Box, *The Book of Isaiah,* London, 1908. The two best commentaries on the book are by F. Delitzsch, 2 vols., Leipsic, 1889, Eng. transl., 2 vols., London, 1891-92 (conservative), and J. Skinner, in *Cambridge Bible,* 2 vols., Cambridge, 1896-98 (critical). The book has been constantly the subject of comment, the most noteworthy of which is contained in the works of C. Vitringa, 2 vols., Basel, 1732; R. Lowth, London, 1778 and often (marked out new tines by introducing the subject of the poetry of the book); W. Gesenius, 2 vols., Leipsic, 1821 (philological); F. Hitzig, Heidelberg, 1833; F. J. V. D. Maurer, Leipsic, 1835; E. Henderson, London, 1857; H. Ewald, Stuttgart, 1868, Eng. transl., London, 1875-80; K. A. Knobel, ed. L. Diestel, Leipsic, 1872; J. A. Alexander, 2 vols., New York, 1875; W. Kay, in *Bible Commentary, * New York, 1875; B. Neteler, Münster, 1878; F. W. Weber, Nördlingen, 1876; S. R. Driver and A. Neubauer, *The 53d Chapter of Isaiah according to Jewish Interpreters,* 2 vols., Oxford 1876-77; A. le Hir, Paris, 1877; S. Sharpe, London, 1877; W. Urwick, *The Servant of Jehovah, ls, Iii. 13-liii. 12,* Edinburgh, 1877; T. R. Birks, London 1878; A. Heiligstedt, Halle, 1878; K. W. E. Nägelsbach, Bielefeld, 1877 Eng. transl., New York, 1878 (in Lange); F. Köstlin Berlin, 1879; J. W. Nutt, Commentary on Isaiah by *Rabbi Eleazer of Beaugenci, with Notice of Mediaeval French and Spanish Exegesis,* London, 1879; J. M. Rodwell, ib. 1881; T. K. Cheyne, *The Book of Isaiah Chronologically Arranged, * London, 1884; *Commentary,* 2 vols., ib. 1881-84; G. A. Smith, 2 vols., 1890; H. G. Mitchell, *Isaiah i.-xii.*, New York, 1897; A. Dillmann ed. R. Kittel, Leipsic, 1898; E. König, *The Exiles' Book of Consolation,* Edinburgh 1899; A. Condamin, Paris, 1905. On the subject of the "Servant" consult: J. Forbes, *The Servant of the Lord in ls. xl.-lxvi.,* Edinburgh, 1870; M. Schian, *Die Ebed-Jahweh-Lieder in Jes. 40-66,* Leipsic, 1894; K. Budde, *Die sogenannten Ebed-Jahwe-Lieder,* Giessen, 1900; F. Giesebrecht, *Der Knecht Jahwes des Deuterojesaia,* Königsberg, 1902; H. Roy, *Israel und die Welt in Jes. 40-55, . . . Ebed-Jahwe-Frage,* Leipsic, 1903; G. C. Workman, *The Servant of Jehovah; or, the Passion-Prophecy of Scripture,* London, 1907. For Criticism and Introduction the most thorough-going work is T. K. Cheyne, *Introduction to the Book of Isaiah,* London, 1895. Various questions and phases are discussed in: C. P. Caspari. *Beiträge zur Einleitung in das Buch Jesaja,* Berlin, 1848; Löhr, *Zur Frage über die Echtheit von Jesaias 40-66,* 3 parts, Berlin, 1878-80; H. Krüger, *La Théologie d'Esaie 40-66,* Paris, 1881; J. Barth, *Beiträge zur Erklärung des Jesaja,* Carlsruhe, 1885; H. Guthe, *Das Zukunftsbild des Jesaia,* Leipsic, 1885; F. Giesebrecht, *Beiträge zur Jesaia-Kritik,* Göttingen, 1890; J. Kennedy, *A Popular Argument for the Unity of Isaiah,* London, 1891; J. Ley, *Jes. 40-66,* Marburg, 1893; G. C. M. Douglas, *Isaiah One and His Book One,* London, 1895: M. Brückner, *Komposition des . . . Jes. 28-33,* Halle, 1897; J. Meinhold, *Die Jesajaerzählungen Jes. 36-39,* Göttingen, 1898; A. Bertholet, *Zu Jesaja 53,* Tübingen, 1899; E. Littmann, *Ueber die Abfassungszeit des Tritojesaia,* Freiburg, 1899; E. Selim, *Das Rätsel des deuterojesajanischen Buches,* Leipsic, 1908; Smith, *Prophets; DB,* ii. 485-499; *EB,* ii. 2189-2208; *JE,* vi. 636-642; and the general works on Introduction to the Bible and to the O. T., and on O. T. Theology.
ISAIAH, MARTYRDOM OF. Isaiah, Martyrdom of.

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISAIAH, MARTYRDOM OF.** See PSEUDEPIGRAPHA, IV., 34.
ISENMANN, JOHANN Isenmann, Johann

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISENMANN** (more correctly **Isenmenger** or **Eisenmenger**), **JOHANN:** German reformer; b. at Schwäbisch Hall (35 m. n.e. of Stuttgart), Württemberg, c. 1495; d. at the monastery of Anhausen on the Brenz (near Heidenheim, in Württemberg, 20 m. n.n.e. of Ulm) Feb. 18, 1574. He studied at the University of Heidelberg in Apr., 1514, became dean of the classical faculty on Dec. 20, 1521; was called to Hall as pastor in the spring of 1524, and then wrought for twenty-four years with Brenz for the Reformation in that place. The festival of Corpus Christi was abolished in 1524; at Christmas, 1525, the Lord's Supper was observed by Evangelical rite; and in 1526, an Evangelical liturgy was introduced. Isenmann took an eager part in the *Syngramma Suevicum * in 1525 (see BRENZ, JOHANN, § 2). He became superintendent in 1542. At the beginning of 1546 he reformed the imperial town of Wimpfen. Heavy tribulation ensued from the Schmalkald War, with the emperor's triumphant entrance to Hall, Dec., 1546; and the situation grew still more dangerous during the Interim, which both Isenmann and Brenz rejected. When the Spaniards came, the council had to dismiss Evangelical preachers. In July, 1549, Isenmann removed to Württemberg, and became preacher at Urach. Soon afterward he became pastor at Tübingen, and general superintendent of the southwest district. He enjoyed the confidence of the new duke. In 1551 he went with Jakob Beurlin (q.v.) to Langensalza and Leipsic to have the Württemberg Confession subscribed by Melanchthon and the theologians of Wittenberg and Leipsic. In the summer of 1557 he accompanied the duke to the diet at Frankfort, and collaborated in the great *Apologia confessionis Wirtembergicae, * In 1558 he was appointed abbot at Anhausen, where he spent the remainder of his life. G. BOSSERT. BIBLIOGRAPHY: L. M. Fischlin, *Memoria theologorum Wirtembergensium, * i. 53, Leipsic, 1710; J. Hartmann and C. Jäger, *Johann Brenz, * 2 vols., Hamburg, 1840-42; T. Pressel, *Anecdota Brentiana,* 2 vols., Tübingen, 1868; G. Bossert, *Das Interim in Württemberg,* Halle, 1895; *ADB,* xiv. 634.
ISHBOSHETH Ishbosheth

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISHBOSHETH:** According to II Sam. ii.-iv. a son of Saul, whom his uncle, Abner, set on the throne of Israel at Mahanaim after the slaughter by the Philistines at Gilboa. In I Chron. viii. 33, ix. 39 he is called Esh-baal (Hebr. *Eshba'al, * a contraction of *Ishba'al,* "man of the Lord," i.e., of Yahweh); when the use of the name "Baal" was shunned, and *bosheth,* "shame," substituted for it (see BAAL, § 5), the form Ishbosheth became common. That in the Hebrew text the original form was *lshba'al* is shown by the translations of Aquila, Symmachus, Theodotion, Itala, and the Septuagint codex 93 Holmes. The original form remains in Chronicles probably because those books were read and copied less frequently than Samuel. The Chronicler names Ishbosheth fourth of the sons of Saul after Jonathan, Malchi-shua and Abinadab. I Sam. xxxi. 2 does not name him, I Sam. xiv. 49 names Jonathan, Ishui, and Malchi-shua. The order here indicates that Ishbosheth was the youngest son of Saul, and that is the more probable since he was dependent upon Abner, since there is no mention of his wife or children, and since he is not named among Saul's sons who were in the battle with the Philistines. The age given him in II Sam. ii. 10 does not agree with the indications of the context, according to which David and Jonathan were not yet forty years old at the time of the battle of Gilboa; the item belongs to the later chronological insertions. Abner, a cousin of Saul, after the battle of Gilboa sought to save for Israel as much as he might of Saul's achievements, and had Ishbosheth set up as king beyond the Jordan at Mahanaim, where he was recognized by Gilead, Asher, Jezreel, Ephraim, and Benjamin--practically all Israel. Judah and the South had made David king there, though under tributary relations with the Philistines; and for his possessions west of the Jordan Ishbosheth was also a vassal of the Philistines. The strife which arose between Israel and Judah, the first indication of which is given in II Sam. ii. 12 sqq., was suffered by the overlords, and continued with increasing success for David. Finally Abner took offense at the complaint of Ishbosheth because the former had married one of Saul's concubines, and told Ishbosheth that he would influence Israel to choose David king, a threat which he proceeded to fulfil. David thereupon demanded of Ishbosheth the return of his former wife, Michal, thus forcing recognition of his relationship to Saul's household, the way having been paved by negotiations between himself and Abner (II Sam. iii. 12 sqq.). At the defection of Abner Ishbosheth lost heart, and he was soon after assassinated by two of his military officers, who thought in this way to secure their own advancement. They carried his head to David; but being a member of the house of Saul, David at once punished the murder by the execution of the murderers. This is the course of the Judaic narrative in II Sam. ii.-iv. Were the Ephraimitic account extant, possibly the coloring of the story might be somewhat changed. Two points in the story appear trustworthy: that David wished to be recognized as the son-in-law of Saul, and that he was innocent of the death of Ishbosheth. The length of Ishbosheth's reign was probably a little less than that of David in Hebron ( II Sam. vi. 5). (H. GUTHE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: A. Kamphausen, in *ZATW*, vi (1886), 43-97; the literature under SAMUEL, BOOKS OF; and the pertinent sections of the works cited under AHAB.
ISHMAEL Ishmael

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISHMAEL** (Hebr. *Yishma'el, * "God hears"; LXX., *Ismael*): The son of Abraham by Hagar (q.v.), an Egyptian slave. He was born in the house of Abraham and was included in the covenant of circumcision (Gen. xvii. 25, P). Since, however, it was the will of God that Isaac should be the sole heir of the covenant blessings, the Lord commanded Abraham to accede to the demands of his wife Sarah that Ishmael be driven from the house. After this enforced flight, a divine revelation came to Hagar (Gen. xxi., E), as she was driven to despair for her son, who was dying of thirst in the "desert of Beersheba." That this vision is only another version of that recounted in chap. xvi. (Hupfeld, Dillmann and others) can not be maintained, since the details of the divine appearance are entirely different and there is also a difference between the chronology of P and that of E, the former (Gen. xvii. 25) making Ishmael at least fifteen years of age at the time, while E (Gen. xxi.) regards him as still a child of tender years (cf. the LXX. of xxi. 14 which says expressly: "and she placed the child upon her shoulder"). The especial importance of Ishmael lies in the relation of his descendants to Israel. They were to have no claim on the promised inheritance of the people of God, but were destined to multiply and spread. These descendants are characterized by the words of the angel concerning the ancestor himself (Gen. xvi. 12): "And he will be a wild man; his hand will be against every man, and every man's hand against him," thus sketching with a few strokes the spirit and manner of life of the Bedouins. According to Gen. xvi. 12, they were to dwell farther to the eastward than their brothers, and in fact they had possession of the desert east of Palestine, occupying also the country to the south, from the Persian Gulf to the northeastern boundary of Egypt. They spread put over the whole of northern Arabia, and therefore their ethnic designation, Ishmaelites, is used generally for the tribes of northern Arabia, including also the Midianites. Twelve peoples of northern Arabia are derived from Ishmael in Gen. xxv. 12 sqq. (P), where the genealogy is more ethnographic than is usually the case in the histories of the patriarchs. Ishmael is, however, a primitive personal name which occurs in ancient Arabic inscriptions, and in this case the leader gave his name to the tribe, although all the groups of peoples which are brought into connection with him were not his actual descendants. That Israel recognized its blood-relationship with these tribes rests upon a correct tradition. The Mohammedan Arabs, who proudly reckon Ishmael among their ancestors, say that he and his mother were buried n the Kaaba at Mecca (Abulfeda, *Historia anteislamica, * ed. H. O. Fleischer, pp. 24 sqq., Leipsic, 1831; E. Pocock, *Specimen historiae Arabum,* pp. 6-7, 177, 506-507, Oxford, 1806; B. d' Herbelot, *Bibliothèque orientale, * Maestricht, 1776, s.vv. "Hagar," "Ismael," "Ischak"). (C. VON ORELLI.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Consult, besides the literature under ISAAC and ARABIA: A. H. Sayce, *Higher Criticism and the Monuments, * pp. 201-202, London, 1894; T. P. Hughes, *Dictionary of Islam,* pp. 216-220, ib. 1896; *DB, * ii. 502-505; *EB,* ii. 2211-2215; the appropriate sections in works on the history of Israel and the commentaries on Genesis.
ISHTAR. Ishtar.

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISHTAR.** See ASHTORETH; ASSYRIA, VII.; BABYLONIA, VII., 2, § 7, 3, § 5.
ISIDORE MERCATOR Isidore Mercator

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISIDORE MERCATOR:** A fictitious person, the alleged author of the Pseudo-Isidorian Decretals (q.v.). He was formerly erroneously identified with Isidore of Seville; hence the name Pseudo-Isidore.
ISIDORE OF PELUSIUM Isidore of Pelusium

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISIDORE OF PELUSIUM:** Egyptian abbot; b. at Alexandria, probably before 370; d. near Pelusium (135 m. e. of Alexandria) about 440. He was presbyter and abbot in a cloister at the east mouth of the Nile, not far from Pelusium. It can not be proved that he was a pupil of John Chrysostom; but he was spiritually akin to him, and highly valued his writings. There are preserved more than 2,000 of his letters, mostly brief notes, but frequently of great length, which show him to have been a highly esteemed spiritual counselor, thoroughly aglow with holy earnestness; a very shepherd of souls, and a teacher versed in Scripture. Isidore was an example of Greek monasticism in its noblest form. For him the practical philosophy of the disciples of Christ (i. 63 and elsewhere) throve only in withdrawal from the world, in voluntary poverty and abstinence. The soul could not discern God (i. 402) in the bustle of everday life; only in the utmost emancipation from worldly wants did it approach divine freedom (ii. 19). Yet asceticism and flight from the world did not alone suffice: the garland of all virtues must be woven in monasticism, the peculiar dangers of which, however, did not escape Isidore. But though retired from the world, he still took part in the need and perils of Christianity, supporting, exhorting, wherever he could reach with his written message. He appeared to great advantage in his attitude toward Cyril of Alexandria. While at one with him in dogmatic opposition to Nestorius, he still perceived Cyril's intriguing spirit, and warned him against blind passion (i. 310); frankly warning the emperor, too, against the disorder provoked by the interference of his courtiers in dogmatic affairs (i. 311). But when Cyril, content with the fact that Nestorius had been dropped by the Antiochians, allowed some dogmatic concessions to his opponents, he had to hear the admonition from Isidore that he should stand fast, and not himself become a heretic (i. 324). Isidore took to heart the dignity of the priesthood, and with great earnestness did he remind negligent ecclesiastics of their serious accountability. He thus very persistently rebuked Bishop Eusebius of Pelusium and his clergy, because they trafficked in priestly offices, suffered their congregations to decay, chose rather to build sumptuous churches than to care for the poor, and caused offense by their scandalous behavior. In patriarchal fashion, moreover, he concerned himself with all manner of human needs, nor feared, in so doing, the great of this earth. He fervently exhorted the emperor to mildness and liberality (i. 35). For the weal of the town, he addressed himself to the civil authorities (ii. 25), and interceded with their masters in behalf of slaves who fled to him for protection. Of literary training himself, he granted that the Christian, like the bee, might suck honey from the teachings of the philosophers (ii. 3). Dogmatically orthodox, and a zealous opponent of all heresies, he directed his attention especially toward the doctrinal questions of weight for practical Christianity (sin, freedom, grace). He was of greater significance, however, as an exegete. For him the Scriptural truth was the heavenly treasure in earthen vessels. The expositor should approach his task with devout conviction; dwelling not upon separate words, but on the entire connection. Still he was given to many an arbitrary allegory: particularly in his Christological views of passages in the Old Testament. At the same time, in the exposition of the Old Testament he would not have the historical sense annulled by the mystical and prophetic; and he made attempts besides at explanations of points of grammar and subject matter. G. KRÜGER. BIBLIOGRAPHY: An ed. of the *Opera * was published Paris, 1638, and in *MPG,* lxxviii. 103-1046, 1647-1674. Consult: *ASB,* Feb., i. 468-473; J. Fessler, *Institutiones patrologiae,* ed. B. Jungmann, ii. 2, pp. 128-143, Innsbruck, 1896; *DCB,* iii. 315-320; Tillemont, *Mémoires,* xv. 97-119, 847; C. A. Heumann, *De Isidori Pelusiotae, * Göttingen, 1737; Fabricius-Harles, *Bibliotheca Graeca,* x. 480-494, Hamburg, 1807; H. A. Niemeyer, *De Isidori Pelusiotae, * Halle, 1825, and *MPG,* lxxviii. 9-102; P. B. Glück, *Isidoris Pelusiotae summa doctrinae moralis, * Würzburg, 1848; L. Bober, *De arte hermeneutica Isidoris Pelusiotae, * Cracow, 1878; O. Bardenhewer, *Patrologie,* pp. 353-354, Freiburg, 1894; *K L, * vi. 964-969.
ISIDORE OF SEVILLE Isidore of Seville

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISIDORE OF SEVILLE:** Isidore, archbishop of Seville and encyclopedist, was born about 560, the place unknown; d. at Seville, Spain, Apr. 4, 636. He was a scion of a distinguished Roman family which had fled from Carthagena during the Gothic invasion, and was educated, after the death of his parents, by his brother Leander, whom he succeeded, apparently about 600, as archbishop of Seville. He attended the synod held by King Gundemar in 610, and presided over those held by King Sisebut at Seville in 619 and the famous Fourth Synod of Toledo under Sisenand in 633 (see TOLEDO, SYNODS OF). Isidore's chief importance, however, was as an author, and his learning embraced the entire range possible in his age and country. 2 Neither originality nor independent investigation, neither keen criticism nor elegance of presentation could be expected from him, but his manifold interest, reading, and diligence in collecting, excerpting, and compiling from all departments of theological and secular learning are unparalleled. His position in history is determined primarily by two works, the *Libri sententiarum, * the first dogmatics of the Latin Church, sad the *Etymologiae,* the source of linguistic and practical knowledge for centuries, so that he became the schoolmaster of the Middle Ages. Gradually he became the national hero of the Spanish Church, and to him were attributed the Old Spanish or Mozarabic liturgy, the collection of Spanish canons upon which was based the forgery of the pseudo-Isidore, and even the collection of the laws of the West Gothic kings. The Roman Catholic Church, despite the weakness of the bonds which then united Spain and Rome, holds that he was a pupil of Gregory the Great, that he was vicar-apostolic in Spain, received the pallium, and took part in a Roman synod. Yet it is quite possible that he did not recognize the council of 553, and that he treated Justinian merely as a heretic who sought to overthrow the Chalcedonian Creed; while he did not mention the papacy in his ecclesiastical handbook, and he was even slightly heterodox in his views of the sacraments and grace. The works of Isidore are thus enumerated according to a list by Braulio (in *MPL, * lxxxi. 15 sqq.), which seems, in the main, to follow 3 chronological order: (1) Prooemiorum liber unus, an introduction to the Bible, consisting of a brief prologue on the canon in general and short tables of contents of the individual books. (2) *De ortu et obitu patrum,* or *De vita et morte sanctorum utriusque Testamenti,* short biographies of eighty-five characters of the Bible, sixty-four from the Old Testament and twenty-one from the New. The authenticity of the work has been doubted, but without sufficient reason. (3) *Officiorum libri duo; * usually called *De officiis ecclesiasticis,* written about 610, one of the most important works of Isidore for theology and ecclesiastical archeology. The first book, entitled *De origine officiorum,* discusses the origin and the authors of ecclesiastical worship, while the second, *De origine ministeriorum,* is devoted to the duties of the orders of clergy and various estates in life. *(4) De nominibus legis et evangeliorum liber,* evidently identical with the *Allegoriae quaedam sanctae scripturae* of the manuscripts and editions, and containing an allegorical interpretation of 129 names and passages from the Old Testament and 121 from the New. The work is of great value for the art and literature of the Middle Ages. (5) *De haeresibus liber,* which is probably identical with the list of Jewish and Christian heresies given in the fourth and fifth chapters of the eighth book of the *Etymologiae.* (6) *Sententiarum libri tres, * the chief theological work of its author, and the first Latin compend of faith and morals, chiefly in excerpts from Augustine and Gregory the Great. The first book is dogmatic in content, and treats of such subjects as the qualities of God, the origin of evil, the soul, and Christ, the seven rules of exegesis, the difference between the Testaments, creeds, baptism, the sacrament, and eschatology (but with no mention of purgatory). The second and third books are ethical the former general and the latter special. The first discusses, among other subjects, the cardinal virtues, grace, election, conversion, backsliding, repentance, sin, conscience, virtue and vice. The last book discusses the estates of the Christian life, divine judgments, temptation, prayer, asceticism, temporal authorities, the brevity of human life, and similar topics. (7) *Contra Judaeos libri duo,* or *De fide catholica adversus Judaeos, * written at the request of his sister Florentina, and establishing the truth of the Christian religion from the prophecies of the Old Testament with special reference to the Jewish question in Spain. (8) *Monasticae regulae liber,* a system not differing essentially from the Benedictine rule, although in no way related to it. (9) *Quaestionum in Vetus Testamentum libri duo,* a mystical and allegorical interpretation of the Old Testament, consisting entirely of excerpts from Origen, Victorinus, Ambrose, Jerome, Augustine, Fulgentius, Cassian, and especially from Gregory the Great. (10) *De viris illustribus sive de scriptoribus ecclesiasticis, * a continuation of the works of Jerome and Gennadius. It contains the biographies of fourteen Spaniards and thirty-two non-Spaniards, but is written for the most part in a superficial manner and composed in great measure of excerpts (which are frequently incorrect) from Rufinus, Cassiodorus, and Victor of Tunnuna, or from the works of the authors whom Isidore discusses. (11) *Chronicorum a principio mundi usque ad tempus suum liber, * from the creation to the Emperor Heraclius and King Sisebut (616), based on Julius Africanus, Eusebius-Jerome, and Victor of Tunnuna, while its division according to the "six ages of the world" was taken from Augustine's *City of God.* The work is extant in two recensions, as well as in an abridgment forming the fifth chapter of the *Etymologiae.* (12) *Historia Gothorum, Vandalorum et Suevorum, * also in two redactions, and containing a brief, but valuable, account of these three peoples, especially of the Goths from the earliest times to the fifth year of King.Swintila (626). (13) *Libri differentiarum duo, * the first an alphabetical list of synonymous or homonymous words with their meanings, and the second an elucidation of various concepts. (14) *Synonymorum libri duo, * or according to Ildefonsus, *Libri lamentationum, * a collection of words and phrases in the form of a dialogue between the sinful soul and comforting "reason," which points it to penance and the forgiveness of sins. *(15) De natural rerum, * written at the request of King Sisebut and dedicated to him. In its forty-five chapters it contains the most noteworthy facts concerning the elements, the heavenly bodies, the weather, the divisions of the earth, and the like, the material being drawn in great part from Suetonius, Ambrose, the pseudo-Clementine writings, and Augustine (16) *De numeris liber, * a mystic interpretation of the numbers from one to sixty and their significance in Scripture, nature, and history. The work is important for the history of the symbolism of figures. (17) *Etymologiarum sive originum libri viginti, * the culmination of all the works of its author, his other writings being either preparations or extensions of individual parts of this book. It formed the great encyclopedia of Isidore's period, and derived its name from the etymology prefixed to each article. The work is divided into twenty books treating of the following subjects: i. grammar; ii. rhetoric and dialectics; iii. arithmetic, geometry, music, and astronomy; iv. medicine; v. jurisprudence and chronology, with a brief universal history; vi. Bible, inspiration, the canon, sacraments, liturgy, Easter, feasts, libraries, manuscripts, books, writing-material, and the like; vii. a compead of theology, God, the Trinity, angels and men, patriarchs, prophets, apostles, martyrs, clerks, and monks; viii. church and synagogue, religion and faith, heresy and schism, Jewish and Christian heretics, gentile philosophers, poets, sibyls, magicians, and gods; ix. various peoples and languages, offices and forms of government, marriages and relationships; x. Latin lexicon, with an explanation of about 500 words in alphabetical order; xi. mankind; xii. animals; xiii. the composition and motion of the world; xiv. divisions of the earth, lands, and mountains; xv. cities; xvi. earth and stone, gems and metals, weights and measures; xvii. agriculture, plants, and grain; xviii. war, weapons, games; xix. ships, buildings, clothing, adornment; xx. food, drink, furniture, and agricultural implements. Isidore's chief sources were Cassiodorus, Boethius, Varro, Solinus, Pliny, Hyginus, Servius, Lactantius, Tertullian, and especially the *Prata* of Suetonius, but much was written from memory, thus accounting for many of the inaccuracies of the work. The *Etymologiae* remained the great work of reference for hundreds of years, and was practically copied by Rabanus in his encyclopedic *De universo* (844), while it was profoundly admired by John of Salisbury in the twelfth century. Compiler and plagiarist though he may have been, it has been well said that centuries would have remained in darkness if Isidore had not let his light shine. In addition to the works already enumerated, Isidore is said to have written many smaller treatises, and others still have been ascribed to him, such as the Quaestiones de Veteri et Novo Testamento and the *De ordine creaturarum, De contemptu mundi, and an interpretation of the Song of Solomon. A number of Latin poems are ascribed to him, but with little warrant, and hymns to Agatha and other martyrs are included among the Mozarabic hymns. Several of his letters are still extant, and contain much of biographical and contemporary interest.* (R. SCHMID.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Lists of literature are given in C. U. J. Chevalier, *Sources historiques du moyan-âge,* p. 1127 Paris, 1877 sqq.; J. E. B. Mayor, *Bibliographical Clue to Latin Literature,* p. 212, London, 1875; Potthast, *Wegweiser,* pp. 687-689. The best edition of his works is by F. Arevali, 7 vols., Rome, 1797-1803, reproduced in *MPL,* lxxxi.-lxxxiv. Others are by M. de La Bigne, Paris, 1580; J. de Breul and J. Grial, Paris, 1601; by Grial and Gomez, Madrid, 1778. Consult: N. Antonio, *Bibliotheca Hispana vetus, *ed. P. Bayer, Madrid, 1788; J. C. F. Bahr, *Geschichte der römischen Literatur, * supplement, i. 111-113, Carlsruhe, 1838; C. E. Bourret, *L'ÉcoIe chrétienne de Seville, * pp. 59-193, Paris, 1855; C. F. Montalembert, *Les Moines de l'occident, ii. 200-218, 5 vols., Paris, 1860-67, *Eng, transl., i. 421-424, Boston, 1872; P. Gams, *Kirchengeschichte Spaniens,* ii. 2, pp. 102-113, Regensburg, 1874; H. Hertzberg, *Die Historien und Chroniken des Isidorus von Sevilla,* Göttingen, 1874; Wattenbach, *DGQ,* i (1885), 81-83, i (1893), 84-86; A. Ebert, *Geschichte der Literatur des Mittelalters,* i. 588-602, Leipsic, 1889; W. Smith, *Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography and Mythology,* ii. 627-630, London, 1890; W. S. Teuffel, *Geschichte der römischen Literatur,* pp. 1292-1295, Leipsic, 1890; C. Cañal, *San Isidoro, * Seville, 1897; Ceillier, *Auteurs sacrés,* xi. 710-728 Neander, *Christian Church,* iii. 151-153 et passim; Schaff, *Christian Church,* iv. 662-669 et passim; *KL,* vi. 969-976; *DCB,* iii. 305-313. The first two volumes of the edition of his works by Arevali gather up the various accounts of the life and add critical comments.
ISIDORIAN DECRETALS. Isidorian Decretals.

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISIDORIAN DECRETALS.** See PSEUDO-ISIDORIAN DECRETALS.
ISIDORUS Isidorus

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISIDORUS MERCATOR.** See ISIDORE MERCATOR.
ISKANDARUNAH Iskandarunah

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISKANDARUNAH.** See PHENICIA, PHENICIANS, I. § 2.
ISLAM Islam

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ISLAM.** See MOHAMMED, MOHAMMEDANISM.
ISRAEL, HISTORY OF. Israel, History of.

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### ISRAEL, HISTORY OF. Biblical History. Primitive History (§ 1.) The Abrahamic History (§ 2). The Sojourn in Egypt (§ 3). The Exodus and the Giving of the Law (§ 4). The Conquest of Canaan and the Judges (§ 5). The United Kingdom (§ 6). The Divided Kingdom (§ 7). Judah to the Exile (§ 8). The Exile (§ 9). The Persian Period (§ 10). The Greek Period (§ 11). The Maccabean and Roman Periods (§ 12). Post-Biblical History. General Survey. The Early Period. Conditions after the war; Jabneh (§ 1). The Last Insurrections (§ 2). Rise of the Babylonian School (§ 3). The Two Talmudic Collections; The Masorah (§ 4). The Middle Period. In the Orient and Italy (§ 1). In Spain; Rise of Jewish Culture (§ 2). Jewish Scholars in Spain (§ 3). Temporal Situation in Spain to 1469 (§ 4). The Inquisition in Spain (§ 5). Jews in France (§ 6). In England (§ 7). In Italy (§ 8). In Germany (§ 9). Revival of Messianism (§ 10). Jews in Poland (§ 11). The New Period. Jews in America Early Settlements (§ 1). In the United States, 1800-80 (§ 2). Reform, Educational, and Charitable Movements (§ 3). The New Immigration Since 1880 (§ 4). The Press; General Conditions (§ 5). **I. Biblical History:** Primitive history as set forth in Genesis takes the form of the history of families. In Semitic nomadic life the family is 1 the unit from which the tribe is conceived as developing. Consequently the Hebrews regarded the nations of the world as the results of ramifications from a single stock. It is debated how far the history of families as given in Genesis is to be taken as historical, and how far the genealogical scheme depends upon observed ethnographic relationships. In the story of the different stocks, while in general little of personal life appears, the forms of the patriarchs stand out full of individuality, and the attempt is not successful to read the experiences attributed to them in certain situations and in individualistic form as the doings of a tribe or a people. Moreover, the sobriety and exactness of detail in these narratives is such as to differentiate them from the poetizing sagas in which folk-lore celebrates the eponymous ancestors to whom the origins of the peoples are traced. It lies on the face of these narratives that they are only fragments of traditions which had for a long time been transmitted orally, and in the course of this transmission the lesser figures have dropped from the account and only the great personalities have remained. But the memory of such personalities as Abraham (q.v.), the father of the nation with whom is associated the migration from the Euphrates to Canaan, or Jacob (q.v.), who endured hard service in the Aramaic territory and earned the blessing of God as the father of a numerous progeny, or Joseph (q.v.), through whose vicissitudes the settlement in Egypt was brought about, remained a permanent possession essentially constant in form. For the historicity of the person of Abraham it may be said that his history is not discordant with what Assyrian-Babylonian history demands, and the story of Joseph is accordant with what is known of Egyptian history. In Genesis Abraham is the descendant and spiritual heir of Shem. According to Gen. x. 21 sqq. he shares this descent with a group of nations, all of whom (except Elam and Lud) are related in language and blood to the Hebrews and are still known as Semites. In Gen. xiv. 13 Abraham 2 is called "the Hebrew," and according to the Biblical representation the Israelites were in early times called Hebrews by other peoples, especially by the Egyptians. The connotation of this term Hebrew is narrower than that of Semite, but broader than that of Israelite, though its exact meaning is not established. It can hardly mean "those who dwell beyond the Jordan" (Stade and E. Meyer), but is better brought into relation with the river Euphrates and related to the Assyrian expression "across the river." The equating of the Hebrew form *'Ibhrirm * with the Egyptian *'Apriu* is questionable; more likely is the equivalency of the Hebrew form with the *Habiri * of the Amarna Tablets, though the signification of *Habiri * must not be restricted to the forefathers of the Hebrews. The existence of the Hebraic nomadic family life in Canaan was arduous, according to the concordant testimony of the sources. The people often had to change their dwelling-places to secure pasturage. Still more difficult was their situation in times of famine, as when they had to transfer themselves to Egypt, at that time the granary of the region, and found themselves subject to oppression and placed under disabilities (Gen. xx. 11), It was a necessity of this kind which brought about the settlement of the entire Jacob clan in Egypt, in the northwestern part known as Goshen, the later "Arab Dome district" about Phakusa, the present Saft el-Henneh, a region not yet definitely marked out (E. Naville, *Goshen and the Shrine of Saft el Henneh, * London, 1887). While little is known of the people during their stay there, the circumstances were so favorable that they developed into a nation which yet was not politically organized in national form, but lived under the patriarchal government of tribal sheiks. On the religious side much must have been borrowed from the orderly state in which they were. While a part of the people followed pastoral occupations, another part settled down to agricultural life (Num. xi. 5), and something of the industrial accomplishment of the Egyptians must have been acquired. That the Israelites showed a greater receptivity and productivity in respect to culture than their near relatives, the Edomites and Moabites, is due in part to their sojourn in Egypt. The pre-Mosaic period was a preparation also for the theocratic and national cult of later times: The preaching of Moses must have had a basis in the knowledge of contemporary Hebrews; and the sources unitedly attribute to the patriarchs acquaintance with the God of the covenant, though he was called by other names. This God of the patriarchs was invisible, exalted, not bound to any one land, though he revealed himself in definite localities which were therefore holy, and was the possessor of heaven and earth (Gen. xiv. 19), dwelling in heaven and ruling the earth. The recollection clung that Abraham had been called from a relationship where idolatry was the rule (Josh. xxiv. 2, 14). The uniqueness of God was not theoretically developed, but was rather a practical monotheism which permitted to the Hebrews worship of him alone. The stone worship and totemism some find in Genesis is discovered only through wilful exegesis and eisegesis. Even in the naive anthropomorphisms of Gen. xi., xviii.-xix. there are evidences of an exalted conception of God. These religious ideas were not derived from Egypt, for they differ entirely from Egyptian conceptions, though that the Hebrews derived some things from the Egyptians is clear from Josh. xxiv. 14; Ezek. xx. 7 sqq., but that the calf worship had such an origin is improbable (see CALF, THE GOLDEN). In the region granted them by the Egyptians, the Hebrew shepherds lived in relative independence and grew strong. Into this situation 3 was injected the circumstance simply is expressed in Ex. i. 8 as the rise of a king who knew not Joseph. This is doubtless to be connected with the expulsion of the Hyksos from Egypt and the antiforeign sentiments of the new dynasty. The half-nomads in the northeast were subjected to the corvée and put to building fortresses and storehouses; and since this did not suffice to reduce their strength, the slaughter of the male children was ordered. Thus what had been a welcome asylum became a place of slavery under the hardships of which the Hebrews groaned. Liberation from this situation is attributed by a unanimous tradition to Moses. The period of the oppression is with growing assurance asserted to be that of Rameses II., whose name is connected with so many building-enterprises and monuments. In that case his son and successor, Meneptah, was the Pharaoh of the Exodus (see EGYPT, I., 4, § 3). Apparently against this is an inscription of Meneptah telling of an expedition in which he has destroyed Syria and Israel (the latter for the only time found mentioned on Egyptian monuments). If the reference is to Israel, then Israel must already have been living in Canaan, and the Exodus must have taken place earlier. This agrees better with Hebrew tradition, which (I Kings vi. 1) reckoned 480 years between the Exodus and the building of Solomon's temple, which would place the Exodus c. 1440 B.C., therefore in the time of Amenophis II.; and this agrees again with the statement of Manetho, who records the expulsion of the lepers under a king of this name. One circumstance, indeed, tells against this earlier date, viz., the frequent occurrence in the Pentateuch of the name Rameses (Gen. xlvii. 11; Ex. i. 11, xii. 37; Num, xiii. 3, 5). Further, against the late dating of the Exodus is the fact that the tribal name Asher appears in an inscription of Seti, father of Rameses (c. 1350 B.C.), according to which that tribe must have had its residence in the neighborhood of Lebanon. The supposition that this tribe departed alone from Egypt is improbable. 4 According to Gen. xv. 13, 16, the sojourn in Egypt was to last 400 years or four generations. The Hebrew of Ex. xii. 40-41 gives 430 years, but the Septuagint reads "which they sojourned in Egypt and the land of Canaan." The indication of the narrative of P is that 215 years were assigned to the Egyptian sojourn and 215 to the period between the settlement and David, which was the understanding of Josephus and of the synagogue. Along with this goes the fact that in the genealogies of Moses and Achan between Korah and Levi are mentioned only two steps, between Judah and Achan only three (Ex. vi. 20; Num. xxvi. 59, xvi. 1; Josh. vii. 1). But since in Gen. xv. even the Septuagint has the higher number, its reading in Ex. xii. 40 appears to be an emendation. With the longer period would agree the censuses of Num. i., xxvi., which involve a population of about 2,000,000 souls, and Num. xi. 21. On the other hand, it is difficult to reconcile these high numbers with the long sojourn in the peninsula of Sinai [or to find room for so many people in the region. Therefore these numbers are now rejected, and scholars reduce the number of Israelites in the Exodus to a few thousands]. The Exodus under Moses was regarded by the Israelites as the birth of the nation (for the route of the Exodus see RED SEA; 5 WANDERING IN THE WILDERNESS). The historicity of the narrative of the Exodus would suffer no harm if it were assumed that only the noblest part of the people, to which the Joseph tribes belonged, took part in the event, while the other tribes were already in the peninsula; but for this supposition there is no sure ground. To Moses, under direction of God, were due both the Exodus and the covenant between Yahweh and Israel; but they were essentially divine acts, and God became known by his name Yahweh (see JEHOVAH; and YAHWEH). The result was the cult and the conceptions of life which became regnant in Israel. The resulting form of government has since the time of Josephus ( *Apion,* ii. 16), been called a theocracy, the idea being that to God was assigned the authority for all rights and acts. Hence the law included not only regulations for civil and criminal processes, but also regulations governing sacrifices and festivals and purifications. From the time of the reception of the law the solidarity of the people was an accomplished fact, while at the same time the personality of deity was emphasized. The people had become a united religious community. It is self-evident, therefore, that Moses set in order the cultus for this community, sanctioning or prohibiting customs then prevalent, those which were accepted then receiving new consecration. He appointed also a central sanctuary, without an image,--the ark of the covenant with the celebrations centering about it, and in this centralization lay the only protection for the pure worship of Yahweh. The priests at the central sanctuary of later times were naturally the protectors of the Mosaic law, and while this law necessarily received modifications in the course of time, in general no law was known which did not go by the name of Moses. That there were relapses from observance of this law is not surprising. Equally sure is it that the law is not merely ideally referred to the desert period of Israel's life, but that it grew out of the leader's struggle with the people, whose rebellious and distrustful character so often manifested itself in the desert. The continuance of the desert sojourn is given as forty years by the concordant tradition and Amos v. 25. This period includes several smaller periods when the people settled about some spot, as at the mountain and at Kadesh. With this period of forty years agrees the fact that it was a new generation which undertook the conquest, different from that which had participated in the crossing of the Red Sea. Moses was not among those who entered the promised land; only the East-Jordanland, not included in the promises, did he see in 6 possession of the people. But to Joshua was divinely committed the task of leading the people across the Jordan. Campaigns were accomplished in the north, then in the central portion at Shiloh the central sanctuary was established. Before his death Joshua called an assembly of the people at Shechem and there exhorted them to remain true to their God. For the relation of the narrative in the Book of Joshua to Judges i., see JOSHUA, BOOK OF. When the land was parceled out among the tribes, when the Hebrews came to mingle with the earlier inhabitants and were no longer held together by a central authority, it could hardly be otherwise than that the political solidarity should be lost, that the tribal distinctions should emerge, and that the tribes should enter into various relationships with the Canaanites. So, too, the religious unity was endangered through communications with the early settlers, while totally different conceptions of deity overlaid those which had been received at Sinai. It was easy to adopt into the Yahweh worship customs which in origin and meaning were heathen. This happened particularly at the high places, the sanctuaries of the Canaanites, which were adopted as places of sacrifice by the Hebrews (see HIGH PLACES). With this went relapse into the worship of the Baals and Astartes, with their impure cults so opposed to that of Yahweh. The obliteration of the religious distinction between Hebrews and Canaanites carried with it more or less of social and political dependence or amalgamation, especially where the Hebrews were in the minority. To this was perhaps due the loss of physical courage through which subjection to the inroads of the hordes of Midianites, Amalekites, Moabites, Ammonites, and Philistines was brought about, relief from which was wrought by the inspired heroes who aroused the people to resistance. These heroes --the Judges--were, above all, champions of freedom, but their strength and success lay in the fact that they recalled the people to trust and obedience given to the God of Moses and Joshua (see JUDGES). This is true of such of the Judges as Deborah, Gideon, Jephthah (qq.v.), while of Samson (q.v.) it must be said that his significance was rather individual than national or tribal, and of others, such as Elon and Abdon, the influence was rather tribal or local than national. The result of this period was severance into tribal groups and loss of the sense of nationality. This severance, due to the breaking of the covenant bond founded upon the relationship with Yahweh, naturally led in turn to the demand 7 for a firmer political union under a national head in whom leadership was more externally evident than under a pure theocracy. The tendency toward a monarchical form of government was manifested under Gideon, whose son, Abimelech, exercised a brief sway over a limited region. The founding of the kingdom is, however, inseparably connected with the name of Samuel (q.v.), the last of the Judges, who exercised also the functions of priest and prophet. The immediate occasion of the establishment of the kingdom was the oppression by the Philistines. The hope of relief from this distress was realized under Saul (q.v.), who, however, soon regarded himself as sovereign and not as the representative of the sole king, Yahweh. This led to the announcement of his rejection through Samuel, followed quickly by his melancholia and his defeat and death at Gilboa. Before his death his successor had been chosen in the person of David (q.v,), son of Jesse, of Bethlehem of Judah, who had achieved prominence as a leader in war and had aroused Saul's jealousy, hatred, and persecution. After the death of Saul, David was for seven and a half years king in Hebron over Judah, while Ishbosheth (q.v.) reigned in Mahanaim across the Jordan over the northern tribes. After the violent death of Ishbosheth David bcame king over the united tribes, and fixed his residence finally in Jerusalem, then newly captured. His leadership in war and peace brought the kingdom to its highest point of prosperity. His spiritual and religious significance was also great, characterized as it was by complete concord between king and prophet; and no less marked was his influence upon the cultus through his placing of the ark in the capital, through his service to the ritual of song, as well as his zealous devotion to Yahweh. His son and successor, Solomon (q.v.), built in Jerusalem the temple, which became more and more the cultic center for the entire land, in spite of its temporary destruction. His reign, unlike that of his father's, was one of peace; yet the very fact that the land was unassailed by external foes, together with the jealousy of the northern tribes at being ruled by a Judahite, prepared the way for the division of the kingdom, which was supported by the prophetic leaders, swayed in part by Solomon's acquiescence in the practise of heathen rites introduced by the princesses whom he had made his wives. After the death of Solomon the larger part of the nation revolted from the Davidic dynasty and set 8 up the Ephraimite Jeroboam (q.v.) as king, while to Rehoboam (q.v.), Solomon's son, only the southern part remained true with the capital, to which adhered Judah, part of Benjamin, remains of Simeon, and Dan, and most of the Levites. A hostility began between the two kingdoms which resulted in mutual weakening and in consequent inability to resist external powers such as Syria and Assyria. The division was also religiously disastrous. In order to wean the people from Jerusalem and its sanctuary, Jeroboam set up golden calves (see CALF, THE GOLDEN) as images of Yahweh at Dan and Bethel and in this way reintroduced the principle of religious syncretism into the worship of Yahweh. Nevertheless the prophets remained a powerful agency in the Ephraimitic kingdom. Politically the situation there was lamentable. Dynasty succeeded dynasty in rapid succession, and the revolutionary principle was often in evidence in the further history. The dynasty of Jeroboam (q.v.) had but two generations, as had that of the next founded by the usurper Baasha (q.v.); Zimri (q.v.) reigned but seven days, and was overthrown by Omri (q.v.), whose name became so celebrated that in the Assyrian inscriptions Israel was long known as the "land of Omri." Omri made Samaria (q.v.) the permanent capital, and was succeeded by his son, Ahab (q.v.), a king successful in his external relations, but swayed at home by his consort, Jezebel (q.v.), whose unremitting efforts to subvert the Yahweh cult for that of Baal were opposed by Elijah (q.v.). The reigns of Ahab's sons, Ahaziah and Joram (qq.v.), brought the dynasty to an end. The period of the Omri dynasty was one of peace and alliance between the two kingdoms, cemented by marriage between the two houses in the persons of Athaliah, daughter of Jezebel, and Ahab and Joram (q.v.) of Judah. In the meantime the southern kingdom under Rehoboam had suffered severely under a campaign of Shishak of Egypt, but under his grandson, Asa (q.v.), and his great-grandson, Jehoshaphat (q.v.), its prestige was recovered. The alliance between the two houses almost resulted in the extinction of the Davidic dynasty through the massacre by Athaliah, from which only Joash (q.v.) of the seed royal escaped. Under Joram, father of Joash, Edom, the one vassal people remaining to Judah from the united kingdom, had secured its independence. In the northern kingdom judgment came upon the dynasty of Omri through Jehu (q.v.), who, with frightful slaughter, established a new dynasty in Samaria. Jehu and his son and successor, Jehoahaz (q.v.), were, however, vassals of the Syrians. Under Jehu's grandson, Joash (q.v.), this vassalage was broken and Judah was reduced to a tributary position under Amaziah (q.v.), son of Joash of Judah. Jeroboam II. (q.v.), the fourth of Jehu's dynasty, raised the kingdom to an unexampled height of prosperity, quickly lost under his successor, Zachariah (q.v.). Jeroboam reestablished the early bounds of the kingdom by bringing the Moabites and part of the Syrian territory under Israelitic dominion. This was the period of the prophets Amos, Hosea, and Jonah the son of Amittai (qq.v.), who showed the contrast between the apparent prosperity and the internal decay of the kingdom. The Assyrians had been battering at Syria and had already come into close relations with Israel. Ahab had fought against Assyria at Karkar, Jehu had paid costly tribute in 842 B.C.; but Tiglath-Pileser III. (see ASSYRIA, VI., 3, § 9) had subjected to his power the country up to the Mediterranean coast; Jehu's dynasty ended with Zachariah, who was slain by Shallum, and he in turn was killed by Menahem (q.v.) after a reign of one month. Menahem reigned five years, a vassal of Tiglath-Pileser; his son Pekahiah (q.v.) was slain by the usurper Pekah (q.v.), whose combination with Syria against Judah was aimed against Assyria, and led to the final catastrophe under his successor, Hoshea (q.v.). In Judah the calamity sustained under Amaziah was gradually forgotten during the long reign of Uzziah (q.v.), whose generalship secured the subjection of the Edomites, Moabites, and Ammonites, while the northern kingdom declined. Whether the Azriyahu of Yaudi ("Judah") mentioned in the inscriptions of Tiglath-Pileser as at the head of an anti-Assyrian combination is to be identified with this king or with the king of a North-Syrian Yaudi is still debated. Uzziah directed well the inner fortunes of the state, patronizing agriculture and grazing. The Chronicler ascribes his leprosy to an invasion of priestly rights; in consequence of this disease his son Jotham (q.v.) ruled long as regent before he succeeded to the throne. In the time of Jotham's successor, Ahaz (q.v.), occurred the alliance of Israel and Syria against Judah, referred to above; and the situation was complicated by a hostile combination of Edomites and Philistines. But Ahaz was relieved by the successes of Tiglath-Pileser, whose campaigns were directed against Judah's foes. The Assyrian beset Samaria, which Sargon finally took, carrying 27,000 of its inhabitants into captivity, leaving Judah to survive for 135 years. The successor of Ahaz to the throne of Judah was Hezekiah (q.v.), a vassal of Assyria, but most restless in that relation, who was saved 9 from the vengeance of Sennacherib in a way regarded as miraculous. His son, Manasseh (q.v.), was strongly disposed toward heathenism, persecuting the adherents of the Yahweh religion. This policy was continued under his son Ammon (q.v.), but reversed under his second successor, Josiah (q.v.), who, with all earnestness, reintroduced the Mosaic faith and cultus. Josiah's untimely death, caused by his confronting the Egyptian Necho at Megiddo, was a most serious blow to the welfare of Judah. His son Jehoahaz (q.v.) was removed from the throne by Necho after the latter's return from the East three months later, and Jehoiakim, his elder brother, was put in his place. Jehoiakim (q.v.) became tributary to the Babylonians, but revolted after three years, an offense which was expiated after his death by his son, Jehoiachin (q.v.), whom, after a reign of three months, Nebuchadrezzar took prisoner and carried to Babylon with the noblest of the land. The Babylonians placed upon the throne a third son of Josiah, who assumed the name Zedekiah (q.v.); he, in the ninth year of his reign, conspired in alliance with the Pharaoh Hophra to throw off the Babylonian yoke, in this going counter to the advice of Jeremiah and Ezekiel and thereby challenging the might of the Euphrates kingdom. The Babylonians invested Jerusalem after defeating a force of Egyptians sent to break the siege, captured the city in 586 B.C., destroyed the temple and the city's defenses, visited with punishment the leaders of the people, and carried away into captivity all whose social rank exposed them to possibilities of leadership. Gedaliah (q.v.) was made governor and took up his residence in Mizpah, where the remnant of the people gathered about him, and where he soon became the victim of assassination. Many of the remaining people fled into Egypt, taking with them against his will the prophet Jeremiah. Jerusalem lay in ruins, large parts of the territory of Judea passed into the possession of the Edomites, and the future and promise of Israel for the next fifty years was in the exiles in Babylon. The exiles were settled in Babylonia along the Chebar in the neighborhood of Nippur (see BABYLONIA, 10 IV., § 9), where they possessed their own houses and lands and a certain degree of autonomy. The only basis for a history of the exilic period and the life of that time is in the books of Jeremiah, Ezekiel, and Deutero-Isaiah, which last originated in the last third of the exile. Part of the people relapsed into idolatry. But for the rest, in their enforced abstinence from participation in the religious ordinances of the sanctuary, the spiritual significance of such observances as the Sabbath rest, and the ordinances regarding food and circumcision became deepened as being signs of their distinction as the people of God. The very nearness of heathenism repelled many of the Jews, as there was borne in upon them the fact that their own experiences were the expression of a long-deferred judgment for this sin. There was also impressed upon the nation the idea of its mission in the world as a mediator between God and the nations. About fifty years after the destruction of Jerusalem the Babylonian empire came into the hands of Cyrus. Babylon was taken in 539, and in that year the Jews received from the victor permission to return. Of this permission 42,360 males, with their families availed themselves under the leadership of Sheshbazzar-Zerubbabel (the identity of Sheshbazzar and Zerubbabel is still debated) and the high priest Joshua, and reached Jerusalem probably 11 in 538. They settled in Jerusalem and in the outlying cities, set up the altar of burnt offerings, and made preparations to rebuild the temple. Owing, however, to the opposition of the Samaritans, who placed all difficulties in the way, and to the necessity of securing means of subsistence, the reconstruction of the temple was deferred till the beginning of the reign of Darius, in the years 520-516 B.C., and was accomplished then under the stimulus of the prophets Haggai and Zechariah. The report of the return in 538 has been seriously questioned, and the thesis advanced that Zerubbabel was never in exile, and that the temple was rebuilt by the Jews who had remained in Palestine; but these hypotheses are based on arbitrary constructions which fall on examination. For the period 516-458 no reports have been transmitted, except that the narrative of the Book of Esther (q.v.) refers to the time of Xerxes. In 458 B.C. under Artaxerxes I. the condition of the colony at Jerusalem was miserable and the maintenance of its religious distinction endangered. Then the scribe Ezra (q.v.) led back to Judea a new company of exiles consisting of 1,500 males with their families. He was empowered by royal firman to put into practise the requirements of the Mosaic law, but entire success in this direction was attained only when, in 445-444 B.C., Nehemiah (q.v.) came to his support, clothed with the authority of the governorship. Nehemiah reestablished the defenses of Jerusalem by having the walls of the city repaired, notwithstanding the opposition of the Samaritans, and then assisted Ezra in the purification of the community by causing the dismission of the heathen wives and requiring the observance of the entire Mosaic law. After a residence of twelve years Nehemiah returned to the Persian court, but in a later visit to Jerusalem found it necessary to employ stern measures for the preservation of the Mosaic institutions, expelling from the community a grandson of the high priest who had married a daughter of the Samaritan noble Sanballat (q.v.). According to Josephus (*Ant.* XI., viii. 2 sqq.), this priest, with the help of his father-in-law, established the sanctuary of the Samaritans on Mount Gerizim and set in order its priesthood; but Josephus confused these events with others which occurred in the time of Alexander the Great. Undoubtedly at that time the Samaritans received from the Jews the Pentateuch, which constitutes their Scriptures. Of the last ten years of the Persian period no trustworthy reports have come down. There are statements that Artaxerxes III. Ochus ordered a deportation of Jews to Hyrcania, on the south shore of the Caspian, because they were involved in a rebellion of Phenicians and Cypriotes against the Persians. On this occasion the Persian General Bagoses pushed into the temple, and Josephua reports (*Ant.* XI., vii. 1) that he substituted Jesus (Joshua) as high priest for his brother John. The political importance of the high priest originated in that period. With the destruction of the Persian empire by Alexander the Great a new period began for Judea. Alexander's attitude toward the Jews was friendly. But when, after the conqueror's death, his empire 12 was divided, Judea, lying between the kingdoms of the contending Ptolemies and the Seleucidae, was a continual sufferer by the conflict. At first Judea came into the power of the Ptolemies. Josephus reports that Ptolemy Lagus violated the Sabbath, captured Jerusalem, and carried captive to Egypt a large number of Jews from Jerusalem and Galilee ( *Apion,* i. 22; *Ant.* XII., i., XIII., xii. 4). Hecataeus says that later this Ptolemy was so friendly toward the Jews that many of them of their own accord went to Egypt and settled there, particularly in Alexandria. Judea still remained the object of strife between Syria and Egypt, and came finally into the power of Syria under Antiochus III. the Great, by his victory over Scopus near Paneas. Of Seleucus Philopator, son of Antiochus the Great, it is reported that his general, Heliodorus, entered the temple to plunder it and was prevented by a miraculous vision. The succession of Antiochus IV. Epiphanes to the throne of Syria (175 B.C.) was of especial moment to the Jews. During the changes which had befallen the political possession of Palestine, Jewish independence being entirely lost, the chief concern of the Jews was their religious freedom. But contact with Greek civilization and the attempts of the leaders to make capital out of the quarrels of the overlords, as well as the building up in the land of centers of Greek life through settlement there of Greek colonies, introduced the spirit of Hellenism and caused the establishment of a party among the Jews favorable to Greek civilization, receiving therefore the support of the overlords. Opposed to this Hellenistic party was the party of the Hasideans, committed to the observance of the Mosaic ordinances, and to the condemnation of Hellenism. Into the contest between these two parties Antiochus Epiphanes intruded by his brutal attack on the sanctuary, 168 B.C., as well as by his assault upon the religious observances of the Jews and his edict against the Sabbath and circumcision. His anger on account of the failure of his expedition against Egypt he vented in this way upon the Jews, and he thus became the antetype of The New-Testament Antichrist. Severe persecution followed, in the course of which many Jews abandoned their religion. A turn in affairs was given in the year 167 B.C. in the resistance offered by the priest Mattathias 13 of Modein, supported by his sons. Rebellion against Syria broke out, led by Judas, son of Mattathias, who won many victories over Syrian troops, restored the service of the temple, and died a hero's death. The strife was carried on by the brothers of Judas, one of whom, Simon, gained the position of high priest and prince by choice of the people and recognition by the Syrians. Until the time of Simon's son, John Hyrcanus, the Maccabees and the Hasideans were of the same party and, indeed, bore the same name (see HASMONEANS). They were the predecessors of the Pharisees (see PHARISEES AND SADDUCEES). John broke with the orthodox party and connected himself with the Sadducees. After his death his family became involved in quarrels over the succession and lost its preeminent position, and against his son Alexander Jannaeus (104-78 B.C.) the Pharisees sought Syrian help. In the strife that ensued upon his death, caused by attempts to gain the succession, the Romans obtained entrance, and Pompey captured Jerusalem after a three months' siege. Herod, son of the Idumean Antipater, was made king by the Roman senate in 39 B.C., and established himself by the help of the Roman legions in 37 B.C. He sought to conciliate the Jews, particularly by his magnificent restoration of the temple. After the death of this talented but conscienceless tyrant, his kingdom was divided between his sons Archelaus, Antipas, and Philip. The first, to whom Judea had fallen, was soon deposed by the Romans (6 A.D.), and government by Roman procurators was instituted with capital at Caesarea. The procurators appointed by the Romans had no appreciation of Jewish characteristics, and constant ill-feeling was aroused over religious matters. The best known of these officers is Pontius Pilate (26-36 A.D.), whose conduct caused many conflicts with the people and whose unstable character is revealed in the story of the trial of Jesus (see PILATE, PONTIUS). The opposition between the suppressed theocratic consciousness of the Jews and the claims of the Caesars grew ever sharper until the final conflict. Open rupture was almost provoked in the year 40 A.D. by the order of Caligula to have his image set up in the temple, a crisis that was passed only by the intercession of Agrippa I, at Rome. To this end Agrippa was given the realm which had been Herod's, and his favor to the Jews appears in his attitude toward the Christians (see HEROD AND HIS FAMILY). The situation of the Jews became more difficult under Felix and Festus, still harder under Albinus, and the rebellion came to a head under Gessius Florus. The Zealots seized the temple and fortified themselves there; Agrippa II., who had succeeded to a lesser area of sovereignty than Agrippa I. controlled, did not suppress the insurrection. In a battle near Beth-horon a Roman force was nearly annihilated. This victory inflamed the whole country. But the Romans began to press in, and under Vespasian they conquered Peraea in 68 A.D., while internal strife divided the Jews between the Zealots and the moderates. In the year 70, a few days before the Passover, Titus appeared before the walls of Jerusalem and assailed it from the north. In fourteen days the outer wall was taken, and, a few days after, the second, while the innermost and strongest afforded means of greater resistance. Famine seized the defenders, but in spite both of the mild proposals of Titus for the surrender of the city and his stern exhibitions of punishment that must ensue, the defense was maintained. The people still hoped for such deliverance from God as their history recorded as having occurred in earlier times. The temple was the last stronghold. When it was taken, Titus would have preserved it at the request of Josephus, but his intention was frustrated by the unguarded act of a soldier who applied the torch. After the fall of Jerusalem, resistance was still offered at a few fortresses, such as Herodeum near Tekoa, Machaerus across the Jordan, and Masada, west of the Dead Sea. But from that time the Jews have had to live without country, sanctuary, and nationality. C. VON ORELLI. **II. Post-Biblical History.--1. General survey:** With the fall of Jerusalem the Jewish nation lost the remains of its independence and all control over its external destiny, while it became dependent upon the peoples among whom it lived. It nevertheless had received such a development of spiritual, social, and religious life as had differentiated it from the other nations with which its lot was from that time cast and had made absorption into them an impossibility. Consequently the Jewish people has had for 1,900 years its own inner history, which has not been without influence upon the world at large. Externally and internally this history divides into three periods: (1) From the fall of Jerusalem to the Mohammedan conquest and the emergence of the Teutons; (2) to the French Revolution; (3) to the present. In the first of these periods the Jews built about themselves a spiritual wall within which they protected and developed their peculiar and individual bent. Abandoning all claims upon the outer world, they busied themselves with the production of the Talmud, the citadel of their spiritual life, the treasury of their thought, the basis of the physical and spiritual laws of their existence. When their individuality had thus been fixed in enduring form, they could without danger to their peculiar genius participate in the life of the nations of the world so far as this was permitted to them. In the second period this participation was very limited, confined chiefly to the exercise of the functions of commerce and of the privileges of middlemen between the Orient and Occident. They also exercised a decided influence upon culture and mediated between Greek learning and philosophy and the Arabic and between the Arabs and the West, and so contributed to learning of the scholastic type, producing a monistic type of thought best illustrated by Spinoza. With the French Revolution began the gradual emancipation of the Jews, in which they gained political equality with Christians, lost the quality of separativeness, acquired eminence in the world of wealth and of letters, but at the expense of that intensity of religious life which had distinguished them through the centuries. Against this there came late in the nineteenth century a reaction which took the form of Zionism (q.v.), one of the purposes of which is the unification of the nation through the erection of a Jewish state in Palestine. The present century fords among the Jews a social excitement and a spiritual ferment such as it has not known since the destruction of Jerusalem. **2. The Early Period:** The Jewish war left Judea a waste and its Jewish inhabitants despoiled. Vespasian 14 took the land as his personal domain, from which he bestowed estates upon his friends; he settled 800 veterans in the neighborhood of Jerusalem, and compelled those Jews who wished to remain in the country to purchase their holdings from the conqueror. The Jews who had previously been domiciled in other lands became the real strength of those nations. They were in greatest force in Egypt, especially in Alexandria; but they were scattered elsewhere from India westward, and no considerable city was without its Jewish community and its synagogue. In Rome there were at least 8,000 Jews with their own quarter of the city; Jewish merchants followed the legions, while the Herodian family had a recognized place at court, and Jews under the empire had special exemption and position. With the destruction of Jerusalem the Jews had lost their unifying center. But by his flight to the camp of the Romans and his prediction to Vespasian of elevation to the throne, Rabbi Johanan ben Zakkai (cf. *JE,* vii. 214 sqq.) had gained the emperor's favor and a promise to grant any request the rabbi might make. The latter asked permission to establish a school of Jewish law, and when this was given, settled at Jabneh or Jamnia, a little city near the coast south of Joppa. Under the care of the institution there erected came the settlement of many matters formerly in charge of the Sanhedrin, including the Jewish calendar. Hence arose the tradition that Rabbi Johanan transferred the Sanhedrin to Jabneh. While it had not been his purpose to create a new center of Judaism, the gathering of scholars there and the study of the law had this effect, and so made possible the continued survival of the Jewish spirit. Jews from abroad sent their sons for the study of the law, while the teachers gave their pronouncement upon matters of importance for all their coreligionists. Here was developed the tradition of the law, as divided into Halacha and Haggada (see MIDRASH), out of which came a definite and characteristic set of views which stamps the Jewish learning with what may be called a Talmudic type as opposed to the Biblical type of post-exilic and pre-Christian Judaism. This is the third stage in the development of the Jewish spirit, the first being what may be termed the pre-Biblical. In this stage the four generations to the close of the Mishna are known as Tanaim, the five to the close of the Talmud as Amoraim, both classes influential upon all succeeding Judaism, guarding as they did Judaic orthodoxy. Among the Tanaim two men were of eminent importance, Gamaliel the younger (cf. *JE,* v. 560 sqq.), and Akiba (q.v.). The first stood for the influence of Hillel's interpretation of the law, for the decision of legal matters by a majority of authorities, and for Jabneh as the continued center of official Judaism. Rabbi Akiba's fame rests not merely upon his collection of the Halachoth, but upon his new method of using the literal and minute elements of Scripture as a basis of legal formulas. Under Gamaliel the estrangement between Jews and Christians became final and complete. Judaism meanwhile gained ever a stronger influence, and proselytes of eminence in the heathen world adopted the Jewish religion. 15 This aroused Domitian's distrust, and he had the Jewish law examined to discover whether it were a danger to the state. Under Trajan this distrust became greater because of the practical aid given by Jews to the Parthians, and victory over these was recognized, even in inscriptions on coins, as a new victory over the Jews. But the victory over the Jews of the Orient was fearfully avenged upon both Romans and Greeks in a rising of the Jews of the Occident. The imperial legions were exterminated, and in Cyprus alone 240,000 Greeks were said to have been slaughtered. Trajan called in the aid of his best generals to suppress the insurrection, and severe vengeance was taken on the Jews of Mediterranean lands, while the beautiful synagogue in Alexandria was completely destroyed. But in Syria and Asia Minor a new revolt was raised, and the fanaticism of the Jewish spirit, fanned by the Messianic hope centered in Bar Kokba, made necessary the sending of Trajan's most capable general, Julius Severus, from Britain to Palestine. This was the last important attempt of the Jews to establish a Messianic kingdom by force of arms; thenceforth they looked for it to come only by special divine interposition. The site of Jerusalem was given to the plow, and in 134 a Roman colony, Aelia Capitolina, was founded to the north of the old city. Another revolt among the Jews was suppressed in 135. A poll tax was levied, and circumcision and observance of the Sabbath were forbidden. By these means the possibilities of political danger from the Jews were so thoroughly eliminated by the time of Antoninua Pius that he abolished the severe restrictions, and their renewal under Marcus Aurelius was caused not by political conditions, but by religious intolerance. The Jews themselves recognized that their political importance was a thing of the past and that all which remained was their community in matters of religion. At the end of the second century the Sanhedrin lost its eminence, and the decisions of Rabbi Juda 16 ben Simon were recognized as authoritative. He established as finally decisive the Mishna of Rabbi Akiba, while other collections were pronounced devoid of authority. At this time, it is probable, the Mishna ceased to be oral and was committed to writing. Since all national, political, and judicial rights had ceased, the law had in part only an ideal value as fashioning the inner life and conceptions of Jews. With the compilation of the Mishna Palestinian Judaism had exhausted itself, and the scholastic center shifted to Babylon in the Production of the Gemara or the Talmud proper by the school of the Amoraim. What the Mishna is to the Bible the Gemara is to the Mishna--a continuous refinement of the law, binding Judaism within ever tightening chains. The first Amoraim were Palestinians, the most eminent among them Rabbi Juda the younger. He transferred the seat of the school to Tiberias, where, under the favor of Alexander Severus, something of splendor appeared. Relations between Jews and Romans became not merely friendly, but intimate, and laxity in following Judaic practises was the natural result. During this period Babylon was coming into greater significance for the Jews, and was even called "the land of Israel." The head of the Babylonian Jews was an officer under the Parthian government, fourth in rank after the king, and a descendant of the Davidic line. His power, however, was temporal, not as yet spiritual. Rabbi Abba Rab brought the Mishna from Palestine and founded a school at Babylon which soon had 1,200 students. His friend Mar Samuel first enunciated the maxim which became authoritative for Jews--"the law of the state is valid." During the reign of Alexander Severus the neo-Persian kingdom of the Sassanides was established, and this, in its zeal for Zoroastrianism, excluded Jews from office and introduced certain restrictions to be followed on Zoroastrian festivals. These restrictions did not continue long, and until Constantine's time the Jews had peace. Constantine's edict of toleration (312 A.D.) included the Jews also, but later his policy changed and proselyting was forbidden as well as the circumcision of slaves of Jews. In this Jews saw the approach of Messianic times, for it had long been said that "the Messiah will not come till the Roman empire is Christian." But Rabbi Hillel the younger declared that Israel had no Messiah to look forward to, for the prediction by the prophet of a mighty ruler had been fulfilled in Hezekiah; the head of the Babylonian school replied in the prayer "May God forgive Rabbi Hillel for holding this error." Under Constantine matters were still worse for the Jews, and many in the Roman empire emigrated to Persia. Constantine's laws were enforced with the addition that marriage between Jews and Christians was forbidden. Julian especially favored the Jews, and preparations were made for rebuilding the temple, which ceased, however, on his death. About the year 400 A.D. Rabbi Aschi had the oral explanations, discussions, decisions and investigations 17 based on the Mishna collected in the Babylonian Talmud, which became the chief source of spiritual instruction, as much superior to the Mishna in the regard of scholastic Judaism as the Mishna was to the Bible. Even till the present the Talmud has been for millions of Jews the totality of truth, wisdom, righteousness and holiness, and study of it the certain way to eternal life, while to study anything else is to a real Jew a sign of godlessness. To a Jew instructed in the Talmud God and his revelation as set forth therein are the first and highest interests of life, thought, feeling and action. Thus this collection became the wall which hedged about all Jewish life, the influence which controlled all Jewish thought and molded Jewish conceptions for fifteen hundred years. It was the obstacle, as well, to further development of Jewish religion and life (see TALMUD). This great production came forth in the time when Rome was hard pressed by the Germanic peoples and North Africa became the booty of the Vandals. The mighty world-movements of the times served to arouse once more the Messianic hopes of the Jews, expressed in the saying that the Messiah would not come till the eighty-fifth Jubilee (4200 *anno mundi,* 440 A.D.), about. the time when the Vandals captured the temple treasures at Rome and carried them to Africa. As at. this time the old sacred treasures of the Jews disappeared, the more precious became the Talmud as the one sacred instrument remaining. So in Palestine the Amoraim collected their traditions in the Jerusalem Talmud, though it is not known where or by whom this was done. In the declining Roman empire the situation of the Jews was not favorable. Theodosius sought to protect them, though foiled by the opposition of Ambrose, and his successors also tried to secure their peace. Under Theodosius II., Cyril of Alexandria had the Jews expelled from the city and their possessions given to the rabble, while their synagogue in Antioch was sacked. Enmity between Jews and Christians became acute. Jerome's Hebrew teacher could attend his pupil only in secret. Palestinian Judaism meanwhile did not perish without leaving one more monument of exceeding value in the Massorah--i.e., the addition of vowels, accents, and marks of division or distinction to the consonantal text of the Old Testament, with annotations on the text. In 470 there began an official persecution of the Jews of Persia, and many were compelled to emigrate to India. Later, in Malabar they received privileges which are chronicled on a tablet still extant, inscribed in Hebrew and early Indian. The end of the period of the Amoraim fell at the close of the fifth century. **3. The Middle Period:** For the Jews of the Byzantine empire this period began with the reign of Justinian, whose laws were the basis 18 of the treatment of the Jews during the Middle Ages. Under his code Jewish testimony against a Christian was not received, a Christian might not become a proselyte to Judaism, Jews had to support highly paid city officials from whom they received no benefits or immunities, they might not celebrate their Passover before the Christian Easter, might read the Scriptures in the synagogue on the Sabbath only in Greek or Latin, while they were subjected at the hands of the rabble to frequent riots with all attendant evils. On the other hand, the Jews lost no opportunity for vengeance, which in turn excited new animosity. At this time the Jews of the Orient dropped out of history and those of the Occident became prominent, especially those of Spain. In Italy, under the great movements of the Germanic peoples, Jews suffered as did the Christians. During the Gothic rule the laws of Theodosius were in force; Jews controlled the slave-trade and held Christians in slavery, and were largely autonomous besides disregarding the laws designed to protect Christians. Still, the highest authorities did all possible to protect the Jews, and the efforts of the popes to this end were constant. Gregory the Great was especially kind to them, compelling indemnification for destroyed synagogues, but he forbade the holding of Christians as slaves, and wrote to several of the kings of his day to make an end of the trade in Christian slaves carried on by the Jews. Of all the countries of Europe none was so favorable to the Jews as Spain. There the highest 19 products of Jewish industry, intellect and skill were in evidence; in wealth, honor, philosophy and poetry the days of the Jews in Spain still mark for them an epoch. On the other hand, in the reaction nowhere was the suffering so great as there. Jewish settlements in the Spanish peninsula were very ancient, made perhaps under the Phenicians; certainly after the destruction of Jerusalem great numbers of Jews were sold into Spain, and Granada was so largely settled by them as to be called a Jewish state. Christianity also made early and great conquests there, and laws similar to those mentioned above were enacted to prevent holding of Christian slaves by Jews and proselyting by force. Later King Sisebut ordered all Jews to receive baptism or to give up their holdings of land, and many Jews complied, while many others migrated to France or Africa. The Jewish question came under discussion at the Synod of Toledo (633 A.D.). Isidore of Seville opposed forcible conversion of the Jews, but forbade that Christians should become Jews and prohibited intercourse between Jews and Christians. The situation changed from time to time. Under one king the Jews would enjoy religious liberty, and Jews who had nominally accepted Christianity were permitted to return to their old faith; under another the menace to the Church of so large a population of Jews was felt, and severe laws against them were put in force. Under King Egica a conspiracy of Spanish and African Jews with the Arabs to overthrow the Gothic kingdom was discovered, but too late; Jews and Arabs made common cause, and the Mohammedan conqueror, Tarik, brought the Gothic kingdom of Spain to an end in 711 A.D. The relations between Jews and Mohammedans was peculiar. Jews regarded Islam as a younger daughter of Judaism, as was Christianity, but they felt more closely related to Islam and never made common cause with Christians against Mohammedans. In Arabia they had made ineffective Constantine's efforts for the spread of Christianity. They had many important settlements there which were governed by Jewish princes, and they had a school of the law and possessed Talmudic learning. When Mohammed proclaimed his faith as that of Abraham, the Jews had faith in him and be called them "helpers." But differences arose, and Mohammed published parts of Suras against them in which he called them murderers of prophets and falsifiers of revelation. Then there came war with the Jewish tribe of the Banu-Kainuka, and one of the two Jewish women whom the prophet brought back tried to poison him. After his death the strife between Mohammedans and Jews continued. In Spain the Jews opened the gates of Toledo to Tarik and took bloody vengeance upon the Christians, while they received many favors from the conquerors. In this period occurred the founding of the sect of the Karaites (q.v.) by Anan ben David (cf. *JE,* i. 553 sqq.), who, in Babylon and Palestine, opposed the Talmudic learning and would have the Old Testament alone authoritative. He was the first Jew to compose a commentary on the Pentateuch. In Palestine there was propounded also a Jewish mysticism and system of ascetics whose followers called themselves "men of faith," claimed miraculous powers, and influenced all medieval Judaism. The Karaites were opposed by Saadia of Egypt, who founded Jewish science and translated the Old Testament into Arabic. His philosophic-religious system is contained fully in his *Emunoth wedeoth * written in 943 A.D., in which he introduced Greek-Christian philosophy to the Orient. The tenth century saw the flowering of Jewish culture in Spain, especially at the court of Abdul-Rahman 20 III. at Cordova. The first of the series of noted Jewish scholars was Samuel Halevi ibn Nagdela (b. 993), rabbi, author and poet. Then came Jona Marinus (Merwan ibn-Ganach, 995-1050), grammarian and exegete; Solomon ibn-Gebirol, who wrote in Arabic *Mekor hayim, * "The Fountain of Life," a cosmogony which contained little especially Jewish except a basis in the divine word of power, being a syncretism of Neoplatonism and Aristotelianism. This was translated into Latin 100 years later and was much used by the Schoolmen. Bahya ibn-Pakuda wrote (1050-60 A.D.; Cf. *JE,* ii. 447 sqq.) a "Guide to Inner Duties" based on Platonic asceticism. The celebrated Solomon bar Isaac (cf. *JE, * x. 324 sqq.), known as Rashi (q.v.), wrote his commentary in the first half of the eleventh century. The greatest Jewish poet of all the centuries was Judah Halevi (1086-1145; cf. *JE,* vii. 346 sqq.), who wrote the songs which have become the national pride of Jews. He proclaimed the sovereignty of Judaism and the preeminence of Jews on the ground that from Adam down they alone had preserved the gifts of grace and the essence of manhood. Jews were between angels and the highest rank of men; proselytes might partake of the external blessings of Jews, but could never reach the height of privilege which belonged to the native Jew. Israel is God's servant upon whom are laid the ills and hurts of mankind. The destruction of Jerusalem was of divine purpose that the earth might be leavened with the Jewish spirit. Twenty years later Abraham ibn-Daud (cf. *JE,* i. 101 sqq.) used Aristotelian philosophy to prove Judaism the one system of truth and reason. Abraham ibn-Ezra of Toledo (1088-1167; cf. *JE,* vi. 520 sqq.) was a keen critic, though a superstitious astrologer and alchemist. Most celebrated of all was Moses ben Maimun, known best as Maimonides (1135-1204; q.v.), in whom the movement just sketched reached its height. Soon after his death arose not merely the banning by the rabble of Maimonides' writings, but hostility to all study of philosophy. Jews divided themselves into followers and opponents of Maimonides, but until the time of Spinoza the Jews did nothing further for philosophy. While at first the Jews were favored under the Arabs of Spain, later they were forced either to 21 accept Islam or to leave the country. They then began to take the side of the Christians and assisted Alfonso X. in the conquest of Seville, for which service they were given three mosques to use as synagogues. But in 1260 the old laws of the Goths were revived and new restrictions were imposed. On the other hand Christians were not to dishonor synagogues, force baptism of Jews, or employ legal measures against them on Jewish feast days. Many of these laws remained a dead letter. A little later the Dominican Raymond of Peñaforte (see DOMINIC, SAINT, AND THE DOMINION ORDER, § 4) undertook his mission to the Jews. At the instigation of Pope Clement IV., Jayme I. of Spain ordered that all passages in the Talmud opposing Christianity should be erased. Under Alfonao X. of Castile began a golden age for the Jews, during which they appeared at court and gained riches and position. Under Don Pedro (1350-1369) even more favorable was their situation, but with his fall great reverses were experienced. Jews were forbidden to bear Spanish names and were compelled to wear a distinguishing mark; in order to make headway against Jewish usury, to Christians Jews were ordered to remit a third of their indebtedness. Disputations took place in which the systems of Christianity and Judaism were attacked and defended. Even Jews bewailed the greed and selfishness of men of their own nation who were in positions of wealth and power, and the voices of eminent Jewish scholars were raised against such men as impious and godless. In Seville in 1391 occurred the first popular rising against the Jews, suppressed only by royal troops. Three months later, in a new uprising, 4,000 Jews were slain, the wives and children sold to Mohammedans, and two synagogues converted into churches. Many Jews suffered themselves to be baptized, among them Samuel Abrabanel; in Cordova and Toledo also many Jews became nominal Christians. These became a great danger to the Church, preserving as they did in secret their fidelity to Judaism and the Talmud, and were more under suspicion and more hated than those who had remained faithful to their religion. Some, however, showed great sincerity and endeavored to convert their brethren, among whom may be named Solomon Levi of Burgos (1353-1435; cf. *JE,* ix. 562-563), who received ordination and, as Paul of Burgos, attained a high position, becoming bishop of Seville. Other zealous converts were Joshua Lorqui, whose Christian name was Geronimo of Santa Fé, physician to Benedict XIII., and Vicente Ferrer, who even in the synagogues assailed Judaism. At this time an edict was issued assigning the Jews to special residence quarters, inhibiting certain trades, offices, and commerce with Christians, ordering a style of dress with the Jewish mark on it, and prohibiting the trimming of the beard and the carrying of weapons. Continued popular uprisings drove many of the Jews over to Christianity, while the synagogues were changed into churches. Benediet XIII. ordered a disputation which was held in Tortosa. It lasted fifteen months, and held sixty-eight sessions, in which Joshua Lorqui disputed with sixteen of the foremost rabbis. As a result Benedict issued his bull forbidding the reading of the Talmud, while the scurrilous writings on the life of Jesus were proscribed, especially the *Mar mar Jesu. * A period of literary polemics between Jews and Christians ensued which lasted for fifty years. In 1442 Pope Eugenics IV. issued a bull to the bishops of Castile and Leon enforcing the old church laws against Jews, and King John IV. put forth an edict protecting them, which the territorial limitation of his authority made of little value. Almost no Jewish literature was produced, while the works of Thomas Aquinas, Duns Scotus, and William of Occam were translated into Hebrew. Cabalistic works continued to appear, and Jews cultivated the healing art. In the second half of the fifteenth century the charge was again made that Jews murdered Christian children, and this calumny continued in spite of repeated failure to convict in the courts. The fact that Jewish converts to Christianity held many of the most lucrative offices caused numerous anti-Jewish riots. The turning-point was the marriage (1469) of Isabella of Castile to Don Ferdinand of Aragon. In 1480 the Inquisition was set at work 22 against the Jews, with whom the prisons were soon filled, and four days after the setting up of the Holy Office six Jewish converts to Christianity were burned at the stake. Converts and all Spaniards were invited to betray converts suspected of secretly Judaizing, and a list of suspicious circumstances was published to aid in detecting the apostates. Between January and November, 1481, 298 of these supposedly false Jewish converts suffered death, while in the archbishopric of Cadiz in the same year 2,000 Jewish heretics were found. The proscribed who had already died were exhumed and their bones burned,while their property was confiscated. Sixtus IV. censured the proceedings of the inquisitors and disapproved the request of Ferdinand to have the tribunal set up in his other dominions. In 1482 Torquemada was made chief inquisitor, the Inquisition was released from restriction to legal forms and its sphere of influence extended to Aragon. Attempts were made against the highest dignitaries of Church and State if only they were of Jewish blood. At the court of Ferdinand Isaac Abrabanel was minister of finance, but in spite of his influence the edict was issued to exile all Jews from Castile, Aragon, Sicily, and Sardinia. To the number of 300,000 they fled into Portugal, Navarre, Italy, Morocco, and Turkey. The princes of Europe censured the regulations of Ferdinand, while the Sultan Bajazid remarked, "You call Ferdinand a clever king, who has impoverished his own land and made ours rich." In 1496 Emmanuel of Portugal issued an edict giving the Jews the alternative of baptism or exile. Many chose exile, thousands were baptized, while hundreds killed themselves and their families in order to escape enforced baptism. In France Charlemagne favored the Jews because tuey were the only merchants in the realm. To the embassy to Harun al-Rashid he made 23 a Jew interpreter, and after the death of the ambassador the interpreter carried through the work of the mission. Under Louis the Pious, Jews held an important place at court, though opposed by Agobard of Lyons. At the Synod of Meaux the bishops reenacted the old ecclesiastical laws against the Jews, which Charles the Bald prevented from taking effect. Yet popular demonstrations were made against the Jews. In Toulouse it was the right of the count on Good Friday to administer to the chief of the Jewish community a box on the ear. The Jews secured immunity from this by paying a yearly tribute and in the same way elsewhere they purchased the good will of the powerful. Hugh Capet's death in 996 was charged against the Jews because Hugh's physician was a Jew. The crusades gave new opportunities to despoil this people. The principal colony was at Narbonne, consisting of 300 families, among them that of the Hebrew grammarian Kimchi; another great colony was at Montpellier. In the twelfth century the story was told that Jews were killing the children of Christians to use their blood in the Passover. On the basis of this charge, King Philip August, about the year 1180, mulcted the Jews of his realm in 15,000 marks silver and de clared all debts to Jews void except such as paid him one-fifth of the entire amount. The possessions of Jews were regarded as the property of the barons, and nobles made sales of "property and Jews." At this time arose in France the Cabala (q.v.) with its mysticism, magic and theosophy, exercising influence not only upon Jewish, but upon Christian thought, and playing its part in exegesis of both Talmud and Bible. Its force is felt to the present, since the modern Chasidism of Russia and Galicia is the Cabala in its most recent form, and its essence reflects the spirit of Jewish thought. In the third crusade the Jews of various parts of France suffered as they had m the first and second, although Pope Gregory IX. declared that the Church desired neither their enforced conversion nor their destruction. But this pope committed to the bishop of Paris the question whether the Talmud reviled Christ and his mother and contained statements derogatory of Scripture and of God. The Talmud was condemned, and in 1244 twenty-four wagon loads of copies of this work were burned in a square of the city. At this time the Jews themselves condemned and burned the writings of Maimonides. In 1269 Louis IX. required all Jews to wear a badge of yellow on breast and back, and in 1306 Philip IV. ordered them driven from the kingdom, and their gold, silver, and jewels were forfeited to him, while only their clothes were left in their possession. In 1360 they were allowed to return under favorable conditions, such as that permitting them to charge interest at eighty per cent., only to be driven out again under Charles VI. in 1394. In England after the conquest by the Normans the Jews found themselves in fortunate circumstances, and in London their dwellings 24 were like royal palaces. These conditions were first disturbed at the coronation of Richard in 1189, for when the Jews of the realm were about to bring their dues of homage, in popular uprisings in many of the cities numbers of them were slain, and some were burned in their houses. In York they intrenched themselves in the fortress and, when hope of escape was gone, set fire to it and perished in the flames. John Lackland and Henry III. extorted from them more than 10,000,000 francs, and the latter encouraged efforts to convert them (see JEWS, MISSION TO THE). In 1275 parliament by statute interdicted the collection of usury, yet Jews might buy houses and lands and engage in commerce. In 1278 the circulation of counterfeit coin was attributed to the Jews and 293 were hanged. In 1290 Jews were banned, mortgages held by them canceled, and they were compelled to sell their property; 16,000 left the country and were not permitted to return till the time of Cromwell, when individuals were permitted to settle there. Cromwell was looking for the Messianic kingdom in which he allotted a great part to the chosen race. In Italy the Jews suffered no such hard fortune as in other lands, since the influence of the popes 25 was there more effective, though restrictive measures were passed limiting their privileges. Under the Normans in Naples and Sicily Jews and Christians had equal privileges. The great centers of Jewish life in Italy were in the central and southern parts, not in the great Christian commercial cities of the north. In 1199 Innocent III. issued a *Constitutio Judaeorum * protecting the Jews, and this was confirmed by Gregory IX. in 1235. Innocent IV. issued a bull at the Council of Lyons of 1245 to the German and French princes, directed against the charge that Jews killed the children of Christians; he also commanded that the Talmud be protected if only it were found free from assault upon Christianity. When, in consequence of the Black Death, many Jews in South France, Spain, Savoy, on the Southern Rhine, and in Switzerland were tortured, murdered or burned, Clement VI. in a bull forbade the killing of them and the taking of their goods without due process of law, and also forcible baptism. In 1419 Martin V. issued a bull in favor of this people. But Eugenius IV. in 1442 put in force the old canonical limitations, and even intensified them, and in this course he was followed by Nicholas V. in 1447. The tatter's legate to the Synod of Bamberg, Nicholas of Cusa (q.v.), directed in Germany the execution of these regulations. During the Inquisition in Spain and after the exile of Jews from Spain and Portugal, many of them found refuge in the Papal States and Turkey. The popes of those times, Alexander VI., Julius II., Leo X., and Clement VII., had Jewish physicians, and the princes of the Church followed their example. Clement disapproved of forcible baptism of adult Jews, but encouraged the baptism of Jewish children if their parents consented. He also attempted to protect the Jews who had perforce received baptism in Spain but were persecuted as unfaithful. Paul III. was charged with being more kind to Jews than to Christians, and his benefits extended to the persecuted Jewish-Christian converts of Portugal. In 1536 Charles V. obtained from Paul III. sanction of the Inquisition, but with limitations; and while following popes continued this course, it was rather regarded as an existing fact than as a legal institution, and Clement VIII. openly discountenanced it. When under Julius III. Cardinal Caraffa in 1542 made the Inquisition general throughout the Christian world and increased its rigor, in Italy attack upon the Talmud began; in 1553 the pope signed a decree of condemnation, and on the Jewish New Year's Day all copies in Rome were burned, while throughout Italy many thousand copies suffered the same fate. Under Marcellus II. the Jews were expelled from Rome in consequence of accusations of the murder of children, and Paul II., a confirmed enemy of the Jews, laid a tribute on the synagogues and enforced the old restrictions with additional enactments, while in many other ways he manifested his hostility. Against him Sultan Suleiman acted in protection of the Jews of Ancona. During this period so many Jewish-Christian converts entered the Franciscan and Jesuit orders that Paul IV. forbade the reception of Jews therein before the fourth generation. At this time the *Sohar, * the chief Cabalistic writing, was first printed by permission of the Inquisition. Pius IV. mitigated the hard conditions, and the Talmud, issued in censured form, was first printed at Basel, 1578-80. Pius V. again put in force the early restrictions with further limitations, and permitted the Jews to reside within the Papal States only at Rome and Ancona. Gregory XIII. ordered that Christian scholars acquainted with Hebrew preach to the Jews in their synagogues on feast days, and Jews were compelled to support the preachers. Clement VIII. withdrew in 1593 the decree of banishment and annulled the anti-Jewish regulations of his predecessors. Since then the popes have taken no official steps respecting the Jews with the exception of the declaration of Pius IX. in 1870 with respect to their conversion. The Jews entered Germany with the Roman legions. Their presence at Cologne in the fourth century is demonstrable. Most of 26 them, however, passed on into France. According, to German law they had their own regulations and freedom in religion, but were without citizenship. They were dependent upon the emperor for protection, and paid a special tribute to him and to the princes. Their scholars they received from other lands. Henry II. drove them from Mainz, though they returned the next year. In Speyer they had their own quarter, protected by a wall. Forcible baptism was not allowed, in legal contests Jewish law prevailed, and the ordeal by fire and water was not applied to Jews. The first crusade in 1094 saw the first persecution of the Jews, and in Treves, Speyer, and Mainz many Jews perished. At the time of the second crusade the monk Rudolph preached against them from city to city, but they received some protection from Conrad IV. and from certain of the princes of the Church, while Bernard of Clairvaux rebuked Rudolph for his incitement to murder. For what protection the Jews received, however, they had to pay. The charges of murder were also occasions of extortion of money and of persecution. In spite of all this, the Jews contributed to the culture of the country, especially in the Minnelieder. Under Frederick II. the canonical regulation against office-holding by the Jews was enforced. Under Frederick I. of Austria the legal position of Jews was excellent, while Rudolph of Hapsburg contradicted the old charge of the murder of Christian children. Notwithstanding, popular uprisings against the Jews took place in many cities with all attendant atrocities. In 1298 the new charge of desecrating the host raised persecutions which spread over Germany and into Austria. Albrecht I. compelled many cities to pay damages and took the Jews under his protection. In the fourteenth century blame for the Black Death was laid upon them on the ground that they had poisoned wells and springs, and resulting uprisals of the population inflicted fearful sufferings upon the supposed authors of the scourge. In some cities the whole Jewish community was put to death at the stake, in others they burned themselves to death. While in many places the magistrates swore never to receive Jews back again for residence, the oath soon became a dead letter, and to Strasburg, Nuremberg, Vienna, Erfurt, Basel, Zurich, and Heilbronn the Jews returned by invitation. Campaigns against the Hussites began always with assaults upon Jews. The Council of Basel occupied itself in its nineteenth sitting with this people, ordered the enforcement of the ecclesiastical regulations, and recommended the study of Hebrew and Aramaic to the universities in order better to carry on missions among them. At the instigation of a Jewish-Christian convert named Pfefferkorn the Dominicans at Cologne began a campaign against the Talmud, and were opposed by Johann Reuchlin (q.v.), who believed that in the Talmud and the Cabala were to be found divine philosophy and the wisdom of the patriarchs. Against Reuchlin came Jakob van Hoogstraten (q.v.) with his composition on the "Destruction of the Cabala." In 1509 Pfefferkorn obtained an order from Emperor Maximilian to the Jews to deliver to the former all their anti-Christian writings, and a second edict directed Hoogstraten, Reuchlin, a Jewish-Christian named Viktor von Karben, and certain universities to pronounce upon the contents. Reuchlin adduced what he declared to be Christ's testimony to the Talmud as a witness for Christian verity. Reuchlin and Pfefferkorn engaged in a campaign of nicknames into which the archbishop of Mainz intruded, the humanists of Germany took the part of Reuchlin with an anti-ecclesiastical bias, and Luther found therein one of his opportunities (see E PISTOLÆ O BSCURORUM V IRORUM). In several of his utterances he manifested favor to the Jews, though later he reversed his position and violently assailed them, so that the Reformation did not bring to them the relief they expected. But in 1544 Charles V. restored to the Jews their privileges and declared them not guilty of murdering Christian children for Passover purposes. The suspicions and attacks under which the Jews after the twelfth century had suffered throughout Europe prevented expansion and 27 on his first voyage, was accompanied by several of these Maranos, or secret Jews; many Maranos visited or settled in Spanish or Portuguese America, and, when their creed was discovered, became victims of the Inquisition. By their wide connection with the Spanish Jews who had settled in Holland and the Levant, they contributed to international trade across the Atlantic. Owing to a natural sympathy with Holland, those of Brazil took the part of the Dutch in the conflict between Holland and Portugal for the possession of that country, and when the Dutch were expelled from Pernambuco and Rio Janeiro in 1654 a considerable number of Jews left with them and went to the West India Islands. Some twenty-three of these emigrated to New York in the summer of that year, and obtained a footing there through the influence of the Dutch West India Company, among the founders and members of which were a number of Amsterdam Jews. Four years later fifteen Jewish families arrived at New port, R. L, and established a congregation there, under the direction of Aaron Lopez, one of the leading merchants of the country, about 1650. It is possible that Jews had appeared even earlier in Maryland; but the first of importance there was Jacob Lumbroso, a physician of distinction. These places and Philadelphia, Savannah, and Charleston constituted the chief seats of Jewish settlement in the latter half of the seventeenth and the first part of the eighteenth century; the settlers were mostly of the Sephardic, or Spanish branch of the Jewish people, though occasionally a few English Jews were found among them. Toward the close of the colonial period Jews had spread to Lancaster, Philadelphia, and Leicester, Mass., and the majority of them took the revolutionary side in the struggle with England, some of them fighting in the ranks, twenty-four of whom held commissions. Robert Morris was helped to finance the Revolution by the aid of Haym Salomon. It has been calculated that at the beginning of the nineteenth century there were about 2,000 Jews in the United States, of whom 800 were in Charleston, 500 in New York, 150 in 2. In the United States, 1800-1880. Philadelphia, and the remainder scattered. Their numbers were soon increased by migrations from England and Germany, the latter chiefly after the failure of the Liberal movement in 1848. These were among the first of Austin's colonists in Texas in 1821, and the cities of Waco and Castroville still testify to the important position held in early Texas by Jacob de Cordova, who laid out the former, and Henry Castro, who founded the latter. The Jews also helped in the earlier development of California, Solomon Heydenfeld being chief justice of that state up to 1857, while among the pioneers in the commerce of that state Jews were numbered. The period from 1848 to 1880 marked the immigration of German Jews who had taken part in the liberal movements in Germany in 1848 and had come to America to escape the reaction which followed it. These to the number of not less than 7,000 showed their devotion to their adopted country by taking part on both sides of the fraternal strife of the Civil War. Meanwhile, Jews had been in various directions establishing their positions as American citizens and claiming the rights thereof. Even in the early days of the eighteenth century several of the colonies passed laws permitting Jews to become naturalized without the oath on "the true faith of a Christian" still demanded in the mother country. The English act of 1740 permitted this throughout the colonies. In Maryland between 1776 and 1825 the political disabilities of the Jews were entirely removed, mainly by the activity of Jacob I. Cohen and Solomon Etting. The Board of Delegates of American Israelites had been formed for activity where religious discrimination was brought against Americans on account of their creed as Jews. Several American Jews in this early period served abroad as diplomatic agents of the United States. Internally, movements for reform in the ritual took place among American Jews as among their European brethren, the first being at Charleston as early as 1825, but the chief movements 28 in this direction came with the migration of German Jews in 1848. Under the leadership of Rabbis David Einhorn and Isaac Mayer Wise, a wave of reform spread throughout American Jewry, though a large number of the older established congregations still retained the older and more orthodox ritual. Two colleges were founded by the opposite parties to train ministers, the Maimonides College at Philadelphia, founded in 1867, Isaac Lesser, the leader of the more conservative Jews, and the Hebrew Union College in 1875 in Cincinnati, O., by Isaac Mayer Wise, who had likewise established the Union of American Hebrew Congregations, which combined the ministers of the more radical direction and unified the reform ritual by a standard "Union Prayer Book." A more extreme development of the reform position was founded by Felix Adler (q.v.) in New York in 1883, and is known as the Ethical Culture movement (see ETHICAL CULTURE, SOCIETIES FOR). Among the most characteristic features of American Jewry during the period from 1848 to 1880 are the many fraternal organizations which combined educational, charitable and benefit features and served as Jewish centers in small communities where no congregations or synagogues existed. Most congregations had established some charitable features, but few specially philanthropic institutions were found necessary. The first Jewish hospital, Mount Sinai, was founded is 1852 in New York, and the first orphan asylum in 1855 at New Orleans, under the auspices of Judah Touro. In 1880 it was reckoned that there were about 250,000 Jews in the United States, of whom 75,000 were in New York, 16,000 in San Francisco, 12,000 in Philadelphia, 10,000 in Chicago, 29 8,000 in Cincinnati, 8,000 in St. Louis, and the rest scattered. In the following year commenced extensive migrations from Russia, due to the massacres and persecutions which began then and have continued down to the present. It is estimated that at least 1,250,000 Jews have entered the United States since 1881, two-thirds of them from Russia. With the advent of this huge and increasing stream of immigrants, mostly ill provided with means of livelihood, a total change came over the spirit of American Israel. The older Jewish inhabitants hastened to form institutions to assist their persecuted brethren in, settling in the land of liberty. Baron de Hirsch placed a sum of two and one-half millions of dollars at the disposal of an American committee in 1890 for the special purpose of providing for the new arrivals; this fund has founded agricultural colonies and industrial schools. In New York the Educational Alliance has been established to instruct the newcomers in the English language and in their duties as prospective American citizens. Hospitals, orphan asylums, and homes for the aged have been established in all the great Jewish centers, and uniform methods of treatment have been developed under the auspices of the National Conference of Jewish Charities organized in Cincinnati in 1899, which numbers over fifty philanthropic organizations throughout the country. The various charitable bodies have been federated in Philadelphia, Cincinnati, St. Louis, Chicago, Boston, Detroit, Kansas City and Cleveland, and it is reckoned that these bodies, together with the chief Jewish institutions of New York distribute five millions of dollars annually for relief, industrial training and other philanthropic objects. More recently the Russian Jews, who have prospered remarkably, have established independent institutions to care for their poorer brethren. The majority of the newcomers are of the orthodox wing of Judaism, so that whereas before the "eighties" the majority of American Jews were probably attached to reform congregations, at least five-sixths of the 1,200 congregations now in the United States are of the more conservative section. In order to supply these with rabbis, the Jewish Theological Seminary of America was established by Sabato Morais in New York in 1895, and was reorganized in 1902 under the presidency of Solomon Schechter (q.v.). This institution has now one of the largest Hebrew libraries in the world. Jews have their own press, the first periodical being *The Jew * in New York 1823-25, the next important one being *The Occident, * Philadelphia, 30 edited by Isaac Lesser, 1843-1869. The more important weeklies are *American Israelite * of Cincinnati, established in 1854; *Jewish Messenger, * New York, 1857-1902; *The American Hebrew, * New York, 1879; *Jewish Exponent,* Philadelphia, 1887; *Reform Advocate, * Chicago, 1891, and *Jewish Comment, * Baltimore, 1895. The newcomers have also founded a press of their own in Yiddish, a dialect of archaic German printed in Hebrew characters. The chief paper is the *Jewish Daily News * of New York. The Jewish Publication Society of America, founded in 1889, issues works adapted for popular reading, its most memorable publications being Graetz's *History of the Jews, * Israel Zangwill's *Children. of the Ghetto, * and Schechter's *Studies in Judaism. * American Judaism has not hitherto produced any important contributions to Jewish learning, though the *Jewish Encyclopedia, * in twelve volumes (New York, 1900-06) summarizes for the first time the results of the Jewish scholarship of Europe and is being translated into Hebrew and Russian. Owing to the large increase in the number of American Jews, the government has of recent years taken action to protest against the persecutions in Europe which lead to such burdens being cast upon America by the illiberal and persecuting action of despotic governments. Meetings of protest have been held throughout the country against Russian tyranny in 1881, 1893, and after the Kishineff massacres in 1903, when a fund of over one million dollars was collected in America by a Jewish relief committee. In order to take continuous action in such cases an American Jewish Committee was formed in 1906 of representative Jews throughout the country. Jews have taken part in the.higher activities of American life in numbers far beyond their numerical proportions. They have had eminent representalives among the officers of the army and navy, in the United States Senate, in the learned professions, among artists and inventors, and in literature. Altogether, the Jews of the United States have perhaps the most fortunate and influential position of any Jews throughout the world. They number nearly two millions (half of them in New York), about one-sixth of the whole number of Jews, and they show exceptional capacity to enter into the democratic life of America. JOSEPH JACOBS. BIBLIOGRAPHY: On the general history abundant literature, touching the various phases, will be found cited under AHAB; ARCHEOLOGY, BIBLICAL; BIBLICAL THEOLOGY; INQUISITION; CABALA; TALMUD; ZIONISM. Supplementing these lists of literature the reader may consult: W. D. Morrison, *Jews under Roman Rule. * London, 1890; W. H. Kosters, *Widerherstellung lsraels, * Heidelberg, 1895; J. P. Peters, *The Early Hebrew Story, * New York, 1904; J. C. Todd, *Politics and Religion in Ancient Israel, * ib. 1904: M. Friedländer, *Die religiösen Bewegungen innerhalb des Judentums im Zeitalter Jesu, * Berlin, 1905; R. L. Ottley, *Religion in Israel, * London, 1905; W. E. Addis, *Hebrew Religion to the Establishment of Judaism, * ib. 1906; B. Baentsch, *Altorientalischer und israelitischer Monotheismus,* Tübingen, 1906; A. Lods, *La Croyance à la vie future et Ie culte des morts dans l'antiquité israélite, * 2 vols., Paris, 1906; E. Meyer, *Die lsraeliten und ihre Nachbarstämme,* Halle, 1906; K. Marti, *Die Religion des A. T., * Tübingen, 1906, Eng. transl., London, 1907; W. Bousset, *Die Religion des Judentums in neutestamentlichen Zeitalter, * Göttingen, 1907; T. K. Cheyne, *Traditions and Beliefs of Ancient Israel, * London, 1907: idem, *Decline and Fall of the Kingdom of Judah, * ib. 1907; F. Stähelin, *Probleme der israelitischen Geschichte, * Basel, 1907; P. Wendland, *Die hellenistich-romische Kultur in ihren Beziehungen zu Judentum,* Tübingen, 1907; S. A. Cook, *The Religion of Ancient Palestine in the 2d Millennium, B.C., * Edinburgh. 1908; J. B. D. Eerdmans, *Alttestamentliche Studien, II., Die Vorgeschichte lsraels, * Giessen, 1908: W. Fairweather, *The Background of the Gospels: or, Judaism Between the Old and the New Testaments, * Edinburgh, 1908; P. Goodman, *The Synagogue and the Church, * London, 1908: C. H. H. Wright, *Light From Egyptian Papyri on Jewish Hist. Before Christ, ib.,* 1908; M. Löhr, *Das Weib in Jahwe-Religion und Kult,* Leipsic, 1908. For post-Biblical history, individual and general, the beet thesaurus is the *JE, * which has taken a fully authoritative position on matters Jewish. On various phases consult: M. J. Jost, *Geschichte des Judentums und seinen Sekten, * 3 vols., Leipsic, 1857-59; A. Neubauer and M. Stern, *Hebräische Berichte über die Judenverfolgungen während der Kreuzzüge, * Berlin, 1892; H. J. M. Coudenhove, *Das Wesen des Antisemitismus, * Berlin, 1901; H. Graetz, *Volkstümliche Geschichte der Juden, * 3 vols., Leipsic, 1905; E. N. Adler, *Jews in Many Lands, * Philadelphia, 1905; S. Funk, *Die Juden in Babylonien 200-500. * Berlin, 1902; M. Franco, *Hist. et littérature juives pays par pays, * Paris, 1905; M. C. Peters, *The Jew as a Patriot, * New York, 1902; D. Philipson, *The Reform Movement in Judaism, *London, 1907; G. F. Abbott, *Israel in Europe, * New York, 1907; M. Harris, *Hist. of the Mediæval Jews from the Moslem Conquest of Spain to the Discovery of America, * ib. 1907. For Judaism in different lands consult: On England: J. Picciotto, *Sketches of Anglo-Jewish History, * London, 1870; J. Jacobs, *The Jews of Angevin England, * ib. 1893 (a collection of sources); L. Wolf, *Manasseh ben Israel's Mission to . . . Cromwell, * ib. 1901; *Select Pleas, Starrs, and Other Records from the Rolls of the Exchequer of the Jews, 1220-1234,* ib. 1902; *Calendar of the Plea Rolls of the Exchequer of the Jews, * ed. J. M. Rigg, vol, i., 1218-1272, ib. 1905; *Celebration of the 250th Anniversary of the Whitehall Conference, * ib. 1905; A. M. Hyamson, *A Hist. of the Jews in England, * London, 1908. On France: J. Aronius, *Regesten zur Geschichte der Juden im fränkischen und deutschen Reiche bis zum . . 1273, * Berlin, 1887-1902; X. Gasnos, *Étude sur la condition des Juifs dans l'ancien droit francais,* Angers, 1897; S. Kahn, *Notice sur les Israélitea de Nîmes, 672-1808, * Nîmes, 1901; H. Lucien-Brun, *La Condition des Juifs en France depuis 1789, * Paris, 1901. On Germany and Austria: J. Aronius, ut sup.; M. Friedländer, *Materialen zur Geschichte den Juden in Böhmen, * Brünn, 1888; E. Nuebling, *Die Judengemeinden des Mittelalters, * Ulm, 1896; J. E. Scherer, *Die Rechtsverhältnisse der Juden in den deutsch-österreichischen Ländern, * Leipsic, 1901; G. Liebe, *Das Judentum in der deutschen Vergangenheit, * Jena, 1903. On Rumania: E. Sincerus, *Les Juifs en Roumanie depuis Ie traité de Berlin, * London, 1901; B. Lazare, *Les Juifs en Roumanie, * Paris, 1902; I. Lahovarie, *The Jewish Question in Roumania,* ib., 1903. On Russia and Poland: M. Davitt, *The Story of Anti-Semitic Persecutions in Russia, * London, 1903; S. Spinner, *Etwas über den Stand der Cultur bei den Juden in Polen in 16. Jahrhundert,* Vienna, 1903. On Spain and Portugal: E. H. Lindo. *Hist. of the Jews of Spain and Portugal, * London, 1848; F. D. Moscatta, *Jews of Spain and Portugal and the Inquisition,* ib. 1877; A. Pulido Fernandez, *Españtoles sin patria y la razaSefardi, * Madrid, 1905. On the United States: I. Markens, *Hebrews in America,* 1885; *Judaism at the World's Parliament of Religions, * Cincinnati, 1894; C. S. Bernheimer, *The Russian Jew in the United States, * Philadelphia, 1905; *The Two Hundred and Fiftieth Anniversary of the Jews in the United States: Addressee at Carnegie Hall, Thanksgiving Day, 1905. * New York, 1905. B. A. Elzas, *The Jews of South Carolina, * Philadelphia, 1906; and the publications of the Jewish Historical Society. On other lands: G. Meynie, *L'Algérie juive, * Paris, 1887; D. Cazes, *Hist. des Israélites de Tunisie,* ib. 1888; G. Corneilhan, *Le Judaisme en Egypte et en Syrie, * ib. 1889; L. Burieu, *Les Juife algériens, * ib. 1902; A. Steinberg, *Studien zur Geschichte der Juden in der Schweiz, * Zurich, 1902; J. H. Lord, *The Jews of India and the Far East, * Bombay, 1906; J. Chalom, *Les Israélites de la Tunisie, * Paris, 1908. On post-Biblical literature consult: M. Steinschneider, *Die arabische Literatur der Juden, * Frankfort, 1902; J. Guttmann, *Die Scholastic des 13. Jahrhunderts in ihren Beziehungen zum Judentum, * Breslau, 1902; H, Brody and K. Albrecht, *The New-Hebrew School of Poets of the Spanish-Arabian Epoch, * Leipsic, 1906; I. Abrahams, *A Short Hist. of Jewish Literature from the Fall of the Temple,* London, 1906; D. Neumark, *Geschichte der jüdischen Philosophie des Mittelalters,* vol. i., Berlin, 1907; Nathaniel ibn al-Fayyumi, *The Bustan alukul, ed. and transl. from a unique MS. . . . by D. Levine, * New York, 1908.
ITALY Italy

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### ITALY. The Roman Catholic Church. Modern Status in the State (§ 1). Position of the Pope (§ 2). Organization (§ 3). The Old Catholics (§ 4). Protestant Bodies. The Waldensian Church (§ 1). The Evangelical Italian Church (§ 2). Foreign Missionary Congregations and Churches (§ 3). Benevolent Institutions (§ 4). Bible and Tract Societies (§ 5). Periodicals (§ 8). The present kingdom of Italy, comprising besides the main peninsula the islands of Sicily and Sardinia, and a number of smaller islands, was formed in Mar., 1861, The total area is 110,659 square miles; population (1901), 32,475,253, of whom 31,539,863 (99.7 per cent.) are Roman Catholics, 65,595 Protestants (including 20,538 foreigners), and 35,617 Jews. The capital is Rome. Religious liberty prevails, and adherents of all faiths enjoy equal civil and political rights. **I. The Roman Catholic Church:** Until 1848 the Roman Catholic clergy, including the religious orders, occupied an exceptional position 1 in Italy. They were exempt from taxation and from temporal jurisdiction, and had the public educational and charitable institutions entirely in their hands. The kingdom of Sardinia took the lead in bringing about the new order. By law of Aug. 25, 1848, the Jesuits were excluded, as also the Sisters of the Sacred Heart of Jesus, and a law of Mar. 1, 1850, placed all ecclesiastical institutions of a beneficent character under state supervision. Other statutes put an end to exemption from temporal jurisdiction and taxation, forbade religious institutions to receive gifts without royal sanction, and levied an annual tax on the receipts of the "dead hand" (see MORTMAIN). By the law of May 29, 1855, all religious orders in Sardinia not engaged in preaching, teaching, or nursing the sick, were dissolved and their property alienated by the State. On the basis of this law 274 monasteries, with 3,733 monks, and sixty-one convents, with 1,756 inmates, were closed, and 2,722 Chapters and private benefices were disestablished. In 1861 the same principles were carried out in Umbria, in the Marches, and in Naples. These principles were applied to the entire kingdom of Italy by the laws of July 7, 1866, Aug. 15, 1867, and June 19, 1873. The property thus acquired by the State was formed into an ecclesiastical fund (*Fondo per il culto*) for the support of religious worship and public education, and for the payment of pensions to monks and nuns of closed monasteries. Since the suppressed orders might continue to exist as private associations, there are still about 40,000 monks in Italy. Up to June 30, 1898, 44,376 ecclesiastical foundations had come into the possession of the State. The annual income from this property is about 33,000,000 lire. All chapels and churches used for public worship are exempt from confiscation, as also episcopal residences, together with the official buildings connected with them, clerical seminaries, and such cloisters as were turned over to the provinces or communes for public purposes, educational or charitable. All the Roman Catholic theological faculties in the seventeen state universities were abolished by law in 1873. The temporal power of the pope was quietly brought to an end Sept. 20, 1870, but on May 13, 1871, a law was passed guaranteeing 2 his independence, and making his person sacred and inviolable, like that of the king. The honors of sovereignty are due to him, and he is allowed to keep a bodyguard. The State grants him annually a pension of 3,225,000 lire, which, however, he has hitherto declined to receive; and the palaces of the Vatican and the Lateran, and the villa, of Castel Gandolfo (near Albano), with their libraries and collections, are declared to be the property of the holy see, inalienable, free of taxation, and exempted from expropriation. The Italian Government furthermore guarantees the freedom and independence of the conclave, and of all ecclesiastical officers in the execution of their official functions. In the city of Rome, all seminaries, academies, and colleges for the education of the clergy remain under the special authority of the pope; and the State has renounced its right of appointment and nomination to the higher ecclesiastical benefices. No Italian bishop is compelled to take the oath to the king, and no royal *placet* is necessary to the excution of a purely ecclesiastical act. Meanwhile the pope resides in the Vatican, keeping a court of about 1,800 persons, and maintaining the Curia (q.v.) for the government of the Roman Catholic Church at large. Foreign countries represented at the Vatican are: Austria-Hungary, Bavaria, Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Monaco, Nicaragua, Peru, Portugal, Prussia, Russia, San Domingo, and Spain. The Roman Catholic Church in Italy numbers 49 archbishoprics, 221 bishoprics, and some 25,000 parishes. Hierarchically, the Church in Italy is divided into (1) the diocese of Rome, with the six suburban cardinal-bishoprics of Albano, Frascati, Ostia-Velletri, Palestrina, Porto, and Sabina; (2) exempt bishoprics and archbishoprics, i.e., those that are immediately under the pope; and (3) metropolitan bishoprics, with their suffragan bishoprics. The exempt archbishoprics and bishoprics are as follows: in Liguria, 3 the bishopric of Luni-Sarzana; in Venice, the archbishopric of Udine; in the former Papal States, the archbishoprics of Camerino, Ferrara, Perugia, and Spoleto, and the bishoprics of Aquapendente, Alatri, Amelia, Anagni, Ancona, Ascoli, Assisi, Bagnorea, Citta di Castello, Citta della Pieve, Civita Castellana, Corneto, Fabriano, Fano, Ferentino, Foligno, Gubbio. Jesi, Montefiascone, Narni, Nocera, Norcia, Orvieto, Osimo, Poggio Mirteto, Recanati, Rieti, Segni, Sutri-Nepi, Terni, Terracina, Tivoli, Todi, Treja, Veroli, and Viterbo; in Tuscany, the archbishopric of Lucca, and the bishoprics of Arezzo, Cortona, Montalcino, and Montepulciano; in Emilia, the bishoprics of Borgo San Donnino, Parma, and Piacenza; in the province of Naples, the archbishoprics of Amalfi, Aquila, Cosenza Gaeta, and Rossano, and the bishoprics of Aquino, Aversa, Cava-Sarno, Foggia, Gravina, San Marco, Marsi. Melfi, Mileto, Molfetta, Monopoli, Nardò, Penne-Atri, Teramo, Trivento, Troja, and Sulmona; in Sicily, the archbishopric of Catania, and the bishopric of Acireale. The metropolitan seats with their suffragans are: Acerenza-Matera (suffragans: Anglona-Tursi, Potenza, Tricarico, Venosa); Bari-Canosa (Conversano, Ruvo-Bitonto); Benevent (Alife, Ariano, Ascoli-Cerignola, Avellino, Bojano, Bovino, Larino, Lucera, San Severo, Sant' Agata de' Goti, Telese, Termoli); Bologna (Faenza, Imola); Brindisi (Ostuni); Cagliari (Galtelli-Nuovo, Iglesias, Ogliastra); Capua (Cajazzo, Calvi-Teano Caserta, Isernia-Venafro, Sessa); Chieti (Vasto); Conza-Campagna (Lacedonia, Muro, Sant' Angelo de' Lombardi); Fermo (Macerata-Tolentino, Montalto, Ripatransone, San Severino); Florence (San Sepolcro, Colle, Fiesole, Modigliana, Pistoja-Prato, San Miniato); Genoa (Albenga, Bobbio, Brugnato, Savona-Noli, Tortona, Ventimiglia); Lanciano (Ortona); Manfredonia (Viesti); Messina (Lipari, Nicosia, Patti); Milan (Bergamo, Brescia, Como, Crema, Cremona, Lodi, Mantua, Pavia); Modena (Carpi, Guastalla, Massa di Carrara, Reggio Emilia); Monreale (Caltanisetta, Girgenti); Naples (Acera, Ischia, Nola, Pozzuoli); Oristano (Ales-Terralba); Otranto (Gallipoli, Lecce, Ugento); Palermo (Cefalu, Mazzara, Trapani); Pisa (Livorno, Pescia, Pontremoli, Volterra); Ravenna (Bertinoro, Cervia, Cesena, Comacchio, Forli, Rimini, Sarsina); Reggio di Calabria (Bova, Cassano, Catanzaro, Cotrone, Gerace, Nicastro, Nicotera, Oppido, Squillace); Salerno-Acerno (Capaccio-Vallo, Diano, Marsico, Nocera dei Pagani, Nusco, Policastro); Santa Severina (Cariati); Sassari (Alghero, Ampurias, Bisarchio, Bosa); Siena (Chiusi, Grosseto, Massa Marittima, Savana-Pitigliano); Syracuse (Caltagirone, Noto, Piazza); Sorrent (Castellamare); Taranto (Castellaneta, Oria); Turin (Acqui, Alba, Aosta, Asti, Cuneo, Fossano, Ivrea, Mondovi, Pinerolo, Saluzzo, Susa); Trani (Andria, Bisceglie); Urbino (Cagli, Fossombrone, Montefeltro, Pesaro, Sinigaglia, Urbania-Sant' Angelo in Vado); Venice (Adria, Belluno, Ceneda, Chioggia, Concordia, Padua, Treviso, Verona, Vicenza); and Vercelli (Alessandria della Paglia, Biella, Casale, Novara, Vigevano). There are also eleven abbeys and prelatures without dioceses, viz.: Altamura, Monte Cassino, Monte Oliveto Maggiore, Monte Vergine, Nonantola, Santa Lucia del Mela, San Martino al Monte Cimino, San Paolo fuori le Mura di Roma, Sanctissima Trinita della Cave dei Tirreni, SS. Vicenzo ed Anastasio alle tre Fontane (near Rome), and Subiaco. There are Uniat Greek congregations in Naples, Messina, and Barletta. The Old Catholics in Italy number about 1,000. They have a bishop, and less than a dozen ministers. 4 Their largest parishes are Arrone in the province of Perugia; Dovadola, in the province of Florence; Sant' Angelo de' Lombardi, in the province of Avellino; and San Remo, in the Riviera di Ponente. The sect was founded in Italy by Count Enrico de Campello (q.v.). **II. Protestant Bodies:** The Protestant cause in Italy is represented by the old and celebrated Church of the Waldenses (q.v.); by the Evangelical Italian Church; and by congregations of Baptists, Wesleyans, and (American) Methodists. When religious liberty was established in the kingdom of Sardinia by the decree of Feb. 17, 1848, the Waldenses (q.v.) in Italy had eighteen ministers and fifteen congregations, all in the 5 Piedmont region. The congregations of Pinerolo and Turin were established later. The number of Waldenses in Piedmont and the adjacent valleys is about 13,000. In 1898 the Waldensian College, established at Torre Pellice in 1835, was placed upon an equal footing with similar state institutions. It has about a dozen teachers and about 100 pupils. The Waldenses also maintain high schools, orphan asylums, and a hospital. Their theological school, founded at Torre Pellice in 1835, was removed to Florence in 1860. The Waldensians, by sixty years of missionary activity, have now established new congregations throughout Italy, some fifty in number, with as many more mission stations, comprehending about 6,000 communicants. The affairs of the entire Church are administered by a board of five members, elected by the synod, which meets yearly at Torre Pellice, in September. Since 1861 the mission field, with the new congregations, has been administered by an Evangelization Committee of eight members, also elected by the synod. The Church maintains elementary and Sunday schools, and employs some two dozen colporteurs for the distribution of Bibles and evangelical writings. The Evangelical Italian Church was founded at Milan, in 1870, by twenty-three separate congregations that had been formed here and 6 there independently of the Waldensian evangelization. To show clearly its separation from the papacy and the Roman hierarchy this church called itself the "Free Italian Church." [Its most eminent leader was the eloquent Gavazzi.] A general convention in 1870 adopted eight fundamental articles of faith, and the next assembly at Florence in 1871 adopted a constitution of twenty-one articles. By royal decree of July 2, 1891, this church was recognized by the Italian government as a juristic person, under the name "Evangelical Italian Church" (*Chiesa Evangelica Italiana*), the name by which it has since then been known. The affairs of the church are in the hands of an Evangelization Committee, composed of five members elected by the general convention, which meets annually at Florence. The entire church is divided into ten districts, viz., Piedmont, Liguria, Lombardy, Venice, Emilia, Tuscany, Rome, Naples, Apulia, and Sicily. These embrace, all together, some forty congregations, forty-five stations, and about 2,000 communicants. The church maintains elementary and Sunday schools, and a theological school at Florence. The church also employs a number of colporteurs for the sale of Bibles and evangelical works. In connection with the Evangelical Italian Church may be mentioned the Free Christian Church, which resembles the Plymouth Brethren. [The Evangelical Italian Church and the Free Christian Church are now for the most part allied with the Waldensians and the Methodists.] The English Wesleyans, who have been represented in Italy since 1861, have in their northern district twenty-five churches and stations, and in their southern district twenty-five churches and stations, numbering all together some 2,000 communicants. They maintain elementary 7 schools, and an orphan asylum at Intra. The Methodist Episcopal Church (of America) began missionary work in Italy in 1873. It now numbers twelve churches, forty mission stations, and about 1,500 communicants. It has day and evening schools employing upward of forty teachers, and also a theological school at Rome. The United Baptists, American and English, have been in Italy since 1870 and 1871. All together, they have eighty-one stations, some forty ministers, five colporteurs, and about 1,500 communicants. [George B. Taylor (d. at Rome in 1906) was for forty years at the head of the American Baptist Mission.] An independent missionary work is carried on by the Englishman Clarke in Spezia, Arcola, Belluno, Levanto, Marola, Pordenone, and Seren. There are English churches in Florence, Genoa, Milan, Naples, Rome, and Venice, American Protestant churches in Florence and Rome, and Scotch Presbyterian churches in Genoa, Naples, Rome, and Venice. The Germans in Italy have formed a number of congregations at various places. They , maintain schools in Florence, Genoa, Messina, Milan, Naples, Palermo, and Rome, and hospitals in Florence, Genoa, Milan, Naples, and Rome. Since 1880 the German ministers in Italy have had their annual conference. Perhaps the most flourishing Evangelical congregation in Italy is the Evangelical Military Association in Rome, which was founded by L. Capellini (d. 1898). Of other educational and charitable institutions under Evangelical control may be mentioned the high schools for girls in Florence and 8 Naples; the Anglo-American Institute at Rome; the elementary schools of Miss Carruthers at Pisa, S. Michele degli Scalzi, and Cisanello di Ghezzano; Dr. Comandi's orphan asylum for boys at Florence; the Feretti orphan asylum for girls at Florence; the Gould Institute at Rome, an educational institution for boys and girls; the work-school for women at Turin; the Boyce Memorial Home at Vallecrosia, an asylum for orphans, both boys and girls; and the Evangelical Rescue-Mission of Mrs. Hammond in Venice. There are three Bible societies working in Italy, viz., the Italian Bible Society, which was founded in Rome in 1871, the British and Foreign Bible 9 Society, and the National Bible Society of Scotland, Since 1860 the British and Foreign Bible Society has distributed in Italy more than 3,000,000 Bibles and New Testaments. The Italian Tract Society, founded at Florence in 1855, has a printing-establishment at Florence and salesrooms in a dozen Italian cities. To this tract society the entire Protestant Church in Italy is indebted for the great bulk of its polemical and educational literature. This society also publishes *L'Italia Evangelica, * an illustrated family weekly; *L'Amico dei fanciulli, * an illustrated monthly for children; and L'Amico di casa, a popular calendar (annual edition, 35,000). Of less importance is the Baptist Tract Society in Turin. Other Evangelical periodicals are *La Rivista Christiana*, a scholarly monthly; *Le Témoin,* the weekly organ of the French-speaking 10 Waldensians; *La Luce, * a Waldensian weekly; *Il Christiano, * the monthly organ of the Free Christian Church; *La Civiltà Evangelica, * a monthly published by the Wesleyans; *Il Piccolo Messaggiere, * the monthly of the Evangelical Italian Church; *L'Evangelista,* a weekly issued by the Methodists; *Il Testimonio,* a Baptist monthly; and *Il Labaro, * a monthly published by the Old Catholics. (K. RÖNNEKE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: The official Roman Catholic record is given in the annual, Gerarchia cattolica. More general works are: C. Hemans, *Catholic Italy,* 2 vols., Florence, 1861; J. H. Eager, *Romanism in its Home,* Philadelphia, 1899; A. Robertson, *The Roman Catholic Church in Italy.* London, 1903. On the Old Catholic movement in general consult: A. M. Scarth, *Story of the Old Catholic and Kindred Movements,* London, 1869; C. J. Loyson, *Catholic Reform,* ib. 1874; F. Meyrick, *The Old Catholic Movement,* ib. 1877. On Protestantism in general consult: R. Baird, *Sketches of Protestantism in Italy,* Boston, 1847; J. A. Wylie, *The Awakening of Italy,* London, 1866; H. H. Farrell, *Italy Struggling into Light,* Cincinnati, 1880; J. Stoughton, *Footprints of Italian Reformers,* London, 1881; J. W. Brown, *An Italian Campaign,* ib. 1890 (the Evangelical movement 1845-1887); E. Gebhardt, *L'Italie mystique,* Paris, 1890; A. R. Pennington, *The Church in Italy,* London, 1895; G. B. Taylor, *Italy and the Italians,* Philadelphia, 1898. On the Free Churches consult the Reports of the General Assembly, usually published under the titles Verbali della . . . Assemblea Generale della Chiese Cristiane in Italia; The Free Christian Church in Italy, Evangelization Report, Florence, 1874. For the Waldenses see the literature under WALDENSES.
ITALY, THE REFORMATION Italy, The Reformation

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### ITALY, THE REFORMATION IN. Two Periods (§ 1). Venice (§ 2). Naples (§ 3). The Inquisition in Naples (§ 4). In South and Central Italy (§ 5). The Later Period in Venice (§ 6). Italian Reformation writings (§ 7). This article is concerned with the Reformation in Italy only in its general features. Its more important 1 characters are treated in separate articles (see CARACCIOLI, GALEAZZO; CURIONE, CELIO SECUNDO; MORATA, OLIMPIA; OCHINO, BERNARDINO; PALEARIO, AONIO; RENÉE OF FRANCE; SPIERA, FRANCESCO; VALDÉS; VERGERIO, PIETRO PAOLO; VERMIGLI, PIETRO MARTIRE). The first noteworthy traces of the Reformation in Italy appear in the north, at Venice, but the culmination was reached in the south, at Naples, The first and rising period lies between 1520, when writings of the German Reformation are first known to have crossed the Alps, and 1540 or 1541, the year marking the death of Valdés, who wrought in an elect circle at Naples, as the most strongly intellectual and original of the Italian Reformers. Almost simultaneously with the breaking-up of the Evangelical circle at Naples, there set in (1542) the deliberate and systematic reaction instigated from Rome; the bull of Paul III., *Licet ab initio * (see INQUISITION II., § 1), by the terms of which the Inquisition was organized after the Spanish model, and extended over all Italy (Naples excepted), is the storm signal. With unremitting activity until about 1570, this tribunal, personally directed by the popes, utilizing the entire political influence of the Curia, accomplished its work by driving a number of the chief advocates of reform to flight, by dungeon and fire and water, and smothered the movement. What still remained in the way of Evangelical tendencies during the later years of this second period had become divested of all efforts at internal church reform and stands in deliberate, most trenchant, opposition to Rome, falling in with certain radical tendencies which manifested themselves in Germany, but particularly in the Netherlands, where the leaders of a conservative Evangelical reformation steadily resisted them with force. In Venice down to 1527 there is no evidence of repressive measures beyond repeated burning of reformatory writings of German origin; 2 but toward the close of 1530 the papal nuncio, Caraffa (later Paul IV.), interposed against the "heretics" with greater strictness, and even sentenced a Franciscan, Girolamo Galateo (b. in Venice, 1490), to death without obtaining confirmation for the act from the Senate. They kept him in prison seven years, then set him free, but in 1540 arrested him again, and, broken by his earlier sufferings, he died in the year following. His "Apology," dedicated to the Senate, printed at Bologna in 1541, outlines a noteworthy plan of internal church reform, which betrays the influence of German doctrines, and on the question of free will, the sacraments, the veneration of saints, and other points is truly Biblical. In a report which Caraffa prepared for the Curia (printed in *Rivista Cristiana, * Florence, 1878), two other leading heretics are mentioned. Bartolomeo Fonzio was a Venetian, incurred suspension from the priestly office in 1529, escaped to Germany, and was present at Augsburg in 1530. He was in correspondence with Butzer in 1531. It was probably Fonzio, despite his subsequent denial, who translated Luther's tract *An den christlichen Adel * into Italian (cf. *ZKG,* iv., 1880, pp. 467 sqq.). Later he was again active in Italy, and in 1558 was arrested in Cittadella, not far from Venice; he was sentenced to death and drowned, for forty-four "erroneous doctrines," extracted from his writings. When Caraffa prepared his report, mentioned above, in 1532, there lived also at Venice the Florentine fugitive, Antonio Bruccioli, who rendered the movement of the Reformation great service by elucidating and printing Biblical writings in the Italian language. He was under suspicion, and so continued; and notwithstanding occasional retraction, he was repeatedly brought to trial. He died in prison in 1566. As in his case, so with others, such as Fra Baldo Lupetino of Albona in Istria, and Baldassare Altieri, of Aquila in Neapolitan territory, their religious development and its sequel belong both to the first and the second period of Italian Reformation history. Meanwhile the reforming doctrine had found its real and vital center in Italy, in the circle of Juan de Valdés at Naples. The biographer of Caraffa (*Caraceioli, Vita di Papa Paolo IV.,* MS. in British Museum) with good reason declares that Naples was the"nest of heresy"; but the tradition is false that would have it that the Lutheran 3 belief was carried thither by German soldiers after the sack of Rome in 1527. From about 1536 onward a company is found there--scholars of Valdés, himself devoted to the fundamental doctrines of the German Reformation and influenced by mysticism--which includes the most important vehicles of the Italian Reformation: Bernardino Ochino, Pietro Martire Vermigli, Pietro Carnesacchi, Benedetto di Mantua (reviser of the little book "Of the Benefit of Christ's Death," probably by A. Palerio (q.v.); Eng. transl., London, reprint, 1855, also in W. M. Blackburn, *Aonio Palerio, * Philadelphia, 1866), Mario Galeata, Francesco d'Alvise of Caserta, Giovanni Bugio, Galeazzo Caraccioli, Marcantonio Flaminio, and others, who partly, it is true, never went beyond the attempt at a reform from within the Church. The central article about which all converge in the matter of doctrine is the tenet of justification by faith. Furthermore, it was immaterial to a Valdés what the external structure of the Church might be, provided it did not abridge this religious condition. He was far from intending to raise the standard of revolt against church institutions, and he was no organizer; his teachings found their way beyond the circumference whose center was marked by his ideal--pure character, illumined with profound piety--only by the accident that his writings were preserved as dear legacies by his friends. The chief service in this regard was rendered by the noblest of his pupils, Giulia Gonzaga, duchess of Traetto (see VALDÉS). Among the pupils of Valdés who did not exceed the boundary of a reform attempted from within the Church was Marcantonio Flaminio 4 of Imola, highly endowed as a poet; it was he who gave to the book "Of the Benefit of Christ's Death" the form under which, according to the testimony of Vergerio, it became circulated through the land in more than forty thousand copies, though today not a single library of Italy has one impression from that period. The first blows of the reaction, when it was introduced in 1542 through the reorganization of the Inquisition at Rome (see INQUISITION), struck the two most eminent members of the circle surrounding Valdés, Ochino and Vermigli. Ochino was suspended from the preaching office; and he escaped, by flight, a summons to appear at Rome to give an account of himself. At the same time, Vermigli, who had risen to high rank in the order of the Augustinian canons, took to flight, whence he despatched to his doctrinal associates a testimonial of evangelistic faith in the guise of his *Semplice dichiaragione sopra i dodici articoli della fede cristiana. * Presently the reaction directed its attention to a third member of the Neapolitan circle; viz., Pietro Carnesecchi (b. in Florence 1508), who had held high stations under the Curia. After he had avoided the Inquisition during a sojourn of many years abroad and in Venice, he was brought to trial by Pope Paul IV., and escaped for the time, after having been summoned twice, through the pope's death, and the destruction of the documentary charges against Carnesecchi, on occasion of the storm upon the Inquisition's building in 1559. Pius V. retrieved the matter and Carnesecchi, whose correspondence with Giulia Gonzaga formed the basis of a second trial, was executed with other "heretics" on Oct. 1, 1567. Among the victims of the Inquisition, not a few were of Neapolitan origin; and they all belonged to the very great numbers whom the viceroy's complacency delivered, year in, year out, to the Curia, though the Spanish Inquisition was not allowed to operate in the kingdom proper, and an attempt to introduce it in 1547 had been frustrated by a sanguinary insurrection of the populace. The viceroy's complacent disposition was also proved at the death of Giulia Gonzaga in 1566, when he seized her correspondence and despatched it to Rome. By his long years of superintending the Inquisition Pius V. acquired the most exact acquaintance with the situation, and he renewed and intensified the tribunal's activity so that he won the name of Fra Michele dell' Inquisizione. A storm of persecution covered all parts of Italy in the years of his pontificate (1566-1572). Concerning the victims only defective information remains, but it put an end to the reforming movement. With reference to the additional victims apprehended in the south, some information is given in Luigi Amabile's *Il santo offizio della 5 inquisizione in Napoli* (2 vols., Città di Castello, 1892). Nothing short of wholesale murder was perpetrated in that quarter in 1560 and 1561 upon the Evangelical inhabitants of San Sisto and La Guardia. Moreover, the Holy Office's barge plied regularly back and forth between Naples and Ostia, incessantly bringing new "suspects" before the tribunal. The numbers of emigrants--or rather fugitives--for the faith from Sicily and the kingdom continually increased--so far, at least, as this item can be checked at Geneva, where many sought refuge (cf. J. Galiffe, *Le Refuge italien de Geneve,* Geneva, 1881). For southern and central Italy, some acceptable information is furnished by a protocol-book of the Roman Inquisition for the years 1564--67, which contains the sentences decreed against heretics during that period (cf. *Revista Cristiana, * 1879-80). How matters looked and fared in the Roman Inquisition's prison is reported by the younger Camerarius, who was himself under arrest there, in 1565, whose *Relatio vera * was printed by J. G. Sehelhorn (*De vita, fatis ac meritis Philippi Camerarii,* Nuremburg, 1749). Camerarius was confined in the upper story, "where one is in the bakeoven; others were below, "in so damp a hole that it is past understanding how men can exist in that grave." Frequently monks carne in to make attempts at conversion, Dominicans for the most part, once Petrus Canisius, the Jesuit. Among their fellow captives were spies. Camerarius and his fellow countryman Peter Rieter, were liberated through the rigorous intercession of Emperor Maximilian II., to whom appeal had been made. On June 23 1566, there was "public abjuration" of twenty-three who were under charge, who, for the most part, had been sentenced to perpetual confinement, or to the rigor of the galleys. After that, sentence was pronounced upon the Neapolitan nobleman, Pompeo de' Monti, who was beheaded near the bridge of Sant' Angelo, on July 4, 1566. Still other victims who were executed in Rome are named in the roll of Italian Reformation martyrs; three of them so early as under Julius III., Fanino of Faenza, Domenico of Bassano, and the Augustinian Giuliano; later, two others, Giovanni Buzio (also named Mollio), of Montalcino, and an unknown of Perugia; under Paul IV., the noble youth Pomponio Algieri of Nola was burned, and how many at that time were still confronted with a similar fate may be inferred from the fact that on the death of this pope in 1559, when the people's rage broke open the prison doors, no fewer than seventy heretics were set free. Better information exists as to what occurred from the beginning of the energetic reaction at Venice and in its dominion, than with 6 reference to events and the scope of repression in southern and central Italy. At Venice, the outcome of the movement was connected with the general political situation, and the senate, from the time of the downfall of the Protestant party in Germany through the Schmalkald War, waived whatever considerations it had previously conceded to their wishes, and showed itself much more amenable to the Curia than was formerly the case. Meantime a new religious movement had sprung up in Venice. In 1550, Julius III. affirmed that 1,000 Venetians might be counted as belonging to the Anabaptist sect. A new group thus comes to the light, inasmuch as the earlier advocates of the Reformation belonged not to the radical, but to the conservative Reformation, as espoused by Luther. Both currents are in collateral progress from the middle of the century, and both command eminent names; but the attitude of mutual antagonism on the part of their champions contributed even more than the brute force of their common foe to nullify the movement itself. Among advocates of the conservative Reformation are to be named men such as Pietro Speziali (in Cittadella) and Francesco Spiera (q.v.). Now, too, the previously mentioned Fra Baldo Lupetino was seized by his fate; and only for a little while longer could Baldassare Altieri of Aquila, who had been in correspondence with Luther, Bullinger, and others, still work in the wake of the Schmalkald party's defeat after he was compelled to leave Venice in 1549. A transition to the steadily growing Anabaptist party is afforded by Francesco Negri of Bassano; in a measure, as well, by Celio Secondo Curione, The proper father, however, of the Italian Anabaptists was Camillo of Sicily, who, after his conversion, styled himself "Renato." His system is quite spiritualistic; whoever is elected receives the "spirit"; the children of the "spirit" merely slumber in death, to enter upon a higher form of being thereafter; the rest fall away to destruction, The sacraments are only emblems; Christ is above all a divinely favored man; and more of the same sort. Their theological foundations were fixed in a was public abjuration " who were under charge, who, for "council," organized, by sixty of their representatives, at Venice in 1550; though not, indeed, without the separation of a more moderate from the radical faction, so that henceforth there are three distinct groups, instead of two, as previously, of Protestantism in Italy. In the subsequent fate of the Anabaptist congregations, which became closely affiliated with the center of the moderate Anabaptist cause at Nikolsburg in Moravia, two brilliant martyr names are encountered in the period when the storm began to rage: Giulio Gherlandi and Francesco dells Saga, who fell a sacrifice to the Venetian Inquisition in 1565. Among advocates of the Reformation in Venetian territory may lastly be named Bishop Pier Paolo Vergerio, because, according to his own acknowledgment, the truth of the Gospel indelibly impressed itself upon him at Padua, by the sick-bed of the unfortunate Spiera; and because the Inquisition at Venice subjected him to a tedious course of trial. This disputatious battler wielded an inexhaustible store of fresh weapons against the Roman Church out of the armory of his own experience and exact knowledge of the hierarchy; although he did not equal the men of the first generation in disinterested devotion to truth, in courage and joy of sacrifice. Neither can his writings be justly compared with the other products of the movement, as some of them are revealed in the *Biblioteca della Riforma Italiana* (6 vols., Florence, 1881-86). Among the writings of the Italian Reformation, besides the invaluable yield of Juan de Valdés, the previously cited little book "Of the 7 Benefit of Christ's Death" fills an honorable place. There may also be mentioned the fact that the *Sommario della Sacra Scrittura * was no less effective, although it was not Italian originally, but a recast Middle Low German (Dutch) work, dating from the decade 1520-30. A collection of the literature of the Reformation in Italy after the plan followed by E. Böhmer for the Spanish Reformation in the *Bibliotheca Wiffeniana* is much to be desired. Rich contributions toward the project would be supplied by the serial volumes of *Rivista Cristiana * from 1873; and a considerable portion of the original issues are to be found collected in the library accumulated by Count Piero Guicciardini, and made over to the national library of Florence. Long forgotten and concealed, hardly discoverable in their own country, these writings bear witness to the high mental significance of that minority which once existed in the land of the popes and fought under the banner of reform. K. BENRATH. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The best guide to the sources is K. Benrath, *Ueber die Quellen der italienischen Reformationsgeschichte, * Bonn, 1876; idem, in *ZKG, * i. 613-626, iv. 394-413. *Rivista cristiana, * a periodical published in Florence, 1873 sqq., contains much material of the first importance. Instructive hints as to sources are given in F. H. Reusch, *Der Index der verbotener Bücher,* i. 373 sqq., Bonn, 1883. Consult further: J. Bonnet, *Vie de Olympia Morata, * Paris, 1850, new ed., 1862, Eng. transl., London, 1852; idem, *Aonio Paleario, * Paris, 1862, Eng. transl., London, 1864; idem, *Récits du xvi. siècle, *Paris, 1864; idem, *Nouveaux* and *Derniers Récits, * ib. 1876; idem, many contributions to *Bulletin du protestantisme francaise;* D. Erdmann, *Die Reformation und ihre Märtyrer in Italien, * Berlin, 1855; J. Stoughton, *Footprints of Italian Reformers, * London, 1881; K. Benrath, *Geschichte der Reformation in Venedig,* Halle, 1887; idem, *Bernardino Ochiuo von Siena, * ib. 1892; B. Fontana, *Renata . . . di Ferrara, * 3 vols., Rome, 1889-1899; A. R. Pennington, *The Church in Italy, * London, 1895; E. Comba, * I nostri protestanti,* vol. ii., Florence (unfinished, deals only with Venice); A. Agostini, *Pietro Carnesecchi e il movimento Waldesiano, * ib. 1899; *Cambridge Modern History,* vol. ii., *The Reformation,* pp. 578-599, New York, 1904; E. H. Walshe, *Under the Inquisition; The Reformation in Italy, * London, 1904; C. Dejob, *La Foi religieuse en Italie au xiv. siècle, * Paris, 1906; C. von Klenze, *The Interpretation of Italy, * Chicago, 1907; and the literature under the articles on the Reformers named in the text.
ITACIUS CLARUS Ithacius Clarus

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ITHACIUS CLARUS.** See PRISCILLIAN, PRISCILLIANISTS.
ITUREA Iturea

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**ITUREA:** A region named in Luke iii. 1. The name of a people, "the Itureans," is older than "Iturea" as the name of a region, and is to be connected with the Jetur of Gen. xxv. 15, a son of Ishmael denoting a nomadic stock of the Syro-Arabian desert, whose home, according to the Genesis passage, was in the neighborhood of Teima on the western border of Najd, between Medina and the oasis of Jauf. I Chron. v. 18-22 tells of a victorious campaign of the Hebrews of the East-Jordan land against Jetur and other nomads in pre-exilic times, which shows that Jetur must have changed its place of abode to the neighborhood of the Jabbok; but the mention in Luke iii. 1 can have nothing to do with this passage. Aristobulus I. (105-104 B.C.) fought the Itureans and annexed part of their territory (Josephus, *Ant.* XIII., xi. 3), and Strabo (XVI., ii. 10, 18) in Roman times locates them on the plain of Massyas (Marsyas) between Laodicea and Chalcis, i.e., in C?le-Syria (q.v.), and he is corroborated by an inscription of Quirinius (Mommsen in *Ephemeris epigraphica,* iv. 537-542, Berlin, 1881). It is to be concluded therefore that Jetur and the Itureans are the same stock, and that they came north with the migrations of the Arab tribes, settled down, and adopted the manners of the people of the region. Iturea as the name of a region is connected with this last phase of the people's history: The first ruler of whom mention is made is Ptolemy, son of Menneus, who reigned 85-40 B.C., and had a kingdom of considerable size, including some cities on the coast, and the region about the sources of the Jordan as far east as the neighborhood of Damascus (Josephus, *Ant.* XIII., xvi. 3). This Ptolemy paid Pompey 1,000 talents in order to make his rule secure with the Romans (Josephus, *Ant.* XIV., iii. 2), and he protected the last of the Hasmoneans. His son Lysanias is called king of the Itureans by Dio Cassius, and was executed by order of Antony, 36 B.C. (Josephus, *Ant.* XV., iv. 1). Later there were only remnants of the great Iturean kingdom, with Chalcis as the capital, one of which was Abilene, ruled by the tetrarch Lysanias (Luke iii. 1); another was the region of Soëmus, north of Heliopolis; still another was the region of Chalcis, given by Claudius to Herod, grandson of Herod the Great; and finally the territory of Zenodorus, which came into the possession of Herod the Great (Josephus, *Ant.* XV., x. 1). After the death of Herod, Augustus joined a portion of the territory of Zenodorus to the territory of the tetrarch Philip (4 B.C.-34 A.D.), that part which included Batanea, Trachonitis, and Auranitis; thus Philip ruled a part of the Iturean territory, a fact which partly justifies the statement in Luke iii. 1. (H. GUTHE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: G. A. Smith, *Historical Geography of the Holy Land,* pp. 544 sqq., London, 1897; F. Münter, *De rebus Ituraeorum, * Copenhagen, 1824; M. Krenkel, *Josephus und Lukas,* pp. 90-95, Leipsic, 1894; Schürer, *Geschichte,* i. 707-725, Eng. transl., I., ii. 325-344; *DB,* ii. 521-522; *EB,* ii. 2296-2297.
IVERACH, JAMES Iverach, James

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IVERACH,** iv'er-ah, **JAMES:** United Free Presbyterian Church, Scotland; b. in Caithness June 1, 1839. He was educated at the University of Edinburgh (1859-63) and New College, Edinburgh (1863-67), and was ordained to the ministry in 1869. He held pastorates at West Calder, Edinburgh (1869-74), and Ferryhill, Aberdeen (1874-1887); was professor of apologetics and dogmatics in United Free Church College, Aberdeen (1887-1907), and principal (1905-07); and has been professor of New-Testament language and literature (since 1907). He has written *Life of Moses * (London, 1881); *Is God Knowable? * (1884); *St. Paul, his Life and Times * (1890); *Christianity and Evolution * (1894); *The Truth of Christianity * (1895); *Theism, in the Light of Present Science and Philosophy * (1900); *Descartes, Spinoza, and the New Philosophy * (1904); and *Other Side of Greatness, and Other Sermons * (1906).
IVES, LEVE SILLIMAN Ives, Levi Silliman

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IVES,** aivz, **LEVI SILLIMAN:** Roman Catholic; b. at Meriden, Conn., Sept. 16, 1797; d. in New York Oct. 13, 1867. He served for about a year in the War of 1812 and subsequently studied at Hamilton College. He was originally a Presbyterian, but joined the Protestant Episcopal Church in 1819. After taking orders in 1822, he held charges at Batavia, N. Y., Philadelphia, and Lancaster, Pa., and in New York, till 1831, when he became bishop of North Carolina. He displayed great zeal and ability in the religious education of the slaves, but his Tractarian views brought him into serious difficulties. While in Rome in 1852 he formally submitted to the pope and became a Roman Catholic. The following October he was solemnly deposed from his episcopal office. On his return to New York he became professor of rhetoric in St. Joseph's Seminary, Yonkers, N. Y., also lecturer on English literature and rhetoric in the Convent of the Sacred Heart. He was prominent in the charitable work of the Roman Catholic Church. He published *New Manual of Private Devotions* (New York, 1831); *The Apostles' Doctrine and Fellowship: Five Sermons * (1844); *On the Obedience of Faith * (1849); and *The Trials of a Mind in its Progress to Catholicism * (Boston, 1853, London, 1854). BIBLIOGRAPHY: W. S. Perry, *The Episcopate in America,* p. 57, New York, 1895.
IVIMEY, JOSEPH Ivimey, Joseph

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IVIMEY, JOSEPH:** English Baptist historian; b. at Ringwood (17 m. w.s.w. of Southampton) May 22, 1773; d. in London Feb. 8, 1834. In early life he followed his father's trade, that of a tailor, at Lymington and Portsea; became a church-member in 1790, an itinerant minister in 1794, assistant minister at Wallingford, Berkshire, in 1803; and pastor of the Baptist church in Eagle Street, Holborn, London, in 1805. He was a pronounced opponent of Roman Catholicism, and so denounced the repeal of the Test and Corporation Acts; he was also interested in the abolition of slavery and in missionary operations. His chief significance is as historian of his denomination, by his *History of the English Baptists * (4 vols., London, 1834), which, however, is criticized as to be used with caution on account of its mistakes. He wrote on other subjects quite voluminously, his works including *Brief Sketch of the History of Dissenters * (1810), and *John Milton, his Life and Times * (1833). BIBLIOGRAPHY: G. Pritchard, *Memoir of the Life and Writings of . . . Joseph Ivimey, * London, 1835; *DNB,* xxix. 81-82.
IVO, OF CHARTRES (IVO OR YVO CARNOTENSIS Ivo, of Chartres (Ivo or Yvo Carnotensis)

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**IVO,** î"vo', **OF CHARTRES (IVO or YVO CARNOTENSIS):** Bishop of Chartres (47 m. s.w. of Paris); b. in the district of Beauvais c. 1040; d. Dec. 23, 1116. He studied under Lanfranc at Bec, became a canon at Nesle in Picardy, then provost of the abbey of St. Quentin in Beauvais c. 1078, and bishop of Chartres in 1090. As the bishop before him had been deposed for simony, and commanded some support, Ivo's election was contested; but his cause was espoused by Pope Urban II., who had given him consecration. The same pope protected him when subjected to arrest by King Philip I. of France, because Ivo had not acquiesced in the repudiation of Queen Bertha, and the king's liaison with Countess Bertrada of Anjou. In the investiture strife (see INVESTITURE), Ivo took a stand of sagacious mediation between the rights of the State and the Church (cf. his *Epist. ad Hugonem archiepiscopum Lugdunensem * in *MGH, Lib. de lite,* ii., 1893, pp. 642, 649, and his letter of 1106 to Pope Paschal II. in *MPL,* clxii. 19). When subsequently Paschal II. was sharply attacked for his attitude to Emperor Henry V., in the year 1111, Ivo vindicated him, and frustrated the design of Archbishop Joscerannus of Lyons, who aimed to have Paschal's concessions to Henry adjudged heretical by means of a great French council (*MGH,* ut sup., pp. 649 sqq.). Ivo was highly esteemed in France, and was also on friendly terms with Anselm of Canterbury. The date of his canonization is uncertain; his day is May 20. The most important among Ivo's writings are his collections of canons, wherein he anticipated Gratian, the *Collectio tripartita, * the *Decretum, * and the *Panormia. * Both as reflecting his own life and as bearing upon the history of his time, his letters are of weight; and there are also twenty-four of his sermons preserved, some of which are detailed treatises on dogmatic and liturgical questions. He also wrote against Berengar of Tours. Certain historical works of his friend, Hugo of Fleury, have been attributed to him erroneously. CARL MIRBT. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The works, first printed Paris, 1647, are reprinted with a life in *MPL,* clxi.-clxii. Consult: A. Abry, *Yves de Chartres, sa vie et ses ouvrages, * Strasburg, 1841; F. Ritzke, *De Ivone, episcopo Carnotensi, * Wratislaw, 1863; J. Dombrowski, *Ivo, Bischof von Chartres, sein Leben und Wirken, * Breslau, 1881; A. Sieber, *Bischof Ivo von Chartres, * Königsberg, 1895; R. von Scherer, *Handbuch des Kirchenrechts,* vol. i., 53, Graz, 1886; C. Mirbt, *Die Publizistik im Zeitalter Gregors VII.,* pp. 512 sqq., Leipsic, 1894; F. Fournier, *Les Collections canoniques attribuées à Yves de Chartres, * in *Bibliothèque de l'école des Chartres,* vols. lvii.-lviii., 1896-97; idem, *Yves de Chartres et le droit canonique, * in *Revue des questions historiques,* lxvii., 1898; Hauck, *KD,* iii. 862, 904, 914; and literature indicated in Richardson, *Encyclopædia,* p. 515.
J J

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**J:** The symbol employed to designate the Jehovistic (Yahwistic, Judean) document which, according to the critical school, is one of the components of the Hexateuch (q.v.). See HEBREW LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, II., § 4.
JABAL Jabal

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JABAL.** See CAIN, KENITES.
JABIN Jabin

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JABIN,** jê'bin: A Canaanitic king who appears in two narratives in the Old Testament (Josh. xi. 1-15, and Judges iv. 1 sqq.). In the first he appears as overlord of the Canaanitic kings of the region of Mt. Naphtali, with his capital at Hazor, and as conquered by Joshua at the "waters of Merom." This narrative purports to give the account of the conquest of northern Canaan as Josh. x. to give that of the south. In Judges iv. the history of Jabin is peculiarly bound up with that of Sisera in the narrative of Deborah and Barak's campaign. Verses 2 and 7 make Sisera Jabin's general, though in the song in chap. v. Sisera is king and in command of kings. Similarly in iv. 12-22 Sisera is the chief personage, while Jabin hardly appears, verse 17b being an editorial addition, so that the narrative concerning Sisera is in chap. iv. the basis of the story. Two hypotheses have been held concerning this Jabin: that the two accounts refer to different persons, and that they refer to the same person. Judges iv. still retains a trace of the correct tradition that after the time of Joshua a war was conducted against Jabin, king of Hazor. (H. GUTHE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Besides H. Guthe, *Geschichte des Volkes Israel*, pp 51-52, Freiburg, 1899; *DB*, ii. 524; *EB*, ii. 2302-03, 2636-37; and C. F. Kent, *Student's Old Testament*, vol. i., 1904, the commentaries on Joshua and Judges should be consulted, particularly those on Judges by Budde and Moore, and the works on the history of Israel, especially those of Ewald, Kittel, and Wellhausen.
JABLONSKI, DANIEL ERNST Jablonski, Daniel Ernst

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JABLONSKI,** ya-blon'skî, **DANIEL ERNST:** Bishop of the Moravians; b. at Nassenhuben, near Danzig, Nov. 20, 1660; d. at Berlin May 25, 1741. He was educated at the gymnasium of Lissa and studied theology at Frankfort-on-the-Oder and at Oxford. In 1683 he was appointed Reformed preacher in Magdeburg, and in 1686 became pastor of the Polish congregation and rector of the gymnasium at Lissa. In 1691 he went to Prussia and became court preacher at Königsberg; but he always remained faithful to the Moravians in their exile and used his political influence to assist them in every way. At the synod of Lissa in 1699 he was chosen senior of the Unity and received their episcopal ordination. In 1737 he consecrated Count Zinzendorf bishop, and thus he formed the transition from the old stock of the Moravian Brethren to the younger branch of the Herrnhuters. His influence upon the development of the Prussian state is still more important. Since Sigismund of Brandenburg had adopted the Reformed creed (1613; see SIGISMUND, JOHANN), a union of the evangelical denominations had become a necessity for the Hohenzollerns, and Jablonski was the man to give this tendency a concrete form and a theological basis. Similar efforts were made at the court of Hanover by Leibnitz and by Molanus (qq.v.). Anthony Ulrich of Brunswick and the court of Gotha also sympathized with these unionistic movements. In the meantime Jablonski had become court preacher at Berlin (1697), and as Brandenburg was being transformed about this time into the state of Prussia, he considered it his mission to unite all Protestants under the leadership of Prussia. He entered into negotiations with Leibnitz and Molanus, but the undertaking failed on account of the opposition of the clergy. Another ideal which Jablonski tried to realize was the introduction of the episcopate into the Evangelical Church, which met a response in King Frederick's appointment of his court preacher's bishops. But failure resulted in 1713 when Frederick William I. ascended the throne. Against the demoralization of church life Jablonski attempted to introduce ethical societies after the model of the English societies for the reformation of manners. The Berlin Academy of Sciences owes its existence to his advocacy with that of Leibnitz. Jablonski was its first vice-president and director of the philologico-historical class, and in 1733 he became its president. His literary activity was not less important. He made a careful edition of the Old-Testament text which J. H. Michaelis adopted as the basis of his well-known *Kommentarbibel* (1720); at Jablonski's instigation the Berlin edition of the Babylonian Talmud was printed. He translated Bentley's *Confutation of Atheism * into Latin (Berlin, 1696); his *Historia consensus Sendomiriensis* (Berlin, 1731) is important in the sphere of church history, likewise his *Jura et libertates dissidentium in regno Poloniae *(1708). (P. KLEINERT.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. E. Kapp, *Sammlung vertrauter Briefe des Freiherrn von Leibnitz und Hofpredigers Jablonski, * Leipsic, 1747; C. W. Hering, *Geschichte der kirchliche Unionsversuche*, ii, 313 sqq, ib.1838; G. E. Guhrauer, *G. W. Freiherr von Leibnitz, ii. * 177 sqq, Breslau, 1846; A. L. Richter, *Geschichte der evangelischen Kirchenverfassung in Deutschland, * Leipsic, 1851; F. Brandes, *Geschichte der kirchlichen Politik des Hauses Brandenburg, vol. i., *Gotha, 1872; A. Ritschl, *Geschichte des Pietismus, iii. *302 sqq., Bonn, 1886; J. Kvacala, *Fünfzig Jahre im preussischen Hofpredigerdienste, * Dorpat, 1896; idem, *Neue Beiträge zum Briefwechsel zwischen D. E. Jablonski und G. W. Leibnitz,* ib. 1899.
JACKSON, FREDERICK JOHN FOAKES Jackson, Frederick John Foakes

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACKSON, FREDERICK JOHN FOAKES:** Church of England; b. at Ipswich (18 m. s.e. of Bury St. Edmunds), Suffolk, Aug. 10, 1855. He was educated at Eton and at Trinity College, Cambridge (B.A., 1879), and was curate of Ottershaw, Winchester (1879-81), St. Giles, Cambridge (1882-84), and St. Botolph's, Cambridge (1884-91). He was appointed lecturer on divinity in Jesus College, Cambridge, was elected fellow in 1886, and made dean in 1895 and tutor in the following year. Since 1897 he has been examining chaplain to the bishop of Peterborough, since 1901 honorary canon of Peterborough cathedral, and was Hulsean lecturer in 1902. Theologically he is an orthodox member of the Church of England, and heartily accepts her dogmatic teachings. He has written *History of the Christian Church * (London, 1891); *Biblical History of the Hebrews * (Cambridge, 1903); and *Christian Difficulties in the Second and Twentieth Centuries *(Hulsean lectures for 1902; London, 1903).
JACKSON, GEORGE ANSON Jackson, George Anson

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACKSON, GEORGE ANSON: ** Congregationalist; b. at North Adams, Mass., Mar. 17, 1846; d. at Swampscott, Mass., May 8, 1907. He was graduated from Yale (Ph.B., 1868) and Andover Theological Seminary (1871); was pastor at Leavenworth, Kan. (1871-73), Southbridge, Mass. (1873-78), and Swampscott, Mass. (1878-97), and librarian of the General Theological Library, Boston, after 1897. He wrote: *The Christian Faith *(Boston, 1875); *The Apostolic Fathers *(New York, 1879); *Fathers of the Third Century *(1881); Post-Nicene *Greek Fathers *(1883); and *Post-Nicene Latin Fathers *(1883).
JACKSON, THOMAS Jackson, Thomas

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACKSON, THOMAS:** The name of two English theologians. **1.** Church of England divine; b. at Witton-on-the-Wear (10 m. s.w. of Durham) Dec. 21, 1579; d. Sept. 21, 1640. He studied at Queen's and at Corpus Christi College, Oxford (B.A., 1599; M.A., 1603; B.D., 1610; D.D., 1622), where he was made probationer fellow in 1606 and subsequently repeatedly elected vice-president of Corpus Christi. At Oxford he won a reputation for his theological learning and delivered weekly lectures on theology both at Corpus Christi and at Pembroke. In 1623 he was instituted to the living of St. Nicholas, Newcastle-on-Tyne, and in 1625 he was presented to the living of Winston, Durham, which he held with Newcastle. About the same time he was made a royal chaplain. In 1630 he became president of Corpus Christi, a post which he filled till his death. In 1632 he was presented to the crown living of Witney, Oxfordshire, which he resigned in 1637. He became prebendary of Winchester in 1635, and dean of Peterborough in 1639. He was originally a Calvinist of Puritan leanings, but later became an Arminian. He ranks high as a theologian, and his theology has particularly commended itself to modern High-churchmen. His great work was his *Commentaries on the Apostles' Creed * (12 bks., London, 1613-57), of which books ten and eleven were edited by Barnabas Oley. Book twelve first appeared in complete form in Jackson's *Works * (3 vols., 1672-73). Jackson also published three collections of sermons, *Nazareth and Bethlehem * (Oxford, 1617); *Christ's Answer unto John's Question * (London, 1625); and *Diverse Sermons * (Oxford, 1637). His *Theological Works, * with the Life of Jackson by Edmund Vaughan, have been reprinted at Oxford (12 vols., 1844). BIBLIOGRAPHY: A. à Wood, Athenae Oxonienses, ed. P. Bliss, ii. 664, and *Fasti,* i. 281, 299, 339, 401, 4 vols., London 1813-20; *DNB,* xxix. 107-108 (where notices of scattered references are given). **2.** English Wesleyan; b. at Sancton, near Market Weighton (18 m. e.s.e. of York), Yorkshire, Dec. 12, 1783; d. at Shepherd's Bush, London, Mar. 10, 1873. He joined the Methodist Society in 1801, his education having been attained through reading. From 1804 till 1824 he was an itinerant in the Wesleyan connection, occupying important circuits. He was editor of the connectional magazines, 1824-42, and professor of divinity in the Theological College at Richmond, Surrey, 1842-61. His more important works are: *The Life of John Goodwin * (London, 1822); *Memoirs of the Life and Writings of the Rev. Richard Watson * (1834); *The Centenary of Wesleyan Methodism * (1839); *The Life of the Rev. Charles Wesley * (2 vols., 1841); *The Life of the Rev. Robert Newton * (1855); *The Institutions of Christianity* (1868); and *Recollections of My Own Life and Times* (ed. B. Frankland, 1873). Jackson also edited numerous works, including *The Works of the Rev. John Wesley * (14 vols., 1829-31); *A Library of Christian Biography * (12 vols., 1837-40); *The Lives of the Early Methodist Preachers * (3 vols., 1837-1838; 3d ed., 6 vols., 1865-66); *Anthony Farindon's Sermons * (4 vols., 1849); and *The Journal of the Rev. Charles Wesley * (2 vols., 1849). BIBLIOGRAPHY: Consult, besides the *Recollections, * ut sup., *DNB,* xxix. 108-109.
JACOB (OR ISRAEL), THE PATRIARCH Jacob (or Israel), the Patriarch

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JACOB (or ISRAEL), THE PATRIARCH. The Names and Their Meaning (§ 1). Jacob's Youth (§ 2). His Life in Haran (§ 3). His Later Life (§ 4). Characteristics of the Sources (§ 5). Jacob's Character (§ 6). Historicity of the Narratives (§ 7). ### 1. The Names and Their Meaning. Jacob, or Israel, the son of Isaac, was the ancestor who gave his name to the covenant people. Jacob means " one who holds the heel " or "one who treads on the heel" ( Gen. xxv. 26), and is also explained as "one who overreaches" (cf. Jer. ix. 4) by means of his practised cunning ( Gen. xxvii. 36). Israel, on the other hand, which became the designation of the people, was given him by God as a special distinction after he had proved his courage and gained a victory ( Gen. xxxii. 28). Jacob is probably an abbreviation of Jacob-el, for, among the Palestinian towns captured by Thothmes III. and mentioned in his inscriptions at Karnak, names appear which may be recognized as *Ya'kobh-el * and *Yoseph-el, * a conclusion all the more probable since the name *Ya'kubh-ilu * appears in Babylonian contract-tablets. The inference usually drawn from this inscription that in the sixteenth century the Jacob or Joseph tribes were already established in Canaan is over-hasty, since the analogy of the other names indicates rather that communities are meant. Bäthgen explains Jacob-el as "El recompenses"; an alternative is "El wrestles" ( Gen. xxxii. 24 sqq.). ### 2. Jacob's Youth. Jacob's youth was one untiring effort to secure for himself the birthright which belonged to his twin-brother Esau. This struggle had even a prenatal origin (Gen. xxv. 22-23). In contrast with the coarse and violent Esau, Jacob was quiet and peaceable (Gen. xxv. 27), but shrewd, and able to use cleverly the weaknesses of his more sensuous brother (verse 29). In this he was aided by his mother, while the hunter found favor in the eyes of his father. Isaac; deceived by his wife, unwittingly bestowed the blessings of birthright upon Jacob (Gen. xxvii.; see ISAAC), who in consequence was forced to abandon for a time the land of promise, and transferred his abode to Haran, the native land of his mother. In the course of his wanderings Jacob came to Bethel, where Yahweh appeared to him in a dream. ### 3. His Life in Haran. The second period of Jacob's life was passed with his kindred in Haran, where he founded his house. He asked of Laban as a reward for seven years' labor the hand of his beautiful daughter, Rachel; but her sister Leah was substituted by the mercenary father, and Jacob was forced to serve seven years longer to gain his beloved Rachel. The latter, however, was unfruitful, while Leah brought him four sons: Reuben , Simeon, Levi, and Judah. As a result of a substitution of slaves for their mistresses, Jacob's family was further increased by four sons, Dan, Naphtali, Gad, and Asher. These were followed by two sons of Leah, Issachar and Zebulun. At last Rachel bore her husband's favorite son, Joseph. As God's blessing seemed to be attached to Jacob's person, Laban was loath to lose his services; to his own disadvantage, however, for although the recompense which Jacob required might seem small, it always turned out to be unexpectedly large, and though Laban frequently changed the conditions (Gen. xxxi. 7), the advantage was always with Jacob. The tense relations between them hastened Jacob's secret departure with his wives and goods. Laban pursued and overtook him at the mount of Gilead, but, although embittered by the loss of his household gods, which Rachel had carried off without husband's knowledge, he was forced to settle the strife amicably. The name Gilead (explained as *Gal'edh, * "hill of witness," Gen. xxxi. 48) was from this time a reminder of the treaty thus concluded. ### 4. His Later Life. A third phase of Jacob's history began with his reentrance into the promised land and his settlement in the heart of the country. But first an understanding with Esau was necessary, and then to take possession of the disputed heritage, for which a severe struggle was required. Jacob succeeded by the help of spiritual powers (Gen. xxxii. 24 sqq.). After such a victory no human being could do him harm. The dreaded Esau received him kindly and retired again to the desert land of the Edomites, while Jacob established himself in Shechem, with whose inhabitants, however, his sons became involved in bloody quarrels. This induced Jacob to depart at first toward Bethel, where he made drink-offerings, according to his vow, where also the Lord appeared to him and gave him the covenant blessings. On their further journey, the last stage of which was Hebron, Rachel bore Benjamin and died in giving him birth. In Hebron Isaac, who died at an advanced age, was buried by Jacob and Esau. After residing for some time in Hebron, while his sons, with their flocks, wandered through the land north of Shechem, Jacob, in his old age, transferred his abode to Egypt, where his son Joseph (q.v.) had attained great honors. In Beersheba the patriarch received a last favorable message from his God ( Gen. xlvi. 1 sqq.). In Egypt he was received with favor by the Pharaoh, and lived in Goshen (according to Gen. xlvii. 28, P) for seventeen years, dying at the age of 147. He was embalmed after the Egyptian method, and brought to the family tomb and buried there by his children. ### 5. Characteristics of the Sources. The three sources, J, E, and P, appear in the part of Genesis which contains the Jacob narratives, to which P contributed the least. J and E do not always easily separate, since they followed practically the same traditions; but in J the cunning of Jacob seems the motive of action, while in E miraculous interpositions and appearances in dreams are more common. In JE the hatred of Esau because of his exclusion from his father's blessing is given as the cause of Jacob's emigration to Haran; in P the reason assigned is dissatisfaction on the part of his parents with the Hittite marriages of Esau (xxvii. 46-xxviii. 9). The two blessings, xxvii. 27 sqq. (JE) and xxviii. 3 (P), are independent, as are the accounts of Esau's departure to Seir, xxxvi. 6-7 (P) and xxxii. 3 sqq. (JE), and of the time of the change of name, xxxii. 28 (J) and xxxv. 10 (P). These divergences show that independent traditions were transmitted which are followed by the different sources. The chronology of Jacob's life, derived mostly from P, offers some difficulties. Thus, if from the 130 years of xlvii. 9 (Jacob's age when presented to Pharaoh) be deducted the seven fruitful and two unfruitful years, the thirty years of Joseph when the fruitful years began (xli. 46) and the fourteen years passed by Jacob in Haran before Joseph's birth, it would appear that when he left his father's house he was about seventy-seven years of age, though chaps. xxviii. sqq. evidently regard him as a young man. The three elements of the patriarchal blessing in xlviii.-xlix. combine supplementary details: xlvii. 3-6 is assigned to P, xlviii. 15-16, 20-22 to E, and xlix. to J. The post-Mosaic authorship assigned to xlix. (time of Samson by Bleek and Ewald, time of David by Knobel, much later than this by Stade) does not take account of the way in which the Levites are treated. ### 6. Jacob's Character. Jacob's character is best illustrated by his double name. He is called Jacob because of his dexterity and cunning, which always give him the advantage over the physically stronger Esau and over the shrewd Laban. On account of his weakness and his subordinate position Jacob accommodates himself to the will of the stronger, yet always succeeds in attaining his end by courage and tenacity. However much dissimulation there was in his conduct, Jacob did not employ it for sordid gain. As Israel he strives for the blessing of God because he has recognized therein the highest good. He devotes his whole energy to obtaining the blessings of the covenant (Hos. xii. 4-5). It is true that Jacob's character does not show the comparative straightforwardness of Abraham, and therefore he can not be regarded as a model for all time. He is not an ideal, even according to the standard of Israelitic ethics, but a man whose sinful nature struggles against his better self; but he was purified by the suffering which made his life a sadder one than that of his forefathers (xlvii. 9). What raises Jacob above himself is his reverent, indestructible longing for the salvation of his God, which after long struggles attains complete satisfaction. ### 7. Historicity of the Narratives. Whether, and in what sense, Jacob is historical may be a subject of debate. The simplicity and the unconventional sincerity of these recitals speak in favor of genuine tradition rather than of heroic poetry. Some of the alleged facts would surely never have been invented in later times, as, for example, the contemporaneous marriage with two sisters (cf. Rev. xviii. 18), or the distinction awarded to Bethel and the sanctuary there which was such an object of aversion to the prophets of the eighth century. The attempt to derive the history of Jacob from nature-myths has proved a total failure. While, in general, only the episode on the Jabbok (Gen. xxxii.) is looked upon as a possible survival of this nature, Popper has undertaken to show that Jacob-Israel is the Asiatic Herakles-Melcarth Palaemon, i.e., the victoriously striving sun-god, and has vainly endeavored to bring all the details of the Biblical narrative into accord with this myth. More probable is the hypothesis of an eponymous ancestor. In this way Ewald saw in Jacob a vigorous Hebrew people which had emigrated from Mesopotamia (cf. ARAM, ARAMEANS; Deut. xxvi. 5, R.V., margin), coalesced with those of the same race who had settled in Canaan at an earlier period, and then proceeded to dominate them, while elements of common ancestry (Esau), which had entered Canaan at an earlier period, gradually withdrew farther and farther toward the south. With the Aramean neighbors to the north, behind the mountains of Gilead (Laban), the tribe of Jacob had many clashes, which are described in the history of Laban. Stade considers that Israel was a tribe which lived on the Jabbok, and that their chief city was Mahanaim; Jacob, on the other hand, was a tribe of the country west of the Jordan, which lived in the neighborhood of Bethel. According to him Rachel, Leah, Isaac, Joseph, and his brothers were so many different clans, while the combination of two tribes was represented as a marriage, etc. According to the dominant opinion, later conditions are reflected in the stories of the patriarchs. Wellhausen believes that the popular recitals in regard to Jacob and Esau must have taken form in the earlier period of the kingdom of Israel, after the subjugation of Edom. For Bernstein the patriarch Jacob and his history were invented after the separation of the kingdom in order to glorify Bethel; and Seinecke even sees in the despondency of the returning Jacob a reflex of the fear of the exiles on their return from Babylon, and in the treatment of the Shechemites by Simeon and Levi (xxxiv.) the reproof of the Samaritans by Ezra. Apart from such fancies, it would never be possible to transform the natural and characteristic figures of an Abraham or a Jacob into national experiences or the disappointments of a tribe. Mere invention being out of the question, the alternative is to assume that the stories deal with real persons. Names such as Jacob-el and Isra-el, which include the name of a divinity, should be regarded, like the name of Abraham, as originally individual rather than ethnic. In this way Kittel, Klostermann, and Ewald have looked upon the bearers of these names as chiefs who stood at the head of nomadic tribes. In the traditions of that far-away time only a few prominent personalities stand out, while the tribe which accompanied them in their wanderings appears only in details of the narrative. The historical standard used in reference to later periods may not be applied to primitive traditions; but, just as little should their essentially historical character be denied as being, in the main, faithful pictures of the time of the first residence of the fathers in the land of promise. C. VON ORELLI. BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. A. Eisenmenger, *Entdecktes Judenthum,* i. 942-943, Königsberg, 1711; C. von Lengerke, *Kenaan,* pp. 290 sqq., ib. 1844; L. Diestel, *Der Segen Jakobs,* Brunswick, 1853; H. Ewald, *Geschichte des Volkes Israel,* i. 412 sqq., 489 sqq., Hanover, 1864, Eng. transl., i. 341-362, London, 1883· K. Kohler, *Der Segen Jakobs,* Berlin, 1867; A. N. Obbard, *The Prophecy of Jacob, * Cambridge, 1867: A. Bernstein, *Ursprung der Sagen von . . . Jakob,* Berlin, 1871; J. Hamburger, *Real-Encyklopädie des Judenthums, * i. 543 sqq, Neustrelitz, 1874; A. Köhler, *Biblische Geschichte Altes Testamentes,* i. 136 sqq., Erlangen, 1875; L. Seinecke, *Geschichte des Volkes Israel,* i. 40 sqq., Göttingen, 1876; J. Popper, *Ursprung des Monotheismus, pp. 346 sqq., Berlin, 1879; C. von Orelli, *O. T. Prophecy,* Edinburgh, 1885; R. Kittel, *Geschichte der Hebräer,* i. 122 sqq., Gotha, 1892 Eng. transl., London, 1895; W. Staerk, Studien zur Religions- und Sprachge-schichte des * A. T., i. 77-83, ii. 1-13 Berlin 1899; C. A. Briggs, *Messianic Prophecy,* New York, 1902; *DB,* ii. 526-535; *EB,* ii. 2306-12; *JE*, vii, 19-24, and in general the works on the history of Israel as given under AHAB.
JACOB (JACOBUS) BARADÃUS OR ZANZALUS Jacob (Jacobus) Baradæus or Zanzalus

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB (JACOBUS) BARADÆUS** or **ZANZALUS**. See JACOBITES.
JACOB CHRISTOPH AND THE COUNTER-REFORMATION IN SWITZERLAND Jacob Christoph and the Counter-Reformation in Switzerland

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB CHRISTOPH AND THE COUNTER-REFORMATION IN SWITZERLAND:** ### Relations Between City and Bishop. The Counter-Reformation found centers in Switzerland at Lucerne (see CYSAT, RENWARD), and, somewhat later in the bishopric of Basel. The more difficult task presented itself in Basel, since here the issue was not merely to restore Romanism in a district already half conquered by the Calvinists; there was also a political conflict with the city of Basel, still striving after complete independence and extension of its boundaries. The rights of bishop and municipality often conflicted even before the Reformation; within the episcopal domain, in the modern Bernese Jura, the city possessed sovereign rights at a good many places; the bishop, on the other hand, was not only the spiritual lord of the city, but was endowed with comprehensive rights of sovereignty, being empowered to nominate mayor and council, and the city was pledged to pay him various taxes and the temporal domain of the diocese extended up to the city gates. Before the ecclesiastical agitation, the city of Basel was striving to enlarge its possessions at the expense of the bishopric and of the episcopal rights. In 1521 the municipality, without opposition, relegated all rights of the bishop to the nomination of mayor and council. The introduotion of the Reformation dissolved, in 1529, the last bond between bishop and city, and the chapter moved over to Freiburg im Breisgau. In a treaty with the city, in 1530, Bishop Philip of Gundelsheim (1527-53) permitted the exercise of the new doctrine in certain districts of the diocese. The total dissolution of the bishopric appeared now to be merely a question of time. The city pursued its goal quietly but persistently; more and more parishes were united with it in various ways, but without assuring the status of the Reformation within the diocese; the bishopric was imperial soil, and the religious peace of 1555 expressly excluded the adherents of Zwingli. ### Jacob Christoph Introduces the Counter-Refororation. From 1560 a more vigorous church life was astir in Switzerland on the Roman Catholic side; following Borromeo's visit to St. Gall, Einsiedeln, and Luzerne in 1571, the Counter-Reformation distinctly begins to be perceptible in the original cantons, and even the neglected diocese of Basel was reached. On the death of Bishop Melchior, in 1575, the time of compliance came to a close. At the ensuing election, the youngest of the canons, Jacob Christoph Blarer of Wartensee (b. 1542), with urgent admonitions, elicited from his colleagues the promise to labor to restore the right belief, and then became the electors' choice (June 22, 1575). It was no easy task that he set for himself; the bishopric was involved in debt and ecclesiastically in confusion, and the city unquestionably had the ascendancy. At first Jacob Christoph acted in a friendly manner toward the city, but he inquired into the patronal privileges of the diocese and their legal bases. Relations to the instigator and promoter of the Swiss Counter-Reformation became visible; it was Carlo Borromeo of whom Jacob Christoph requested synodical by-laws, and the decrees of the Council of Trent were proclaimed in the diocese. The decisive step which he ventured was the conclusion of a league with the Roman Catholic cantons of the confederacy, Sept., 1579. This league was a significant fact; the Roman Catholic districts of western Switzerland, Fribourg, and Soleure, until then isolated between Protestant districts, gained a territorial connection with these new allies; the passage to France, a matter of great importance for the Roman Catholic Swiss mercenaries, was thereby secured; and against the city of Basel and its demand for the conversion of the diocese to the Protestant cause stood henceforth the combined Roman Catholic federation. Indeed, the treaty of alliance was framed expressly for reciprocal protection in religious concerns, even against members of the confederacy, and for the recovery of apostate subjects; only the bishop was not to use force without the allies' consent. In 1580 he came out openly with his designs; he solemnly excommunicated the prominent adherents of the Reformation in Pruntrut, summoned the Protestant congregations of the diocese to return to the Roman Church, dismissed the Protestant preachers, reinstated Roman worship in certain places, and even preached himself, at the most endangered spots. The Jesuit Canisius devised a catechism for the bishopric; a synod, attended by two hundred priests, convened at Delsberg, in Apr., 1581, and conferred concerning a diocesan visitation, the reform of the hierarchy, synodical by-laws, and the revision of the liturgical books. ### Settlement of the Contention Between City and Bishop. The city of Basel and the Protestant cantons had not failed to remonstrate when the bishop's first steps to repress the new doctrine became known. In reply Jacob Christoph affirmed his rights. Disturbances in the districts affected by the bishop then moved the citizens of Basel to bring their grievances before the diet of the confederacy. A court of arbitration was accordingly appointed. which, in the course of two years' proceedings, brought about a solution of the contention, in 1585. Two treaties were concluded: the first secured to the city of Basel the cession of all episcopal claims to sovereignty, both in the city and in the Sissgau and certain neighboring districts, for 200,000 florins; on its part the city renounced all sovereignty rights within the diocese. The cathedral chapter, in compensation for its ancient rights in the city, was to receive an indemnity of 50,000 florins. In the second treaty it was provided that the patronal privileges between Basel and congregations of the diocese should indeed still nominally exist, but that no right of the bishop should be thereby infringed, and that the city should be forbidden to protect subjects against the bishop; in return, the bishop pledged himself to suffer the subjects of the city to adhere to their own religion, merely reserving to himself the right of reinstating Roman Catholic worship. Every one was to enjoy freedom of choice in religion, and neither side should injure the other. Although both the cathedral chapter and the pope protested against these treaties, it nevertheless appeared that they indicated the only proper course of action. The cession of untenable rights and titles of possession made the bishop unlimited lord in his domain. The city lost its influence over episcopal subjects. The prosecution of church reform no longer encountered insurmountable opposition; everywhere in the diocese the Roman Church recovered firm ground, and the number of Protestants continually decreased. Although the treaty allowed the Evangelicals of Basel free exercise of religion, it soon appeared that the bishop, in virtue of his conceded right of instituting Roman Catholic worship collaterally with the Evangelical, possessed the means of gradually abolishing the latter. The Evangelical subjects were everywhere confronted with the bishop's Roman Catholic officials, from whom they could obtain justice only with difficulty. Though the Reformation maintained itself in most places to about 1595, it was nevertheless constantly decreasing, and at last quite vanished. WALTER GOETZ. BIBLIOGRAPHY: P. Ochs, *Geschichte der Stadt und Landschaft Basel,* vol. vi., Berlin, 1829; J. Burckhardt *Die Gegenreformation . . . am Ende des 16. Jahrhunderts,* Basel, 1855; A. P. von Segesser, *Ludwig Pfyffer und seine Zeit,* vols. ii.-iii., Bern, 1880-82; L. Vautrey, *Hist. des évêques de Bale,* vol. ii., Einsiedeln, 1884.
JABOB (JAMES) OF EDESSA Jacob (James) of Edessa

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB (JAMES) OF EDESSA** (Lat. *Jacobus Edessenus * or *Orrhoenus; * Syr. *Urhaya; * Arab. *al-Rahawi*): The most important of all Syriac writers with the exception of Bar Hebræus (see ABULFARAJ); b. at Indaba, near Antioch, c. 633; d. June 5, 708. The Syriac and Arabic names are derived from the older name for Edessa. He began his studies in a monastery near Kinnesrin and finished them in Alexandria. In 684 or 687 he became bishop of Edessa, but retired after four years; he was too severe for his clergy and burned the canons before the house of the patriarch as useless because not kept. For eleven years he lived as teacher of the monks in the monastery of Eusebona, and then for nine years in that of Telleda. On the death of Habib, his successor as bishop of Edessa, he was recalled, but died four months later while transporting his library to the city. Jacob belonged to the monophysitic branch of the Syrian Church, but is highly esteemed also by the Maronites. He was a "man of three tongues," a theologian, historian, philosopher, and grammarian—in many respects the Jerome of the Syrians. His numerous writings (see BIBLIOGRAPHY) are not yet all published. E. NESTLE. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The works of Jacob, not all published, include one of the earliest of Syriac grammars, the extant fragments ed. W. Wright, London, 1871, and A. Merx in *Historia artis grammaticae apud Syros, * Leipsic, 1871; grammatical tracts, ed. J. P. Martin, London, 1869, and G. Phillips, 2 parts, Edinburgh, 1869-70; Scholia on the Old and the New Testaments, ed. Phillips, London, 1864; an exegetical work on the Hexaemeron, ed. with transl., A. Hjelt, Helsingfors, 1892. On his transl. of the Categories and Analytics of Aristotle S. Schüler has a dissertation, Erlangen, 1897; on his correspondence, *Journal of Sacred Literature, * new series, x (1867), 430; *ZDMG,* xxiv (1870), 261, xxxii (1878), 465, 735; on the chronological canon, E. W. Brooks, in *ZDMG,* liii (1899), 261, 534, 550; on his translation of the Bible, Ugolini in *Oriens Christianus,* ii. 2; on his ecclesiastical canons, the Germ. transl. of C. Kayser, Leipsic, 1886. The *Carmen de fide contra Nestorium * is not his, nor the legend on the sons of Rechab. A. L. Frothingham, *The Existence of America Known early in the Christian Era, * in the *American Journal of Archaeology, * iv. 1888, interprets a passage in the Hexaemeron. Consult: J. S. Assemani, *Bibliotheca orientalis,* i. 468-494, Rome, 1719; W. Wright, *Catalogue of Syriac MSS., * London, 1870-72; *DCB,* iii. 332-335 (quite full).
JACOB OF ELTZ AND THE COUNTERREFORMATION IN TREVES Jacob of Eltz and the Counterreformation in Treves

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB OF ELTZ AND THE COUNTER-REFORMATION IN TREVES:** ### Aggressive Measures. The Reformation nowhere gained firm footing in the archdiocese of Treves, and the principal work of the Counter-Reformation there was to renovate the ancient régime. To this task Archbishop Jacob III. of Eltz (1567- 1581) applied himself. Born in 1510, of an old family of Treves, he rose early to the rank of a prebendary of the cathedral and, in 1547, to that of dean of the chapter. After he was elected archbishop, Apr. 7, 1567, he sought to secure his position by forming alliances with the strictly Roman Catholic states; in 1569 he proposed a Catholic league with the Duke of Alva in Brussels; and when, in the same year, by inspiration from the court of Munich, negotiations began with a view to the extension of the Landsberg League, he was one of the most zealous advocates for the admission of Alva to this league. But, owing to opposition on the Protestant and imperial side, the extensive plans made resulted in no more than the accession to the league of the two electors of Treves and Mainz. Under such conditions the league could not be what had been hoped, and Jacob lost interest in it, although there still survived a close bond between him and the courts of Brussels and Munich, the two centers of the Roman Catholic policy in respect to the empire. He supported, as far as possible, the Bavarian hopes with reference to Cologne (see G EBHARD II.), while both in advance of the imperial diets and pending their sessions he resisted every concession to the Protestants that overstepped the terms of the religious peace. In 1568 Roman Catholic worship was restored under the leadership of the Jesuit Tyraeus, in Neumagen, where the Count of Wittgenstein had procured an entrance for the new doctrines; and likewise the domain of the sometime imperial abbey of Prüm was cleansed of all heresy when, in 1576, it became incorporated with the electorate. In 1571 Jacob removed all non-Catholics from his court, a measure hitting mainly the nobility. In 1572 the order was issued that whoever desired to be received as citizen or inhabitant anywhere in the electorate must establish his Catholic faith. In 1577 the papal nuncio, Portia, could report that the electorate was free from all heresies. Jacob's further activity had to do with the reform of his own Church. ### Reform of the Church. At Easter, 1569, he was the first in Germany who solemnly swore to the decrees of Trent. Between Apr. and Oct., 1569, the council's decisions were announced in all parishes of the electorate. A liturgy elaborated by Jacob himself, with the assistance of certain Jesuits, was issued in 1574, as standard for worship, moral discipline, and matrimonial concerns. Portia's further counsels show why the previously attempted reforms were insufficient--there was lacking a competent clergy. What ecclesiastics were then available shared, for the most part, the general corruption of the Roman priests. Jacob, too, had directed his attention to this point at the very outset; he had sent for six scholars from the Roman Collegium Germanicum as assistants in 1568, and these were duly followed by others. Moreover, the Jesuits of Treves, where there had been a Jesuit establishment since 1560, stood in high honor with Jacob; in 1570 he fitted up for them the Minorite cloister in Treves, adding wealthy endowments so that their school soon flourished to such a degree that from 1573 to 1589 the average attendance is estimated at 1,000 students annually. In 1580 Jacob also founded a college for them at Coblenz. Yet the service rendered by all these useful auxiliaries became really sufficient only when through their help it became feasible to train up a suitable clergy. In vain did Portia, in 1577, bespeak the institution of a priestly seminary, and the project was first realized by Jacob's like-minded successor, John of Schönberg, in 1585. Jacob's reforming activity encountered difficulties in the attitude of the Treves cathedral chapter, which was not inclined to comply with the strict requirements of the Council of Trent; and again, the necessary *placetum regium* from the Brussels government for the Luxembourg domains of the archdiocese occasioned contentions over the prerogatives of the spiritual and the temporal power. On the other hand, the incorporation of the abbey of Prüm as a part of the archbishopric of Treves was a great gain; its opulent resources accrued to the benefit of Jacob's endeavors in the cause of reform. The rejection in 1580 by imperial decision of the claim of the city of Treves to hold charter immediately of the empire likewise strengthened the cause of the Counter-Reformation. ### Jacob's Achievement. Jacob died June 4, 1581. Neither his personality nor his activity can be called great; but the way once having been pointed out, even lesser intellects, led by capable counselors, could carry through the Counter-Reformation. True, the status of the archdiocese was not entirely satisfactory at the time of Jacob's death; but his zealously Catholic-minded successor, John of Schönberg, continued the work along Jacob's lines, and completed the reforms by him begun. Out of the schools of the Jesuits there eventually grew up a generation submissive to the Church; and in many channels of activity the fathers of the Society of Jesus imparted their spirit to the population at large. In connection with the revival of church life, Jacob himself had shown the best of examples; the Roman nuncios continually praise his manner of life, his zeal, his loyalty to the papal see, and hold him up as a pattern for all German prelates. If he did not succeed in accomplishing the reform completely, the decisive turn came to pass under his administration. WALTER GOETZ. BIBLIOGRAPHY: C. von Stramberg, *Rheinischer Antiquarius i. 2, pp. 295 sqq., Coblenz, 1863; J. Marx, Geschichte des Erzstifts Trier,* vol. i., Trier, 1858; A. Kluckhohn, *Briefe Friedrichs des Frommen,* Brunswick, 1867-70; M. Lossen, *Der kölnische Krieg, * Gotha, 1882; J. Ney, *Die Reformation in Trier, 1559, * Halle, 1906.
JACOB OF JUETERBOG Jacob of Jueterbog

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB OF JUETERBOG:** Roman Catholic reformer; b. near Jüterbog, Brandenburg, 1381; d. at Erfurt 1465. As a youth he entered the Polish Cistercian monastery named Paradise, and was sent by its abbot to the University of Cracow, where he became professor and university preacher. In 1441, finding the Cistercian discipline too lax, he joined the Carthusians, and removed to the monastery Ad Montem Sancti Salvatoris in Erfurt. Here he was active not only as a writer on canon law and theology, but also as professor of law at the university. In 1455 he became its rector. He was intent upon a regeneration of monastic life. His propositions of reform, laid down in *Petitiones religiosorum pro reformatione sui status * and *De negligentia praelatorum, * rest upon the view that the pope is only the most prominent member of the Church; the infallible presence of the Holy Spirit is promised not to him, but to the Church, which has the power to depose the pope. He developed these thoughts in a reformatory memorial addressed in 1449 to Pope Nicholas V., under the title *Avisamentum ad papam pro reformatione ecclesiae. * A later work, *De septem statibus ecclesiae, * contains the passionate lamentation of a hopeless man; its aged author did not believe any longer in the possibility of a reform. In spite of his attempts at moral reforms, he did not deviate from orthodox Catholicism. He wrote also a great number of works on canon law, ethics and ascetics, which, however, have mostly perished. The liberal tendency introduced by him culminated in humanism at the time of Luther. PAUL TSCHACKERT. BIBLIOGRAPHY: F. W. Kampschulte, *Die Universität Erfurt,* i. 15-16, Treves, 1858 (from the Roman Catholic point of view; cf. *KL, * vi. 1166-71); C. Ullmann, *Reformers before the Reformation,* i. 208-216, Edinburgh, 1874 (from the Protestant viewpoint); Pastor, *Popes,* ii. 45-49, 93, 94, 106.
JACOB OF KIEF Jacob of Kief

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB OF KIEF.** See NESTOR.
JACOB OF MIES Jacob of Mies

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB OF MIES** (called **Jacobellus,** from his small stature): Bohemian reformer, collaborer of John Huss; b. at Mies (15 m. w. of Pilsen), Bohemia, after 1350; d. at Prague Aug. 9, 1429. He studied at Prague, receiving both the bachelor's and the master's degree in theology, and became pastor of the Church of St. Michael and an outspoken supporter of John Huss. In 1410 he took part in the disputations regarding Wyclif, defending the latter against archiepiscopal condemnation. His study of Scripture and the Fathers had showed him that the withholding of the cup in the administration of the Lord's Supper to the laity was an arbitrary measure of the Roman Church. In 1414 he propounded and defended his views in a public disputation; and when Huss, at that time in jail at Constance, accepted them, he began to administer the cup to his parishioners, in spite of the remonstrances of the bishop and the university. His example was quickly followed by other pastors in Prague. The fathers of the council, who were much alarmed, issued a curious decree, admitting in theory as truth what in practise they condemned as heresy. Though Jacob would by no means submit, he was not removed from his office, perhaps because in other points, as, for instance, in the doctrine of purgatory, he agreed with the Roman Church. During the last decade of his life Jacob was regarded as one of the foremost of the Utraquist theologians. (J. LOSERTH.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: E. H. Gillett, *Life and Times of John Huss,* i., chap. xviii., ii. chap. iii., Philadelphia, 1861; *KL,* ii, 1315; Neander, *Christian Church,* v. 297, 331, 337, 338, 367.
JACOB (JAMES) OF NISIBIS Jacob (James) of Nisibis

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB (JAMES) OF NISIBIS:** Bishop of Nisibis, the chief city of Mygdonia, in northeastern Mesopotamia; d. 338. He is known also as Jacob of Mygdonia and Jacob the Great. After leading a severe life in the mountains of Kurdistan with Eugenius, the founder of Persian monasticism, he became first, or second, bishop of Nisibis in 309. In 313 he began to build the great church, the ruins of which still bear his name, and finished it in 320. He attended the Council of Nicæa in 325, and the sudden death of Arius (q.v.) is attributed especially to his prayers (cf. the *Synaxarium ecclesiae Constantinopolitanae* [*=Propylaeum ad ASB, Novembris*], ed. H. Delehaye, Brussels, 1902, Jan. 13), as is also the protection of Nisibis against Sapor II. He was also present at the dedication of the Church of the Holy Sepulcher in Jerusalem. No writings of Jacob's are known, the great work in twenty-two or twenty-three parts' ascribed to him being really the production of Aphraates (q.v.), with whom he was early confounded. The Armenians mistakenly call him the friend of Gregory the Illuminator. His day, with the Syrians, is the 12th Iyar (May); with the Armenians, Dec. 15; with the Copts, the 18th Tobi (Jan.); in the Greek Church, Jan. 13 (14) and Oct. 31; in the Roman martyrology, July 15. E. NESTLE. BIBLIOGRAPHY: Ephraem, *Carmina Nisibena, * ed. G. Bickell, pp. 11, 20, 97, Leipsic, 1866; Eusebius, *Vita Constantini,* iv. 43, Eng. transl. in *NPNF, * 2d ser., i. 551; Theodoret, *Hist. eccl.,* i. 7, ii. 26, *NPNF, * 2d ser., iii. 44-46, 91-92; Philostorgius, *Hist. eccl.,* iii. 23; Gennadius, *De vir. ill.*, i.; *Acta martyrum et sanctorum, * ed. P. Bedjan, iii. 393, iv. 262, Paris, 1890-97; J. S. Assemani, *Bibliotheca orientalis,* i. 17, 395, 557, ii. 398, 588. Consult: Ceillier, *Auteurs sacrés,* iii. 369-372, 525-526; A. P. Stanley, *Lectures on the Hist. of the Eastern Church,* lect. v., London, 1884; *DCB,* iii. 325-327.
JACOB (JAMES) OF SARUG Jacob (James) of Sarug

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB (JAMES) OF SARUG:** Bishop of Sarug; b. at Kurtam on the Euphrates toward the end of 451; d. Nov. 29, 521. He is mentioned about 503 as visiting presbyter (*periodeutes*) at the capture of Amida, and became bishop of Batnan (Batnae) in the district of Sarug in 519. He was a most prolific writer, and was called the "doctor" (*malpana*) of the Syrians or of the whole Church, and "the channel of the Holy Ghost." His memory is celebrated by Jacobites and Maronites (July or Dec. 29) and even the Nestorians recognize him, though he was monophysite till his end. Seventy scribes are said to have been always busy copying his homilies, which are all in the dodecasyllabic meter which bears his name. Seven hundred and sixty-three homilies are ascribed to him, besides other works: Bar Hebræus had 182 before him, and there are 233 in the Vatican. Four volumes of his *Homiliae selectae* have been published by P. Bedjan (Paris and Leipsic, 1903-08), but most of his works are still in manuscript. E. NESTLE. BIBLIOGRAPHY: On his works cf. W. Wright, *Catalogue of Syriac MSS. in the British Museum,* pp. 502-505, London, 1877. The works are not published in collected form; some are in: Acta sanctorum martyrum orientalium, ed. S. E. Assemani, ii. 230, Florence, 1748; *Acta martyrum et sanctorum,* ed. P. Bedjan, i. 131, 160, iii. 665, iv. 471, v. 615, vi. 650, Paris, 1890-97; *ZDMG,* vols. xii.-xv., xxv., xxviii.-xxxi., 1858 sqq.; W. Cureton, *Ancient Syriac Documents,* pp. 86-107, London, 1864; his letter to Stephan bar Sudaili, a Syrian mystic, is edited and translated by A. L. Frothingham in *Stephen bar Sudaili,* Leyden, 1886; a discourse on Alexander is translated by E. A. W. Budge, London, 1889; six homilies were rendered into German by P. Zingerle, Bonn, 1867; another is published by Sib'ilani, Beirut, 1901. Consult: J. B. Abbeloos, *De vita et scriptis S. Jacobi . . . Sarugi,* Louvain, 1867; P. Martin, in *Revue des sciences ecclésiastiques,* 4th ser., vol. iii., 1876; J. S. Assemani, *Bibliotheca orientalis,* i. 283-340, Rome, 1719; *DCB,* iii, 327-328.
JACOB, EDGAR Jacob, Edgar

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOB, EDGAR:** Church of England bishop of St. Albans; b. at Crawley Rectory, near Winchester, Nov. 16, 1844. He was educated at New College, Oxford (B.A., 1868), and was ordered deacon in 1868 and ordained priest in the following year. He was curate of Taynton, Oxfordshire (1868-69), Witney (1869-71), and St. James', Bermondsey (1871-72), domestic chaplain to the bishop of Calcutta (1872-76), and commissary to the same prelate (1876-88). In 1877 he had charge of Wilberforce Memorial Mission, South London, and was vicar of Portsea (1878-96). In 1896 he was consecrated bishop of Newcastle, and in 1903 was translated to his present see of St. Albans. He was also examining chaplain to the bishop of Winchester in 1876-79, honorary canon of Winchester in 1884-1896, honorary chaplain to the Queen in 1887-90 and chaplain in ordinary in 1890-96, rural dean of Landport and chaplain of the Portsmouth prison in 1892-96, and select preacher at Oxford in the same year. He has written *The Divine Society: or, The Church's Care of Large Populations * (Cambridge lectures on pastoral theology; London, 1900).
JACOBI, FRIEDRICH HEINRICH Jacobi, Friedrich Heinrich

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBI,** ya-ko'bî, **FRIEDRICH HEINRICH**: German philosopher; b. at Dusseldorf Jan. 25, 1743; d. at Munich Mar. 10, 1819. He studied at Frankfort and Geneva, and in 1764 became the head of his father's business in Düsseldorf. After his appointment to the council for the duchies of Jülich and Berg in 1772 he devoted himself entirely to literature and philosophy. His house at Pempelfort, near Düsseldorf, became the meeting-place of distinguished literary men. Among his more intimate friends were Wieland, Hamann, Herder, Lessing, and Goethe. On account of the political agitation of the time he went to Holstein in 1794. During the next ten years he resided chiefly at Wandsbeck, Hamburg, and Eutin. In 1804 he accepted a call to Munich in connection with the proposed Academy of Sciences there. He was president of the academy from its opening in 1807 till 1812. His writings are characterized by poetic fancy and religious sentiment rather than by logical necessity. He held that the understanding can only join and disjoin given facts, without explaining them, and that knowledge deduced in this way is conditioned and relatively unimportant, being always related to a background of existence which forever remains beyond abstract thinking. All demonstrable knowledge, therefore, is relative and conditioned; it does not touch the ultimate nature of things. The faculty by which we grasp ultimate facts is not the understanding, but faith, which Jacobi identified with reason. It was Jacobi who first pointed out the fatal contradiction involved in Kant's application of the category of causality to the *Ding an sich.* His doctrine of the relativity of knowledge was later exploited by Sir William Hamilton. Jacobi's principal works are the two philosophical novels, *Woldemar * (2 vols., Flensburg, 1779) and *Edward Allwills Briefsamlung * (Breslau, 1781); *Ueber die Lehre des Spinoza * (1785; enlarged ed., 1789); *David Hume über den Glauben, oder Idealismus und Realismus * (1787), containing his criticism of Kant; *Ueber das Unternehmen des Kritizismus, die Vernunft zu Verstande zu bringen * (Hamburg, 1801); and *Von den göttlichen Dingen und ihrer Offenbarung * (Leipsic, 1811), which was directed against Schelling. During his last years Jacobi was employed in collecting and editing his *Werke* (6 vols., Leipsic, 1812-24). His *Auserlesener Briefwechsel * was edited by F. Roth (2 vols., 1825-27). Max Jacobi edited *Briefwechsel zwischen Goethe und F. H. Jacobi * (1846). BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. A. Schmid, *Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi, Eine Darstellung seiner Persönlichkeit und seiner Philosophie als Beitrag zu einer Geschichte des modernen Weltproblems, * Heidelberg, 1908; *F. H. Jacobi nach seinem Leben, Lehren und Wirken, * ed. Schlichtigroll, Weiller and Thiersch. Munich, 1819; J. Kuhn, *Jacobi und die Philosophie seiner Zeit, * Mainz, 1834; F. Deycks, *F. H. Jacobi im Verhältniss zu seinen Zeitgenossen,* Frankfort, 1849; F. D. Maurice, *Modern Philosophy,* pp. 644-651, London, 1862; E. Zirngiebl, *F. H. Jacobi's Leben, Dichten und Denken,* Vienna, 1867; L. Lévy-Bruhl, *La Philosophie de Jacobi,* Paris, 1894; N. Wilde, *F. H. Jacobi: a Study in the Origin of German Realism,* New York, 1894. Consult also J. E. Erdmann, *Geschichte der Philosophie,* 2 vols., Berlin, 1895-1896, Eng. transl., 3 vols., London, 1892-98.
JACOBI, JUSTUS LUDWIG Jacobi, Justus Ludwig

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBI, JUSTUS LUDWIG:** Professor in Halle; b. at Burg (14 m. n.e. of Magdeburg) Aug. 12, 1815; d. at Halle May 31, 1888. He studied in Halle, and in Berlin, where in 1841 he became privat-docent, and in 1847 professor extraordinary; in 1851 he went as ordinary professor of theology to Königsberg, in 1855 to Halle. As representative of the "mediating theology" and advocate of the Evangelical Union, he was involved in various controversies with the confessional party. By founding the home for deaconesses in Halle with the wife of Professor Tholuck, he took a practical part in the charitable works of the Church. His writings betray the influence of Neander. In *Die Lehre des Pelagius, ein Beitrag zur Dogmengeschichte * (Leipsic, 1842) he represented the standpoint of Augustine. The first part of *Kirchliche Lehre von der Tradition und heiligen Schrift * appeared at Berlin, 1847. His Lehrbuch der Kirchengeschichte (part i., Berlin, 1850) is characterized by a thorough presentation of the sources combined with a fine appreciation of external conditions as well as of internal development, measured by the central doctrine of sin and grace. He also wrote *Die Lehre der Irvingiten verglichen mit der heiligen Schrift * (1853; 2d ed., 1868); *Professor Schlottmann, die hallesche Fakultät und die Centrumspartei * (2d ed., Halle, 1882), a defense of his colleague against the aggressive tendency of the Roman curia in the so-called Kulturkampf; and *Streiflichter auf Religion, Politik, und Universitäten der Centrumspartei* (1883). He commemorated his teachers in *Erinnerung an D. August Neander * (1882), and *Baron von Kottwitz * (1882). BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. Jacobi, *J. L. Jacobi und die Vermittelungstheologie seiner Zeit,* Gotha, 1889.
JACOBITES Jacobites

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JACOBITES: General Description. The Jacobites are an offshoot of the Syrian Monophysites. While the Syrians were the bearers of Christianity in the East, nowhere has ecclesiastical cleavage produced deeper fissures than among them. And the same might be said also of political relations. The peace between the Persians and Jovinian in 363 made a sharp distinction between Syrians of the Roman empire and those of Persia, which has continued to the present. In religion it was differences concerning Christology which produced the deep rifts, especially those connected with the names of Eutyches and Nestorius. Hence one speaks no more of "an Aramaic nation," rather he speaks of two peoples of Aramaic lineage as distinct as two nationalities. Indeed, authorities do not use the term Jacobitic Church or Nestorian Church, they employ the terms Jacobitic people, Nestorian people. The mutual dislike of these two descendants from a common stock is scarcely less intense than their common hatred of Mohammedans. These peoples seem to have lost consciousness of racial bonds; they speak and write two dialects of a common speech, and this difference goes back to an early time, since the division had its origin in the fifth century. By the term Jacobites is meant now the Syrian Monophysites, though in earlier times Egyptian Monophysites were also included. How early the term came into use is not known; it occurs certainly in the anathemas of the Council of Nice (787). The emperors Zeno and Anastasius favored this form of teaching, and it was introduced among the Syrians by Barsumas of Edessa, Xenaias Philoxenus of Mabug, and Severus of Antioch. Under Justinian I. many Syrian bishops were deposed and exiled for refusing recognition to the deliverances of the Council of Chalcedon. Under the protection of the Empress Theodora, bishops were consecrated for the East and South, and particularly Jacobus Baradæus, whose labors in behalf of monophysitism were epoch-making. ### Jacobus Baradæus. Jacobus Baradæus (Jacob Baradai) was born at Tella Mauzalat (55 m. e. of Edessa) toward the close of the fifth century, and died at the monastery of Cassianus, on the Egyptian border, July 30, 578. He was educated in the monastery of Phasilta near Nisibis, lived for fifteen years as a monk in Constantinople, and was consecrated bishop in 541 or 543. Clad in rags, he then wandered from Egypt to the Euphrates and to the islands of the Mediterranean for nearly forty years, expounding his doctrines, ordaining deacons and priests, and consecrating bishops, doing his work in the daytime and traveling at night sometimes forty miles to a new place of labor. He is said to have consecrated two patriarchs and twenty-seven bishops, and to have created 100,000 priests and deacons. After the death of the patriarch Severus, he attached himself to the party of Sergius of Tells, and when Sergiua died he had Paulus of Egypt made patriarch. He left little in the shape of literature. An *Anaphora* is ascribed to him (Lat. transl. by E. Renaudot, *Liturgiarum orientalium collectio,* ii., Paris, 1716, pp. 333 sqq.), also a confession extant in Arabic and Ethiopic, the genuineness of which is doubtful. A number of encyclicals in a Syriac manuscript in London are thought to be his. ### Their System and Order. It was from Jacobus Baradæus that the Jacobites took their name, and not from the Apostle, as was stated by John of Ephesus, nor from the Hebrew patriarch. They used to call themselves "the orthodox," and in Egypt went under the names of Theodosians, Severians, and Dioscurians. For the peculiarities of doctrine consult the articles EUTYCHIANISM, and MONOPHYSITES. In the propagation of this system they were peculiarly zealous. In 1587 Leonard Abel found the agent of the Jacobites ready to acknowledge the Roman Church, but he absolutely refused to condemn Dioscorus and to recognize Chalcedon. In the cultus emphasis is laid upon the making of the bread of the Eucharist of leavened dough mixed with salt and oil, and also upon the addition to the trisagion "who was crucified on your account." They make the sign of the cross with one finger, and the lot is often used at the election of patriarchs and bishops. Their patriarch takes his title from Antioch, though he never resides there, inasmuch as the Greeks regard Jacobites as heretics and refuse to their chief officer residence in Antioch. His seat is therefore not fixed, but is sometimes in a monastery, often in Amid (Diarbekr). During the Jacobitic schism, 1364-1494, there were as many as four officials claiming the title of patriarch in as many different places. The jurisdiction of the Syrian patriarch meets that of the Coptic patriarch, though Jerusalem has both a Coptic and a Syrian-Jacobitic bishop. In the most flourishing period of the Church it had probably 100 bishops. Under the patriarch is the Maphrian, who is the primate of the East, and is sometimes called Catholicus. His office dates as far back as Jacobus Baradæus, though the title is much later. It is not uncommon for a married man to be admitted to the order of deacon or presbyter, though marriage after ordination is not permitted. They have a number of monasteries. The monks are not reckoned among the clergy, yet the bishops are chosen from among the monks, and have charge of the cloisters. The writers of the Jacobites include Jacob of Edessa, Jacob of Sarug, John of Ephesus, John of Dara Isaac of Antioch, George, bishop of the Arabs, and Philoxenus (qq.v.), also Paul of Tella, Thomas of Heraclea, Stephen bar Sudaili, Dionysius of Tellmahre, Moses bar Kepha, and Dionysius bar Salibi. ### History and Present Status. The emperors of the East, with the exception of Zeno and Anastasius, were opposed to the Jacobitic doctrines, and Justinian I. attempted in vain to unite them with the Catholic Church. The Syrian Jacobites suffered not only under the emperors, but also under the Mohammedans, while their brethren in Egypt seemed to be able better to conciliate the followers of Mohammed. The Crusaders refused them access to the Holy Sepulcher. In the time of Gregory XIII., the Jacobites are said to have numbered 50,000 families, mostly poor, scattered in the towns and villages of Syria, Babylonia, and Mesopotamia. Since that time they seem to have dwindled, as the reports of different travelers are followed from that time to the present. Sachau reports that at Mosul out of 2,328 Christian houses, some 900 were those of Syrian Jacobites. The most recent statistics give 22,700 adherents, twenty-four parishes, forty-two churches, eighty-one priests; in Mosul is the largest number of adherents, 7,000, and in Mardin the next largest number, 4,000. The situation of these people has been the more critical because, while the most of the other sects received recognition from the Porte, they were without it. Through the interposition of the English this disability was removed in 1882. What adds to the difficulty of their position is that they are regarded as heretics by all other sects in the region. Perhaps their most flourishing settlement is at Sadad, on the road from Damascus to Palmyra. In 1653 the Christians of St. Thomas of India (see N ESTORIANS) seem to have had relations with them, though there is no indication of present affiliation. Recently special attempts have been made by the Church of Rome to have the Oriental churches come into connection with it; the encyclical *Præclara * of Leo XIII. of June 20, 1894, and particularly the *Orientaliurn dignitas ecclesiarum * of Nov. 30, 1894, are evidences of this movement. Several periodicals are employed to further these efforts, notably *Bessarione * in Rome, the *Revue de l'orient chrétien * of Paris, with its auxiliaries, and the *Calendarium ecclesiae utriusque * of Innsbruck. The earlier attempts of the years 1169, 1237, 1247, and 1442 produced no permanent results. (E. NESTLE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: The chief work on the Syrian Jacobites is still J. S. Assemani *Bibliotheca orientalis, * especially vol. ii., Rome, 1721. Consult farther: E. Renaudot, *Hist. patriarcharum Alexandrinorum Jacobitarum, * Paris, 1713; M. Le Quien, *Oriens Christianus,* vols. ii.- iii., ib. 1740; J. M. Neale, *Hist. of the Holy Eastern Church, * 2 vols. London, 1850 (for the liturgy); O. H. Parry, *Six Months in a Syrian Monastery, * ib. 1895; C. E. Hammond, *Liturgies Eastern and Western, * ed. F. E. Brightman, i. 69-110, ib. 1896; F. Diekamp, *Die origenistischen Streitigkeiten im 6. Jahrhundert, * Münster, 1899; R. Duval, *La Littérature syriaque, * Paris 1900; E. Sachau, *Am Euphrat und Tigris, * Leipsic, 1900· J. B. Chabot, *Chronique de Michel le Syrien, patriarche jacobique d'Antioche* (*1166-1199*), 2 vols., Paris, 1900-04; F. C. Burkitt, *Early Eastern Christianity, * London, 1904; L. Silbernagl, *Verfassung und gegenwärtiger Bestand sämtlicher Kirchen des Orients, * Regensburg, 1904; Harnack, *Dogma, * passim; *KL,* xi. 1124-34; the periodicals mentioned in the last paragraph above, together with *Echos d'orient; * and the literature under EUTYCHIANISM; MONOPHYSITES. On Jacob Baradæus consult H. G. Kleyn, *Jacobus Baradeus,* Leyden, 1882; *DCB,* iii. 328-332.
JACOBS, HENRY EYSTER Jacobs, Henry Eyster

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBS, HENRY EYSTER:** Lutheran; b. at Gettysburg, Pa., Nov. 10, 1844. He was graduated at Pennsylvania College, Gettysburg, in 1862, and Gettysburg Theological Seminary in 1865. After being a tutor in Pennsylvania College in 1864-67, he was a home missionary at Pittsburg, Pa., in 1867-68, and then pastor and principal of Thiel Hall, Phillipsburg, Pa. (now Thiel College, Greenville, Pa.), in 1868-70. In 1870 he returned to Pennsylvania College as professor of Latin and history (1870-80), classics (1880-81), and Greek (1881-83). Since 1883 he has been professor of systematic theology at the Lutheran Theological Seminary, Philadelphia, of which he has also been dean since 1894. Besides editing *The Lutheran Review * from 1882-96, he has translated and edited L. Hutter's *Compend of Lutheran Theology * (in collaboration with G. F. Spieker; Philadelphia, 1867); H. Schmid's *Doctrinal Theology of the Lutheran Church * (in collaboration with C. A. Hay; 1875); *The Book of Concord: or, Symbolical Standards of the Lutheran Church * (2 vols., 1882-83); H. A. W. Meyer's *Commentary on Galatians and Ephesians* (New York, 1884); and F. Düsterdieck's *Critical and Exegetical Handbook to the Revelation of John* (1887). He likewise edited *The Lutheran Commentary * (13 vols., New York, 1895-99) to which he contributed the portion on Romans and I Corinthians, and *The Lutheran Cyclopaedia * (1899). As independent works he has written *The Lutheran Movement in England during the Reigns of Henry VIII. and Edward VI., and its Literary Monuments* (Philadelphia, 1891); *History of the Evangelical Lutheran Church in the United States * (New York, 1893); *Elements of Religion * (Philadelphia, 1894); *Martin Luther, the Hero of the Reformation * (New York, 1898); *German Emigration to America,* 1709-1740 (Philadelphia, 1899); and *Summary of the Christian Faith *(1905).
JACOBS, JOSEPH Jacobs, Joseph

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBS, JOSEPH:** Jewish folklorist, historian, and critic; b. at Sydney, N. S. W., Aug. 29, 1854. He was educated at Sydney and London universities and at St. John's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1876), and also studied at Berlin. From 1878 to 1884 he was secretary of the Society of Hebrew Literature, and in 1882-1900 was secretary of the Mansion House (later Russo-Jewish) Fund and Committee, taking an active part in behalf of the Russian Jews. He has likewise devoted himself to Jewish history, and for this purpose visited Spain in 1888 to study manuscript sources, later turning his attention to the history of the Jews in England. He helped found the Jewish Historical Society of England, of which he was president in 1898-99, and also assisted in establishing the Maccabeans; and he was long a member of the executive committee of the Anglo-Jewish Association. In 1900 he settled permanently in New York, being revising editor of the *JE * (1901-06), and in 1906 was appointed professor of English literature and rhetoric in the Jewish Theological Seminary, also becoming editor of the *American Hebrew.* As a folklorist he occupies a foremost rank, and was for some years editor of *Folk-Lore * and honorary secretary of the International Folk-Lore Society. Among his publications special mention may be made of the following: *Studies in Jewish Statistics, Social, Vital, and Anthropometric * (London, 1891); *Jews of Angevin England, Documents and Records * (1893); Studies in Biblical Archæology (1894); *Sources of the History of the Jews in Spain * (1895); *Jewish Ideals, and other Essays *(1896); and *As Others Saw Him * (an imaginative life of Christ from a Jewish point of view; New York, 1903).
JACOBUS Jacobus

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBUS:** The Latin form of James (q.v.); see also JACOB.
JACOBUS DE VARAGINE, GIACOMO DA VARAZZE, JACOPO DA VARAZZE Jacobus de Varagine, Giacomo da Varazze, Jacopo da Varazze

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBUS DE VARAGINE, GIACOMO DA VARAZZE, JACOPO DA VARAZZE** (often called Jacob, or James, of Viraggio) : Archbishop of Genoa; b. at Casanuova in Varazze (on the coast, 18 m. s.w. of Genoa) c. 1228 (or 1230); d. in Genoa July 16 (?), 1298. He entered the Dominican order in 1244, probably studied at Cologne, Paris, and Bologna, became prior at Genoa (or Asti) about 1258, was provincial prior for Lombardy 1267-76, 1281-86, and archbishop of Genoa 1292-98. He fulfilled several quasi-diplomatic missions and as archbishop exercised feudal authority over San Remo and governed certain churches in the Levant. As archbishop he promoted efforts for the reform of the clergy, intervened successfully to promote peace between Guelph and Ghibelline, and transferred the government of San Remo to the civil authority. He was beatified by Pius VII. in 1816, and is popularly reverenced in Liguria as the promoter of peace. Jacobus is best known for his writings, especially the "Golden Legend," which was possibly the most popular book of the Middle Ages. This work, known also as "Lives of the Saints" and as *Historia Lombardica, * consists of readings from the lives of the saints for the festivals of the church year. It was probably written before 1260, and was very early translated into at least French, German, English (by William Caxton, 1484?), Italian, and Dutch. Within about fifty years after the invention of printing more than 100 editions of original and translations had been printed. Besides the "Golden Legend" Jacobus wrote several series of sermons "On the Saints," "On the Blessed Virgin," etc., only less popular than the Legend, and also known as "Golden" on account of their popularity. His "Chronicle of Genoa" is a somewhat heterogeneous mass, but not without some historical value. He is alleged also to have made the first translation of the Bible into Italian and there are reasons for supposing that he wrote the "Game of Chess," which, like the "Golden Legend," is best known in English under the name of Caxton. Several other hitherto disputed or lost writings, an "Art of Preaching," a "Summary of Vices and Virtues," *Sermones in visitationibus religiosoram, * etc., have recently been discovered or established as his. E. C. RICHARDSON. BIBLIOGRAPHY: For editions of the works of Jacobus consult: Potthast, *Wegweiser,* pp. 634-35. An incomplete text of the Chronicle is in Muratori, *Scriptores,* ix. 5-56; the most convenient text of the Sermons is that of Antwerp, 1712, in 6 vols.; the standard edition of the Golden Legend is by J. G. T. Graesse, Leipsic, 1846, new ed., Wratislaw, 1890; the Eng. transl. of the Golden Legend by Caxton, with introduction and notes by Eales, was published London, 1888, and a sumptuous edition, ed. W. Morris and F. S. Ellis, 3 vols., ib. 1892. The prefaces to the many editions and translations contain biographical and bibliographical material. The standard monographs are: P. Anfossi, *Memorie istoriche appartenenti alla vita del . . . Jacopo da Voragine, * Genoa; G. Spotorno, *Notizie storico-critico del . . . Giacomo da Varazze, * Genoa, 1823; and V. M. Palazza, *Vita del . . . Giacomo da Varazze,* Genoa, 1867. Consult also M. Waresquiel, *Le Bienheureux Jacques de Voragine, * Paris, 1902; J. C. Broussole, *Préface à la Légende dorée, * Paris, 1907. The *Princeton Theological Review * for April, 1903, contains an article on the Golden Legend, and for July, 1904, one on "Voragine as a preacher," Consult further: J. Quétif and J. Echard, *Scriptores ordinis praedicatorum,* i. 454-459, ii. 818, Paris, 1719-21; *ASB, * Jan., i., pp. xix.-xx.; *KL, * vi. 1178-82.
JACOBUS, MELANCTHON WILLIAMS Jacobus, Melancthon Williams

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBUS, MELANCTHON WILLIAMS:** The name of two American divines. **1.** Presbyterian pastor and educator; b. at Newark, N. J., Sept. 19, 1816; d. at Allegheny, Pa., Oct. 28, 1876. He was graduated from the College of New Jersey (Princeton) in 1834, and from the Princeton Theological Seminary in 1838. The following year he was instructor in Hebrew at the seminary. In Sept., 1839, he entered upon a pastorate of twelve years at the First Presbyterian Church, Brooklyn. In 1851 he became professor of Oriental and Biblical literature in the Western Theological Seminary, Allegheny, Pa., and retained this position till his death. He was also pastor of the Central Presbyterian Church, Pittsburg, 1858-1870. In 1870 he presided, conjointly with Philemon H. Fowler, at the opening of the first General Assembly of the reunited Presbyterian Church, old and new schools. His principal works are *Notes on the New Testament * (4 vols., 1848-59); *Notes on the Book of Genesis * (2 vols., 1864-65); and *Notes on the Book of Exodus * (1874). BIBLIOGRAPHY: *Presbyterian Reunion: a Memorial Volume,* pp. 530-532, New York, 1871; R. E, Thompson, in *American Church History Series,* vi. 144, 178, 181, ib. 1895; J. H. Patton, *Popular Hist. of the Presbyterian Church,* p. 407, ib. 1900. **2.** Congregationalist, son of the preceding; b. at Allegheny City, Pa., Dec. 15, 1855. He was graduated from Princeton College in 1877, and from Princeton Theological Seminary in 1881; studied at Göttingen and Berlin (1881-84). He was pastor of the Presbyterian Church at Oxford, Pa. (1884-91), and since 1891 has been professor of New-Testament exegesis and criticism in Hartford Theological Seminary, where he has been dean of the faculty since 1903, and acting president in 1902-03. He was also acting pastor of Center Congregational Church, Hartford, Conn., in 1899-1900 and was Stone lecturer in Princeton Theological Seminary in 1897-98, and lecturer on the New Testament in Mount Holyoke College in 1901 and 1903-04. He has written *A Problem in New Testament Criticism * (Stone lectures; New York, 1900), and has edited *Roman Catholic and Protestant Bibles Compared * (New York, 1905); and *A Standard Bible Dictionary * (1909).
JACOBY, HERMAN KARL JOHANN Jacoby, Herman Karl Johann

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOBY, HERMANN KARL JOHANN:** German Protestant; b. at Berlin Dec. 30, 1836. He was educated at the University of Berlin and the preachers' seminary at Wittenberg, and after being a teacher in the gymnasium of Landsberg, deacon at Heldrungen castle, and gymnasial teacher and assistant cathedral preacher at Stendal until 1868, was appointed professor of homiletics in the University of Königsberg, a position which he still occupies. He has written *Zwei evangelische Lebensbilder aus der katholischen Kirche * (Bielefeld, 1864); *Liturgik der Reformatoren * (2 vols., Gotha, 1871-76); *Beiträge zur christlichen Erkenntnis * (Gütersloh, 1871); *Christi Tugenden * (Gotha, 1883); *Luthers vorreformatorische Predigt * (Königsberg, 1883); *Allgemeine Pädagogik auf Grund der christlichen Ethik* (Gotha, 1883); *Der erste Brief des Apostels Johannes* (Leipsic, 1891); *Neutestamentliche Ethik * (Königsberg, 1899); and *Die Evangelien des Markus und Johannes, homiletische Betrachtungen * (Leipsic, 1903).
JACOPONE DA TODI Jacopone da Todi

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JACOPONE DA TODI,** ya"co-po'nê da to'dî (properly Jacopo de' Benedetti, Lat. *Jacobus de Benedictis*): ### Life. Franciscan poet; b. at Todi (24 m. s. of Perugia), c. 1240; d. at the monastery of Collazone (near Perugia) on Christmas night, 1306. Highly endowed by nature, he won both degrees in law at Bologna, and became respected and prosperous in his profession in his native city. He had a beautiful, noble, and virtuous wife, whose death from the fall of a gallery in a theater in 1268 changed his entire life. He renounced all that had formerly appeared to him great and splendid, gave up his business, divided his property among the poor, and joined the Franciscan tertiaries. To express contempt of the world and self he went to absurd extremes of fanaticism and sought to realize literally the "foolishness" described in I Cor. i. 20-29, so that he received the nickname Jacopone ("silly James"), which he accepted as a badge of honor. In 1278 he sought to enter the Franciscan order, but they would not receive him until he proved the soundness of his mind by a *Libellus de mundi contemtu.* Becoming a monk did not change his eccentric habits, and those who judged him most mildly pronounced him *spiritu ebrius. * The conditions of the time drew Jacopone into the storm of political life. His love of truth could not endure the Church's abuses, and many a judgment full of bitter earnestness did he hurl in the days of popes Celestine V. and Boniface VIII. He attacked the latter personally, and, in May, 1297, joined the league of Roman magnates that aimed to bring about the pope's deposition, thereby incurring the ban of the Church. When Boniface VIII. conquered Præneste, in 1298 Jacopone was imprisoned. After the death of Boniface he was liberated, Dec., 1303, and spent his closing years in the monastery of Collazone. ### Writings. ### The Stabat Mater. Jacopone's literary products include sententious maxims of the sort found in the *Liber conformitatum* compiled by Bartholomew of Pisa, which were gratefully preserved and circulated in the Franciscan order. But a much larger circle of devotees was won by his Italian and Latin lyrics. The Florentine edition by Bonaccorsi (1490) gives 100 Italian poems; the Venetian edition by Tressati (1614) no fewer than 211 satires, odes, penitential hymns, and spiritual love-songs. He sinks himself as a mystic into Christian metaphysics, and celebrates the exalted flight of the soul to God and its nuptials with the divine love; he relates the conflict between the penitent spirit and the body still rebelliously striving under the rod. In other poems he scourges with holy zeal the wrongs of the time--popular customs, luxury of the women, worldliness of the nuns, the papal Antichrist. Finally he brings before the people the life of Jesus, to teach them holy living after the rule of Christ, and celebrates poverty most highly. The question of authenticity is much more difficult in case of the Latin hymns which bear Jacopone's name, and they have been ascribed to various authors. Apart from *Cur murtdus militat * (cf. H. A. Daniel, *Thesaurus hymnologicus,* ii., Leipsic, 1844, 379; S. W. Duffield, *Latin Hymn-Writers, * New York, 1889, 279-280) the most important is the renowned sequence *Stabat mater dolorosa, * beside which the manuscripts contain also the parody *Stabat mater speciosa juxta foenum gaudiosa, dum jacebat parvulus. * The hymn undoubtedly originated in the Franciscan order, but who the actual author was is open to many hypotheses. Gregory the Great, Bernard of Clairvaux, Innocent Ill., and others have been suggested. The hymn is anonymous in manuscripts of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, and it is tradition of the Franciscan order which names Jacopone as its author. It was sung by the Flagellants who traversed Italy in 1398 (see FLAGELLATION, FLAGELLANTS) and, according to the *Summa historialis * of Antoninus Florentinus (d. 1450), sang "hymns in Latin and the vernacular, and especially that *Stabat mater dolorosa * which they say Gregory gave forth." The sequence was used in the Church as early as the fourteenth century, and eighty-three German translations alone are known. Of musical settings for this celebrated hymn, the compositions of Palestrina and Pergolese, Astorga, and Haydn are well known. The Protestant judgment of the hymn must be, doctrinally, that it divides reverence between mother and son in a manner never to be endured by a Protestant temperament; but, regarded esthetically, it may be pronounced a pearl among medieval hymns. E. LEMPP. BIBLIOGRAPHY: Bartholomew of Pisa, *Liber conformitatum* p. 60b, Milan, 1510; L. Wadding, *Annales Minorum,* v. 407 sqq., vi. 77 sqq., Rome, 1733; F. A. March, *Latin Hymns,* pp. 171-177, 300-303, New York, 1874 (gives text of *Stabat mater, * notes on it, and notes on Jacopone); H. Thode, *Franz von Assisi und die Anfänge der Renaissance in Italien,* pp. 408 sqq., Berlin, 1885; S. W. Duffield, *Latin Hymn-Writers and their Hymns, * chap. xxv., ib. 1889; *KL, * vi. 1196-98. On the *Stabat mater * the three best works are: F. G. Lisco, *Stabat mater, * Berlin, 1853; C. H. Bitter, *Studie zum Stabat mater, *Leipsic, 1883; J. Kayser, *Beiträge zur Geschichte und Erklärung der ältesten Kirchenhymnen,* ii. 100-192, Paderborn, 1888; A. Tenneroni, in *Nuova Antologia, * June 16, 1907; G. Galli, *Disciplinanti dell' Umbria del 1260 e le loro Landi, * Turin, 1907. Available in English are R. C. Trench, *Sacred Latin Poetry,* pp. 262-263, London, 1864; *Seven Great Hymns,* pp. 96-109, New York, 1868 (text, transl., and notes); D. T. Morgan, *Hymns of the Latin Church,* pp. 5-8, 184-186, London, 1871; W. A. Merrill, *Latin Hymns,* pp. 65-66, Boston, 1904 (text and notes); Julian, *Hymnology,* pp. 1081-84 (admirable summary of data, details of principal texts and Eng. transls.).
JAEGER, JOHANN Jaeger, Johann

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAEGER,** yê'ger, **JOHANN.** See EPISTOLAE OBSCURORUM VIRORUM.
JAFFÉ, PHILIPP Jaffé, Philipp

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAFFE,** yaf'fê', **PHILIPP:** German historian; b. at Schwersenz (6 m. e. of Posen), Prussia, Feb. 17, 1819; d. at Wittenberg Apr. 3, 1870. He studied at the University of Berlin under Ranke, and first distinguished himself by his prize-essay, *Geschichte des deutschen Reichs unter Lothar dem Sachsen * (Berlin, 1843), which was followed by his *Geschichte des deutschen Reichs unter Konrad dem Dritten * (Hanover, 1845). Finding that, as a Jew, the road to academic preferment in Prussia was closed to him, he took up the study of medicine in 1850, and spent the next three years in the universities of Berlin and Vienna. In 1854, however, shortly after he had passed his examination in medicine, he became the collaborator of G. H. Pertz on the *Monumenta Germaniae historica * and edited for that collection a number of works in which he showed great ability in historical-philological criticism. He became extraordinary professor of history at the University of Berlin in 1862, and withdrew from the *Monumenta * the following year. He turned Christian in 1868, broke with his old friends, fell into despondency, and finally committed suicide. Other important works by Jaffé are the invaluable *Regesta pontificum Romanorum . . . ad annum . . . 1198* (Berlin, 1851; 2d ed., Leipsic, 1881-88); the masterly *Bibliotheca rerum Germanicarum * (6 vols., Berlin, 1864-73); and *Ecclesiæ metropolitanæ Coloniensis codices * (1874), in which W. Wattenbach collaborated with him.
JAGGAR, THOMAS AUGUSTUS Jaggar, Thomas Augustus

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAGGAR, THOMAS AUGUSTUS:** Protestant Episcopal bishop of Southern Ohio; b. in New York City June 2, 1839. He was educated mainly by private tutors, and pursued his theological studies partly privately and partly in the General Theological Seminary, New York City. He was ordered deacon in 1860, and advanced to the priesthood in 1863. After being minister at St. George's, Flushing, N. Y. (1860-62), and Trinity, Bergen Point, N. J. (1863-64), he was rector of Anthon Memorial (now All Souls'), New York City, in 1864-68, St. John's, Yonkers, N. Y., in 1868-70, and Holy Trinity, Philadelphia, in 1870-75. In 1875 he was consecrated first bishop of Southern Ohio. Ill health, from which he had long suffered, however, obliged him to retire from the episcopal office in 1889, although he still retains his seat and vote in the house of bishops. While at Yonkers he founded St. John's Riverside Hospital in that city. He has written *Duty of the Clergy in Relation to Modern Scepticism* (Cincinnati, O., 1883), and *The Personality of Truth* (Bohlen lectures for 1900; New York, 1900).
JAHN, JOHANN Jahn, Johann

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAHN,** yan, **JOHANN:** Roman Catholic Biblical scholar; b. at Tasswitz, near Znaim (47 m. n.n.w. of Vienna), Moravia, June 18, 1750; d. at Vienna Aug. 16, 1816. He attended the gymnasium at Znaim, studied philosophy at Olmütz, and in 1772 began the study of theology at the Premonstratensian convent of Bruck, near Znaim. After he had taken the vow in 1774 he was employed for a time in pastoral work at Mislitz, but was soon recalled to Bruck as teacher of Oriental languages and Biblical hermeneutics. On the suppression of the convent in 1784, he was given a similar chair in the lyceum at Olmütz, and in 1789 he was transferred to the University of Vienna as professor of Oriental languages, Old-Testament introduction, and Biblical archeology. To this professorship dogmatics was added in 1803. On account of his advanced views concerning the Bible he was honorably removed from his chair in 1805 and promoted to a canonry in St. Stephen's, Vienna. Henceforth he lived in retirement, devoting himself to Biblical and linguistic studies. His most important works are *Einleitung in die göttlichen Schriften des Alten Bundes* (2 parts, Vienna, 1792; 2d ed., 4 vols., 1802-03); *Biblische Archäologie * (5 vols., 1797-1805); *Introductio in libros sacros Veteris Fæderis in compendium redacta * (1804; 2d ed., 1814; Eng. transl., *Introduction to the O. T.,* New York, 1827); *Archæologia Biblica in compendium redacta * (1804; 2d ed., 1814; Eng. transl., *Biblical Archæology,* Andover, 1823); *Enchiridion hermeneuticæ * (1812); *Appendix hermeneutica* (2 fasc., 1813-15); and the posthumous *Nachträge * (Tübingen, 1821). Jahn also published a number of grammars, lexicons, and text-books of Hebrew, Aramaic, Syriac, and Arabic, and an edition of the Hebrew Bible (4 vols., Vienna, 1806). His *Introductio, Archæologia, Enchiridion,* and *Appendix hermeneutica * were placed upon the Index in 1822. BIBLIOGRAPHY: *Vindiciae Joannis Jahn, * Leipsic, 1822; F. H. Reusch, *Index verbotenen Bücher,* ii. 1083-84, Bonn, 1885; *KL, * vi. 1208-10.
JAINISM Jainism

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JAINISM. The Founder (§ 1). Relation to Buddhism (§ 2). The Jain Philosophy (§ 3). Basis in Brahmanism (§ 4). The System and its History (§ 5). The Literature (§ 6). ### 1. The Founder. The remote origin of Jainism is traced to a teacher named Parsva who lived in north central India in the eighth century before Christ and left a school of thought which did not become active till two centuries later. The immediate founder was a certain Vardhamana, a younger son of Siddartha, and a contemporary of Buddha. The Jain literature, following the usual tendency of religious books to exalt and glorify the founder, represents the father of Vardhamana as king of a large town named Kundagrama or Kundapura, identified as the modern Basukund. Investigation has shown that this place was a mere suburb of the town Vaisali, the modern Besarh. Siddartha could therefore have been at best only headman of a village, though he was connected with the king of Vaisali and with the dynasty then ruling Magadha. Vardhamana consequently belonged to the Kshatriya or warrior class, as did Buddha, therefore to the aristocracy. The traditions represent him as living with his parents till they died, when his elder brother, Nandivardhana, succeeded as head of the household. Vardhamana was then twenty-eight years of age, and he sought and gained permission to enter the spiritual career. For twelve years he followed the life of the meditative ascetic, after which he was recognized as a prophet, having claimed "perfect knowledge and faith," and was hailed Mahavira, "great hero," Jina, "victor," and greeted with other titles indicative of his success. He lived thirty years after this, following the career of a teacher and ascetic, preaching his doctrine and organizing his Church. He died at Papa or Pava, the modern Padraona. His contemporaneity with Buddha is established by the fact that the traditions of Jains and Buddhists alike refer to the same contemporaries, which brings out the farther coincidence that the two religions arose in approximately the same region, north of the center of India, and that Jainism became active and made its early conquests in a region comprising the modern Oudh and the districts of Tirhut and Bihar in western Bengal, where its progress can be traced by inscriptions from the time of Asoka in the third century B.C. ### 2. Relation to Buddhism. The rise of two religious leaders of the same caste in the same region and period, bearing the same titles, which were gained in practically the same manner, using a common stock of ideas expressed in a common technic of names and epithets, and founding churches with similar forms of organization, and having each a Nirvana as the goal of human striving, is a phenomenon which might well cause not only dispute between the later adherents of the religions, but also confusion and perplexity among scientific students. For long the resemblances between Buddhism and Jainism were explained by the supposition that one was a schism or an offshoot of the other, and the question of priority was hotly debated. Recent study has cleared the atmosphere not only in the matter of origins, but in exact knowledge of the details of the lives of the founders and of the religious and philosophical conceptions and modifications of such ideas as were inherited from the society and religion existent prior to the rise of these two sects. Thus of the founders it is now known that the birthplaces were different, that Buddha's mother died while he was an infant, while Vardhamana's lived to see him reach maturity; that Buddha entered the ascetic life against the will of his father, Vardhamana after his parent's death and with the consent of his family; and that Buddha lived this life for six years and contemned its results, while Vardhamana pursued it for twelve years and regarded the exercise as salutary, continuing the vocation after reaching sainthood. Among the common titles of the founders are Jina, Arhat, Mahavira, Tathagatha, Buddha, and Paranivrita, every one of which is in the sacred writings of the sects given to the founders. But each sect has a marked and unmistakable preference for a certain set of these different from that preferred by the other. Common to both sects as developed is the worship of the founders; but in Jainism this is consistent with the fundamental ideas of the system, while in Buddhism the primitive ideal rigidly excludes it--the practise there has been fostered by the people's inability to live up to the abstract ideal the Buddhist faith presents. A fundamental doctrine in both sects is that of Ahimsa or the sacredness of all life. In this the principal difference between the two religions is the irrational extreme to which the Jains have carried the practise. The Jain may eat even of vegetables and fruit only such as have no trace of life left--may not pluck the vegetable or fruit from its source--and must strain through a cloth the water he drinks. Further regulations prescribe the covering of the ascetic's mouth and nose with a cloth that no insects may be drawn in with the breath to their death, and the pushing of a broom before him as he walks that no living thing may be crushed by his feet. The systems have developed along similar lines, with orders of monks upon whom severe duties press, and lay communicants from whom a lesser degree of abstinence is demanded. Both have had temples of ambitious structure, in which were placed statues of the founders and their disciples, though those of the Jains are the more monumental. These resemblances and differences are now quite fully accounted for. ### 3. The Jain Philosophy. The fundamental assumption of the Jains is the eternity of matter, which is regarded as atomic in structure. Time proceeds in pairs of cycles each of enormous length, in the first of which goodness constantly increases, and in the second diminishes. Since matter is eternal, no necessity arises for creative agency, and Jains have consequently been called atheists. But worship is paid to the Jina, and indeed to Hindu deities, since the native predilection to polytheism has in Jainism, as in Buddhism, been too strong for the philosophy to overcome. Over against the eternity of matter the Jain puts the eternity of individual spirits. The Jain philosophy is therefore dualistic as against the spiritualistic monism of Buddhism. These spirits are bound by the action of Karma (the accumulated effects of all deeds in former existences), but owing to the differences in the manner of conceiving individual existence, that action is regarded differently from the Buddhistic method. To the Buddhist the soul is not a permanent individual entity passing as a unit from one state of existence or incarnation to another, but a dissoluble aggregate of qualities in which not individuality but the effect of Karma is the integrating factor. To the Jain the human spirit is an eternal entity which in its various incarnated lives Karma affects as a permanent individuality. Consequently Nirvana takes a different form in the two religions. Logically in Buddhism it is the annihilation of Karma as an integrating principle, in consequence of which the individual as such ceases to exist. In Jainism Nirvana is release of the soul from union with the body and from connection with matter, but the soul continues consciously to exist. Salvation is wrought through ascetic practises, guided by the three jewels of right faith, right knowledge, and right conduct. For the layman eight reincarnations are necessary to secure release, while the ascetic secures the same result by twelve years of strenuous self-denial, after which he may if he will at once enter Nirvana by *felo de se.* The monks are compelled to take the five major vows, practically identical with those of Buddhism. ### 4. Basis in Brahmanism. The great similarity of the two systems and also their mutual dislike led to patient search for the reasons of the resemblances and the differences. Especially have the religious life and obligations of the pre-Jain Brahman ascetic been under review. The result is, the discovery that of the Brahman ascetic of early times were demanded four of the five major vows, viz., Ahimsa, truthfulness, honesty, and continence. But besides these points, common to the three systems, there are others which are established as clearly pre-Jainistic. Thus it was required of the Brahman recluse not to change his residence during the rainy season, at other times the period of his stay in a place was limited, though in the later systems the bounds of his stay varied; the rules for dress in all three systems reduce to practically the same basis, and Brahman and Jain ritual provide for the elimination of hair and beard. Even the straining of drinking water is Brahmanic, and the equipment of cloth and begging-bowl is common to Brahman and Jain. Jainism stands revealed, therefore, as one of the two revolts against Brahmanic teaching, ritual, and doctrine which took form in the sixth century B.C., and for ten centuries threatened the extinction of the parent faith. Yet, like Buddhism, it borrowed thought and even much of its religious terminology and practise from Brahmanism. Its monks are called Yatis, a Brahmanic name for eremite, and the titles given the Jina are common-places in pre-Jain Brahmanism. ### 5. The System and its his History. On such a basis, in the sixth century B.C., in the north central part of India, Vardhamana, after twelve years of asceticism, launched system. His social status as a Kshatriya opened to him the ears of the wealthy, while his performance of the ascetic vows and the sanctity thus gained won him the reverence of the lower orders of the population. He laid the usual emphasis of the Brahman upon the evil in matter and on the value of the ascetic life as the means to evade it. The older vows were made more stringent; a theology with its heaven and hell and Nirvana was formulated. The system broke with Brahmanism in making its benefits extend to all castes and even to the outcasts, though it was affirmed that all preceding Jinas (twenty-three in number) were of the warrior caste. Its ascetics were called Nirgrantha, "freed from bonds," Yatis, "ascetics," or Sadhus, "holy ones." And since not all could follow the ascetic pattern, provision was made for the lay community. The members vowed obedience to the Jina, the law and the teacher; in the early morning they worshiped at home, and in the temple the image of the Jina, read and recited from the scriptures, sang hymns, and then at different times of the day practised their devotions. Meanwhile they had the privilege of contributing to the support of the monastics, and received the name of upasakas or "worshipers" and sravakas or "hearers." After eight reincarnations they were promised Nirvana. For the monk a more rigorous routine is prescribed, and a speedier release foretold. During the rainy season he seeks shelter in a monastery of the order, for then life is more abundant and movement pregnant with danger to it. For the remaining eight months he takes the road and wanders barefoot and bareheaded; he may not sleep in a bed nor take any conveyance, and may have as his only possessions his cloth, bowl, broom, and sacred books--indeed, these are not reckoned his own. He may not touch metal, may eat no fruit and drink no wine, light no fire, and take no bath except in water which has been previously used by another and has so been rendered void of life. He may not disturb the insects or vermin which torment his flesh, nor do anything that may harm even potential life. After twelve years thus spent he gains his goal and may seize the possession, or may continue in this life as a teacher. Moreover, his discipline covers the inner life as he gains mastery over his own mind, conscience, and heart. Thus the system was laid. In the fourth century B.C. differences of opinion respecting the stringency of the Jina's commands regarding clothing split the religion into two parts, the Svetambaras or "white-clothed" and the Digambaras or "air-clothed." The latter wore a minimum of clothing, sometimes none, and are possibly, even probably, the *Gymnosophoi* of Greek literature. The Svetambaras have both monks and nuns, the Digambaras do not admit women to the ascetic life. The former have divided into seven minor sects, differing only on lesser points of faith or practise. The religion spread to the west and south, the Svetambaras remaining in the northern portion, the Digambaras developing to the south. Its course can be trackd by inscriptions dated from the third pre-Christian century until, in the fifth Christian century, it is found far south of Central India. There it met the opposition of the Brahman sages Manikka Vasagar and Tiru Nana Sambandha, who were effective in staying its progress in the tenth century. It has never been a missionary religion in the sense that Buddhism has been, consequently its adherents have been confined to the peninsula. Its numbers, according to the census of 1901, are 1,334,148, though the authorities declare that more exact details would make the total greater, since many known Jains returned themselves simply as "Hindus." The institutions are the temples, the monasteries where the monks spend the rainy season, and the hospitals for animals, where the maimed and even the healthy are supported. A great deal of wealth is in the possession of adherents of the religion, and this is held at the service of the order. ### 6. The Literature. The literature of Jainism is as yet comparatively unknown, and until 1870 almost none of it beyond the Kalpa Sutra was in the possession of Occidentals. The general name corresponding to the word Scripture is Siddantha, under which term are included six classes of writings, viz.: twelve Angas, twelve Upangas, ten Painnas, six Ghedasutras, two sutras without special names, and four Mulasutras. There is constant reference in this literature to a class of writings called Purvas, or primitive scriptures, which took form perhaps as early as the fourth century B.C., but are either lost or embodied in the Angas. There are references also to the loss and recovery of these primitive scriptures such as lead to the suspicion that the sacred books of the Jains have passed through experiences like those of the Hebrews, Christians, Zoroastrians, and Confucians. At any rate, so far as known, the present literature does not contain anything recognized as Purva. The Angas are the authoritative scriptures of the Svetambaras, and the authoritative recension took place in the fourth century of our era. The language is the Prakrit, as is that of most of the other literature so far as it is known; some of it is in Gujarati. To each of the Angas there are subsidiary parts, just as there are Brahmanas to the Vedas. The Kalpa Sutra may be called the manual of the Svetambaras. The Jains who went southward developed a later literature different from the Angas, and indeed did much in the way of founding the literature of the Kanarese, Tamil and Telugu; consequently the Digambaras have their own sacred books apart from that of the rival sect. The whole of the Angas reproduce in their literary features the traits of other sacred books, the parts being of unequal merit, often evidently fragmentary, and covering a long period in their dates of origin. They have been subject to recension, in which harmonistic effort is clearly traceable. This often includes slokas or sections of much earlier literature, much as the Pentateuch contains bits of early folk-song like the song of Lamech or of the well. Moreover, commentaries exist which contain alleged quotations which are not in the extant texts, showing that parts have been lost. The codification took place, as is noted above, some 800 years after the origin of the religion. Two series of publications embodying the texts are in course of issue, one begun under the auspices of a wealthy Jain, the late Rao Bahadur Dhanapatisinha, in which some thirty treatises have been produced, with comment and explanation, at Calcutta and Bombay. The Jain Religious Book Society of Murshidabad is publishing the other, which has already duplicated the first series and has added a number not otherwise printed. GEO. W. GILMORE. BIBLIOGRAPHY: On the literature the most exhaustive study is by A. Weber, in *Indische Studien, * xvi.-xvii., Leipsic, 1883-84, reproduced in English in the *Indian Antiquary,* xvii.-xxi., 1888-92, and in his *Sacred Literature of the Jains, * Bombay, 1893. Consult also A. Guerinot, *Essai de bibliographie Jaina, * Paris, 1906. A very defective translation of the Kalpa Sutra appeared in London, 1848. H. Jacobi has made several of the Sutras available in English in *SBE, * xxi., xlv., with valuable introduction concerning the religion, and has edited the Kalpa Sutra, with introduction and notes, Leipsic, 1879, and the Tattvarthadhigama Sutra, ib. 1906. Other sutras have been edited by Leumann in *Abhandlungen für die Kunde des Morgenlandes,* vol. viii., and in *ZDMG,* vol. xlvi.; also by Hoernle, in *Bibliotheca Indica,* 2 vols., text, commentary and transl., Calcutta, 1888-90. On the religion the best single discussion is by J. G. Bühler, *Ueber die indische Sects der Jaina, *Vienna, 1887, Eng. transl., *On the Indian Sect of the Jainaa, *London, 1903. Consult: H. T. Coleridge, *Essays,* late ed., London, 1879 (good for description, not for explanation of origins); J. Bird, *Historical Researches on the Origin and Principles of the . . . Jaina Religion, * Bombay, 1847; E. Thomas, *Jainism, * London, 1877; J. Burgess, *Jain Cave Temples, * in Fergusson's *Cave Temples, * ib. 1880; idem, *Temples and Jaina Caves in Western India,* 2 vols., 55 plates, ib. 1881-1883; J. S. Warren, *Les Idées philosophiques et religieuses des Jainas, * in *Annales de Musée Guimet, x. * 321-411, Paris, 1887: E. W. Hopkins, *Religions of India,* pp. 280-297, Boston 1895 (not up to the standard of the rest of his book, his verdict is disparaging and condemnatory); Jogendra Nath Bhattacharjee, *Hindu Castes and Sects, * Calcutta, 1896; V. A. Smith, *The Jain Stupa and Other Antiquities of Mathura, * India Archæological Survey, Reports, vol. xx., 1901; A. Barth, *Bulletin des religions de l'Inde, * iv., Paris, 1902; *RHR, * xlv. 171-185 (by Barth), xlvii. 34-50 (by A. Guerenot). The files of the *ZDMG* contain much important matter by the few students of the subject, e.g., vol. i (by A. Weber), xxxii. 509 sqq., xxxiv. 247 sqq., xxxv. 667 sqq., xxxviii. 1 sqq., xl. 92 sqq. (all by Jacobi), xxxiv. 445 sqq. (by Klatt), xxxiv. 748 sqq. (by Oldenberg), xlviii (by Leumann, on the Jain legends). Similarly contributions have been made to the *Indian Antiquary * by various observers, including Hoernle and Bühler. The files of the *JRAS * contain occasional articles of value.
JAIR Jair

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAIR** (Hebr. Ya'ir and Ya'ir): An Old-Testament name which takes two forms and originally had as an element a divine name which has sloughed off. Ya'ir (II Sam. xxi. 19) was a Bethlehemite, and father of the Elhanan who slew Goliath of Gath, or his brother (I Chron. xx. 5). Ya'ir (Esther ii. 6) is the father of Mordecai, and also the name of a strong clan in the district east of the Jordan. With the last this article is concerned. Judges x. 3-5 speaks of a Jair who was one of the minor judges and ruled Israel twenty-two years, a period which falls within the interregna of the greater judges, and is included in the chronology which reckons 480 years between the Exodus and Solomon (I Kings vi. 1). Nöldeke identifies this Jair with the eponymous ancestor of the Jair clan. Though Jair the judge can find no place in the history of Israel, the Judges passage is serviceable in investigating the clan. The thirty cities there mentioned (the Hebrew for "cities" involves a word-play between the words for city and colt which the Greek *poleis* and *polous* reproduces) suggest thirty divisions of the clan, and in one of these cities, Camon, Jair is said to have been buried. Camon suggests the *Kamun* which Antiochus III. took on the march from Pella to Gephrun (Polybius, V., lxx. 12), which is located on an old road by the identification of Pella with the modern Tabakat Fahil and of Gephrun with Kazr Wadi el Ghafr, not far from Irbid. A Kamm and Kumem were located by Dr. Schumacher from six to ten miles east of Irbid. Kamm is a ruined city of considerable extent, Kumem a modern village a mile south of the road with remains of an old wall still showing; the former may be the Camon of Judges, and may indicate the region of the cities of Jair south of the Yarmuk and in the northern part of Gilead. Other Old-Testament passages speak of the tents (or tent-villages) of Jair. Num. xxxii. 41 tells of the conquest of these tents, but does not state the place of departure or the time: the intention of the compiler was to place it in the time of Moses; but that was not the original meaning, and the event must have taken place from a starting-point in the West Jordan land and when Israel was growing strong in the early days of the kingdom. The conclusion of commentators that the thirty cities grew from earlier "tent-villages" disregards the fact that this was not a region frequented by nomadic herders. Consequently the "tent-villages" of Jair indicate nomadic settlements, the "cities" rather the habitations of the settled portions of the clan, the former, on the basis of I Kings iv. 13, to be placed on the border of the desert. Yet this passage is a later addition and is not in the Septuagint. Deut. iii. 14 makes Jair conqueror of the whole region of Argob: Josh. xiii. 30 gives to Jair sixty cities. According to I Chron. ii. 23, the shepherds of the clan were in early times subdued. Num. xxxii. 41 makes Jair belong to the tribe of Manasseh. According to I Chron. ii. 21-23 the Judahite Hezron married a daughter of Machir, whose grandfather, Jair, possessed twenty-three towns in Gilead, representing a mingling of the two tribes in which Judah took the leadership. But this expresses a relationship of post-exilic times, and the number of cities has diminished. This account forms the bridge to the story in I Macc. v. 24-54 of the removal of the Gileadite Jews for security of life to Jerusalem: it was in part the Jews of the cities of Jair on whose account Judas was concerned. The passage in the Chronicler seems to have been taken in part from an old source. (H. GUTHE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: A. Kuenen, *De Stam Manasse, * in *ThT.*, xi (1877), 478 sqq.; G. Schumacher, *Northern Ajlun,* pp. 137-138, London, 1890; idem, *Das südliche Basan, * in *ZDPV*, xx (1897), 109, 173; *DB,* ii. 540; *EB,* ii. 2315; *JE,* vii. 65-66.
JAMAICA Jamaica

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMAICA.** See WEST INDIES.
JAMBLICHUS Jamblichus

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMBLICHUS.** See NEO-PLATONISM.
JAMES James

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMES.** See also JACOB.
JAMES James

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JAMES. The Apostles and the Brother of Jesus. James the Son of Zebedee. James the Son of Alphæus. James the Just. Brother, Step-brother, or Cousin of Jesus (§ 1). New-Testament Idea, Brother (§ 2). His Life and Work (§ 3). The Epistle of James. The Readers (§ 1). Aim, Contents, and Style (§ 2). Date, Canonicity, and Reception (§ 3). ### I. The Apostles and the Brother of Jesus: In the New Testament two, or better three, notable men bear the name of James. **1. James the Son of Zebedee:** In the Synoptic Gospels this James appears only in close connection with his brother John. Their father pursued the calling of a fisherman on the Lake of Galilee (Mark i. 19; Matt. iv. 21-22), perhaps near Capernaum (cf. Luke v. 10 with iv. 31, 38), with his sons and with the help of hired servants (Mark i. 20). His wife, Salome, was one of those companions of Jesus who cared for the needs of his daily life (Mark xv. 41; Luke viii. 3). It is uncertain whether Salome was in any way related to Jesus, for it is doubtful if the sister of Jesus' mother (John xix. 25) can be identified with Salome (Mark xv. 40). Certain only is her pious devotion to Jesus, whom she faithfully followed in his wanderings through Galilee, on his last journey to Jerusalem, and also on his way to crucifixion (Matt. xxvii. 56; Mark xv. 40). Her firm faith in the Messianic destiny of Jesus and her impetuous nature are shown in her somewhat rash prayer to the Lord that, in his kingdom, he should seat her sons on his right hand and on his left (Matt. xx. 20 sqq.). These characteristics she transmitted to her sons; of these, James seems to have been the elder, since in the lists of the Apostles and usually elsewhere he is named before John (Matt. x. 2; Mark ii. 17; cf. Luke vi. 14). It can not be determined from John i. 40 whether James had already come into contact with Jesus in the following of the Baptist at the Jordan; the summary way, however, in which both brothers were called by Jesus to become his disciples, and the readiness with which they obeyed ( Mark i. 19-20), make it appear probable that they were prepared for this summons. From that time they remained disciples of Jesus with all the burning zeal which characterized them. This zeal was not without its drawbacks; it could lead them into heartless fanaticism ( Luke ix. 54) and also inspire unbridled ambition ( Mark x. 35 sqq.); but it enabled them to endure resolutely the hardest sufferings with Jesus ( Mark x. 35 sqq.). How highly Jesus appreciated their fervent nature is apparent in his applying to them the epithet "sons of thunder" ( Mark iii. 17) and in his receiving them, with the equally impetuous Peter, into the inner circle of the twelve apostles ( Mark v. 37, ix. 2, xiii. 3 sqq., xiv. 33 sqq.). After the departure of the Lord, however, James seems to have become less prominent. Nevertheless, he soon took precedence over the other apostles as the first who gave his life for the faith, since he was executed by order of Herod Agrippa I ( Acts xii. 1, 2). **2. James, the Son of Alphæus: ** This James is mentioned with this name in the four lists of the apostles (Matt. x. 3; Mark iii. 18; Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13), but no other passage of the New Testament can be brought into connection with him or his family. Especially groundless is everything that has been asserted regarding a relationship of James Alphæus (see ALPHÆUS) and his house to Jesus, based on the identity of the names Alphæus and Cleophas. The statement of Hegesippus (in Eusebius, *Hist. eccl.*, III., xi.) that Cleophas was a brother of Joseph, the foster-father of Jesus, can not be accepted, and the identification of the names Alphæus and Cleophas can not be established. Possibly James Alphæus is alluded to in Matt. xxvii. 56; Mark xvi. 1, xv. 40; Luke xxiv. 10; if so, it may be inferred from these passages that James's mother was called Mary and belonged to the followers of Jesus, and that he had a brother called Joses, and that the epithet of "the little" was applied to him. Possibly this passage refers to another James of whom nothing further is known. It is altogether improbable, however, that in Luke vi. 16 and Acts i. 13 the designation "Judas of James" [R. V. "Judas the son of James" marg. or, "brother," as in A. V.] signifies that Judas was the brother of James Alphæus, since this designation can only mean "Judas the son of James," and a combination of these passages with those in which a Mary is named as the mother of James and Joses is quite impossible. But neither the apostle Judas Lebbæus (see JUDAS) nor Simon Zelotes is to be regarded as a brother of James Alphæus. Nothing further is heard of James Alphæus, except the legend that he was active in the southwest of Palestine and in Egypt, and was crucified in Ostrakine, in Lower Egypt (Nicephorus, ii. 40). ### 1. Brother, Step-Brother or Cousin of Jesus. **3. James the Just:** A James who was the Lord's brother, head of the community of Jerusalem, is mentioned as a different person from both the apostles in Matt. xiii. 55; Mark vi. 3; Acts xii. 17, xxi. 18; I Cor. xv. 7; Gal. i. 19, ii. 9-12, as well as James i. 1; Jude 1. Also, outside of the New Testament, by Josephus (*Ant. * XX., ix. 1), Hegesippus (in Eusebius, *Hist. eccl.*, II. 23), and other Church Fathers. The view of the early Church was that Jesus and this James were brothers, and James was distinguished from the two apostles of the same name. Clement of Alexandria expressly states that this view, which he himself rejected, was general in his time (*Strom.* vii. 93 sqq.). Tertullian refers to the marriage of Mary after the birth of Jesus and to the mention of his brothers in connection with her, as a proof of the reality of the humanity of Jesus (*De monogamia,* viii.; *De carne Christi, * vii.; "Against Marcion," 19). In the Apostolic Constitutions (ii. 55, vi. 12, 13), besides the twelve apostles and Paul, James, the Lord's brother, is mentioned as one of the advocates of catholic doctrine, and he is reckoned among the seventy disciples. Eusebius counts fourteen apostles; the twelve, Paul and James (on Isa. xvii. 5; *Hist. eccl.*, I., xii., II., i., VII., xix.), and when he once writes of James as the "so-called" brother of the Lord, the context shows that he is not suggesting a more distant relationship. When, however, the idea of the perpetual virginity of Mary gained ground in the Church, the brotherly relationship between Jesus and James was transformed into the more distant one of stepbrother, this view appearing in several popular writings such as the Proto-Gospel of James (ix. 2), the Gospel of Peter, the Gospel of pseudo-Matthew (viii. 4), the Gospel of Thomas (xvi.). and the History of Joseph (ii.). In the period after Epiphanius, the recognition of James as a son of Joseph and Mary is seldom met. On the other hand, the view of Origen, that James was a stepbrother of Jesus, was followed in the East by Ephraem, Basil, Gregory of Nyssa, Chrysostom, Cyril of Alexandria, Epiphanius, and later by Euthymius; in the West by Hilary, Ambrose, and Ambrosiaster. Alongside of this, however, arose the other opinion that the brothers of Jesus were cousins and were identical with the men of the same name among the apostles. It is possible that Clement of Alexandria entertained this view as well as the hypothesis that James was a stepbrother of Jesus (in Eusebius, *Hist. eccl.*, II., 1). The first assured defender is Jerome, who, in his writings against Helvidius, expounds it, but practically abandons it in his Commentary on Isaiah (xvii. 6), in that he counts fourteen apostles: the twelve, Paul, and the Lord's brother, James. Ambrose and Augustine express themselves even more doubtfully. Gradually, however, the hypothesis of identification was more and more widely accepted in the West. In the Middle Ages it was the predominant theory. On the other hand, it found so little favor in the East that two different festival days, one for James the Just and the other for James Alphæus, remained traditional. ### 2. New-Testament Idea, Brother. The statements of the New Testament favor the view that James was a full brother of Jesus and the son of Mary. Matt. i. 25 and Luke ii. 7 imply that, after the birth of Jesus, a conjugal relation existed between Joseph and Mary and that they had children. Whenever in the Gospels brothers of Jesus are mentioned, they appear in such a connection with Joseph and Mary, or with Mary alone, that they are clearly regarded as their children ( John ii. 12; Matt. xii. 47; Mark vi. 3; Acts i. 14). The designation of Mary as the mother of Jesus, employed in these passages, implies that the word brothers is used in the same proper sense. They could not therefore have been stepbrothers of Jesus, sons of a former wife of Joseph or of a former husband of Mary, or foster-children of Mary (thus J. P. Lange); and just as little only cousins of Jesus and identical with the apostles James Alphæus, Judas Lebbaeus, and Simon Zelotes. Moreover, nowhere in the New Testament is James the brother of the Lord called James Alphaeus, and nowhere is the word brother used in a sense of distant relationship. That James Alphæus is a brother of the apostles Judas Lebbæus and Simon Zelotes is absolutely excluded by the way in which they are named together, to be distinguished from other brothers who are alluded to in the same way. Besides this the brothers of the Lord are not only named alongside of the apostles as distinct from them (ut sup.), but they appear also as a circle, separate in every way from the disciples of Jesus ( Matt. xii. 46; John vii. 5). Only after the departure of the Lord does there arise a closer companionship of the brethren of the Lord with the apostles, and James gains apostolic rank as head of the mother-church in Jerusalem, while still remaining distinct from the apostles ( Gal. i. 19, ii. 9; I Cor. xv. 7). ### 3. His Life and Work. The story of the material and spiritual life of James, the brother of the Lord, is quite clearly defined in its outlines. During the public ministry of Jesus, his brothers adopted a skeptical attitude, probably because they could not reconcile his lofty claims with the commonplace conditions in which they had lived together in their home. Jesus complains of a lack of recognition on the part of his own relatives (Mark vi. 4), and he could not count them as his spiritual kindred (Mark iii. 31-34) After the miracle of the loaves and fishes in the desert it seems that then the idea of his Messianic task may have dawned upon them, but the humility of his attitude prevented them from confidently believing in him. Even at the time of his Passion, the brothers seem to have separated themselves from his mother, who now believed in him (John xix. 27). Nevertheless, the superhuman patience with which Jesus went to his death may have won their hearts, especially that of James; for to him was vouchsafed an appearance of the risen Christ (I Cor. xv. 7), which affirmed his faith. He therefore appears after the ascension of the Lord as a member of the Christian community, wherein he won a leading position after the death of James, the son of Zebedee, and the flight of Peter. In general, his activity was confined to Jerusalem (Gal. i. 17). He took part in the council of the apostles with Peter and John as one of the three pillars of the Jewish-Christian Church (Gal. ii. 1 sqq.; Acts xv. 1 sqq.). There he showed himself free from the pharisaical and strictly legal views of the Judaizing opponents of Paul who desired to impose upon Gentile Christians the full observance of the Mosaic laws. At the same time he gave the hand of fellowship to Paul in proof of their thorough agreement on the basis of the Gospel. Nevertheless he considered it important that Jewish Christians should strictly observe the laws of their fathers and should require for these laws a certain respect on the part of the Gentile Christians. The standpoint of James also appears in the influence exerted by his friends in Antioch (Gal. ii. 11 sqq.) upon Peter. The Ebionite party in the post-apostolic age endeavored to cover itself with the authority of James and to envelop him with a legendary atmosphere of glory. According to Epiphanius (*Haer.* XXX., xvi.), there were legends even of his ascension to heaven. Concerning the death of James there are two contradictory accounts. Hegesippus relates (Eusebius, *Hist. eccl.*, II. 23) that he was thrown from the tower by the Pharisees, not long before the beginning of the Roman-Jewish war (cf. Zahn, *Forschungen,* vi. 235, Leipsic, 1900), therefore, about 66 A.D. According to Josephus (*Ant.* XX., ix. 1), however, the party of the Sadducees made use of the change in the proconsulship in 62 or 63 A.D. to have James stoned to death, against the will of the Pharisees. It is, however, strongly suspected that this passage of Josephus is an interpolation (Zahn, ut sup. vi. 301 sqq.). On the other hand, the date given by Hegesippus is supported by the pseudo-Clementine literature, according to which James survived Peter, and also by the Chronicon Paschale (p. 592), and therefore is to be preferred. ### II. The Epistle of James: 1. The Readers. This bears a title in the opening verse which names the writer and those for whom it was destined. To see in this only the dedication to a dogmatic writing, or a homily, is counter-indicated by the formal salutation common in Greek letters. Neither should it be assumed that this epistolary form only served the literary fiction of an unknown writer, nor that it is a title added to the writing about 200 A.D., since in both cases the author would probably have been called an apostle. Therefore, the words in the title "to the twelve tribes which are scattered abroad" may well be used to determine the first readers. This expression, however, "the twelve tribes" is so specifically national and Israelitic that it can not be referred even figuratively to all Christianity. According to the title, therefore, the Epistle is addressed to the whole Jewish people outside of Palestine. This designation of the readers is limited, however, by the statement that the writer calls himself "a servant of the Lord Jesus Christ"; therefore he assumes that his readers recognize the authority of Jesus. Those readers are therefore neither Jewish and Gentile Christians nor Christians of Jewish and Gentile descent nor principally Gentile Christians; and just as little are they Jewish Christians within or without Palestine: they are Jewish Christians living outside of Palestine. They can, therefore, only be called the twelve tribes in the dispersion in the sense that they were the true Israel so far as it existed outside the Holy Land. These Jewish Christians living outside of Palestine are not to be sought only in one place or in one limited district; indeed, the generalness and fulness of the expression "the twelve tribes which are scattered abroad" render it certain that all Jewish Christians living outside of Palestine were meant, and make it extremely probable that there already were such far and wide. The inferences from the title are not refuted by the letter itself, but partly confirmed. It is not justifiable to cite the silence of the author regarding the Law, the temple, and the unbelieving members of his race against the Jewish origin of the readers, because he is not altogether silent concerning the Law ( ii. 8 sqq.) and had no occasion to speak of the temple and unbelieving Jews. That the readers are Christians and not Jews is to be seen from ii. 1, and the whole tone of the Epistle is opposed to a narrow local limitation of the circle of readers. In this epistle, not only is there no personal relation whatever between the writer and the readers, no special salutation, etc., but the conditions referred to are of a very general character. It is not, therefore, justifiable, because the conditions treated of in the Epistle of James appear to point more to Palestine than to the diaspora, to assume that the Epistle was originally addressed to the community of Jerusalem and was later sent to communities outside of Palestine. The Epistle of James is therefore not in the true sense of the word a letter, but rather an address in the form of a circular letter to all Jewish Christians within the pale of Christianity, which was already quite widely disseminated. ### 2. Aim, Contents, and Style. What, however, the author recognizes as fundamental in the spiritual condition of his readers is the worldliness and superficiality of their Christianity. With the multifarious sufferings (i. 2) and the delay in the second coming of Christ (v. 7-8) they began to lose patience and their hearts were divided between God and the world (i. 7). Alongside of flattery to the rich, there is contempt for the poor (ii. 1 sqq.), there is also bitterness against the former (iv. 11, v. 9). Alongside of the prayer for means to satisfy their pleasures (iv. 3), there is impious security on the part of the well-to-do (iv. 13 sqq.). Stress is laid upon the profession of faith (ii. 14), which was a subject of wrangling and dispute, and every one was eager to impart instruction (chap. iii.); but there were few signs of application of faith to practical life. These conditions are not to be derived from Judaism so much as from a stagnation of the spiritual life succeeding to a period of loving enthusiasm. The aim and contents correspond to these spiritual conditions of the readers. After an exhortation to be steadfast and prudent in trials, there follows the lesson that the temptation to fail in the hour of trial proceeds from man's own sinful inclinations, not from God, the giver of all good, the author of regeneration by the word of truth (i. 13-18), and to this is attached the admonition to assimilate this word of truth in a humble and obedient spirit (i. 19-27). Later on there are special warnings against the errors and faults named above. The conclusion consists of various brief admonitions, v. 12-20. The simple style of the letter suits its practical contents admirably, following the method of the didactic writings of the Old Testament, in which the single proverbs are strung together in groups like rows of pearls. Instead of the precision of Paul's keen, logical thinking, there is found more rhetorical amplification. The Greek is comparatively pure, although there are not a few Hebraisms. While this Gospel is designated as a law, it is yet the perfect law of liberty (i. 25), not, like the law of the Old Testament, a heavy yoke but to be engrafted in the heart (i. 21), so that man, by his own initiative, responds to the divine will. Inasmuch as the Gospel is essentially identical with the law of the Old Testament, everything that concerns the person of the mediator of the new revelation is placed in the background, even the name of Christ is mentioned only twice, and the synoptic concepts of the Son of Man and the kingdom of heaven are lacking. Nevertheless, the moral teachings of Jesus, principally those of the Sermon on the Mount, are much more freely used than in any other writing of the New Testament. Therefore this epistle is somewhat in disaccord with the Apostle Paul, whose attention is directed more to that side of the Gospel which is in opposition to the Law. It has even been held that ii. 21, 24 (cf. with Rom. iii. 28, iv. 2; Gal. ii. 16) is in irreconcilable opposition to Paul; indeed, that it shows a conscious polemic against him. This difficulty can not be avoided by assuming that the Epistle of James was earlier than the Pauline epistles which contain the divergent propositions, which would not affect the objective difference; indeed the suspicion of conscious contradiction would merely be transferred from James to Paul. But this view of the chronological relation of the writings of Paul and James is untenable, for there is no indication that the formula "to be justified by faith" or the use of the passage Gen. xv. 6 in support of this, was common, as is assumed in this epistle, on the part of its readers. Indeed it remains doubtful whether the Epistle of James is intended to combat the standpoint of the Pauline epistles. In any case this epistle is in accord with Paul in what it really endeavors to prove, that is, that faith without works can not bring salvation (cf. II Cor. v. 10), and that a faith which does not find expression in moral conduct is utterly worthless (I Cor. xiii. 2). Paul regards works as unimportant for justification, while James looks upon works as a condition of justification. While Paul would not have said that there was a justification by the works of faith in the sense of the Epistle of James, because he has a stricter conception of what constitutes conduct well-pleasing to God, his idea of a moral righteousness of believers is approximately that of the Epistle of James. Therefore, there is, if not perfect agreement on this point between James and Paul, at least only an unessential and not an irreconcilable opposition in principle. It is generally recognized that the polemic of the Epistle of James is only directed against a distorted and one-sided Paulinism. The opinion that this epistle was designed to attack Paul's teaching, though unsuccessfully, is without foundation. What is combated is not any doctrine in itself, but only a false standard of conduct. It denounces a lack of moral application of faith, dependent upon a formalizing of Christianity and palliated by a misuse of Pauline doctrine. ### 3. Date, Canonicity, and Reception. These results show that the epistle should be placed in a relatively late period of the Apostolic Age when the Church had attained a considerable extent and Christian life had lost something of its first fresh vigor. It is not the earliest or even one of the earliest of the New-Testament writings. The synagogue [so the Am. R.V., i. 2] is not a Jewish one, as though a common use of the synagogue still existed with Jews and Christians; it is a meeting-place for Christians, which they control (ii. 3). The conception of the imminence of the Parousia (v. 8) appears even beyond the Apostolic Age. That the Epistle of James only addresses Jewish Christians does not prove that there were not also Gentile Christians, and if it contains more passages recalling the sayings of Jesus than any other of the Apostolic epistles, that is to be attributed to its theological character, and perhaps to the employment of written sources. Its use in the Church begins at an early period. It is probably cited in I Peter, in I Clement, in the Shepherd of Hernias, and by Justin Martyr. It was certainly used by Irenæus, Clement of Alexandria, Dionysius of Alexandria, Cyril of Jerusalem, Didymus, and Ephraem, and it was also included in the Peshito version. Origen, who is the first to cite it expressly as a writing of James, the Lord's brother, looks upon it as uncanonical; Eusebius counts it among the *antilegomena, * and Theodore of Mopsuestia rejected it. Jerome says it was regarded as pseudonymous in the Latin Church, but he includes it among the canonical books, and his influence and Augustine's assured i ts acceptance as canonical. This view was not disputed until Erasmus expressed certain doubts. Luther thought it a "right strawy epistle" (*recht stroherne Epistel*), written by a certain pious man, and Cajetan expressed doubts as to its authenticity. Calvin defended it, but Luther's views were accepted by the Magdeburg Centuriators and by some Lutheran dogmatists, as well as by the Calvinist Wetstein. In modern times the opposition to its authenticity was begun by De Wette and Schleiermacher. Naturally no use could be made of the title in the debate as to the origin of the epistle on the assumption that it was added at a later period in order to gain for the epistle (really the work of an unknown author) acceptance in the canon through a title bearing the name of an apostle. Still less tenable is the hypothesis that the epistle, apart from the two (assumed as interpolated) mentions of Christ (i. 1 and ii. 1), was the work of an unknown Jew. The method of interpolation assumed is devoid of motive and without analogy. The introduction of Christian ideas into Jewish writings bearing the name of highly revered Jews is often met, but is entirely different from the attempt assumed here, to make the author of a Jewish writing appear to be a Christian. Besides this, much in the Epistle of James is clearly Christian, apart from the two supposed additions (i. 18-21, 25, ii. 8, 12, 14-26). If, then, "James, a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ," was originally named as author of the epistle, there can be no doubt who is to be understood thereby. James, the son of Zebedee, of whom Jäger (*Zeitschrift für lutherische Theologie,* 1878) thinks as the author, was no longer living in the period after the beginning of Paul's mission (Acts xii. 2); James Alphæus withdraws entirely into the background in this time, and either of them would have been designated as an apostle. The only James who is prominent in this period and needed no more precise designation is James, the Lord's brother, the head of the community of Jerusalem. And there are no imperative grounds for refusing to ascribe the epistle to him. The vacillation in the traditions of the early church as to the canonical acceptance of the epistle is explained by the facts that James was not an apostle; that he became the patron-saint of the Ebionites, and that the epistle seemed to contain a polemic against Paul. The author appears rather to have been a man of a practical turn of mind, pious and prayerful, who does not fail to recognize the essential superiority of the Gospel over the Law, but who, nevertheless, emphasizes the relationship of the morality of the former to that of the latter. All this perfectly suits James, the Lord's brother, as known through the New Testament and Hegesippus. It may therefore be assumed that James, the Lord's brother, wrote this pastoral letter in Palestine for the Jewish Christians outside of Palestine, at a time when the activity of Paul had ceased, either because of his captivity, or his death. For the Protevangelium of James see APOCRYPHA, B, I., 1. F. SIEFFERT. BIBLIOGRAPHY: On the general topic consult: *DB*, ii. 540-548; *EB*, ii. 2317-26. On the three Jameses consult the histories of the Apostolic Age, e.g., Schaff, *Christian Church*, i. 199 sqq., 265 sqq., 272 sqq., et passim; A. C. McGiffert, *Apostolic Age*, Passim, New York, 1897. The question of the relationship of the third James to Jesus is discussed in *DB*, i. 320-326; by J. B. Lightfoot in his Commentary on Galatians, in a special section; in the Introduction to Mayor's Commentary on James (see below); in F. W. Farrar, *Early Days of Christianity*, chap. xix., London, 1884; in Schegg's commentary (see below); and often in the other commentaries. Consult also W. Patrick, *James the Lord's Brother, * Edinburgh, 1906. For the questions concerning the authenticity, date, contents, etc., of the epistle consult in general the works on Introduction to the New Testament--especially those of Jülicher, 1894 Eng, transl., Edinburgh, 1904; T. Zahn, 1900; and B. W. Bacon, 1900--and those on New Testament theology, especially that of Beyschlag, Eng. transl., Edinburgh, 1896. Works on special topics are: W. G. Schmidt, *Léhregehalt des Jakobusbriefes*, Leipsic, 1869; P. J. Gloag, *Introduction to the Catholic Epistles*, Edinburgh, 1887 W. C. van Manen, in *ThT*, xxviii (1894), 478-496; A. H. Cullen, *Teaching of James; Studies in the Ethics of the Epistle of James*, London, 1904; M. Meinertz, *Der Jakobusbrief und sein Verfasser*, Freiburg, 1905. Of commentaries on the epistle the best for English readers is by J. B. Mayor, London, 1897. Others which may be mentioned are: W. Augusti, Lemgo, 1801; J. W, Greshof, Essen, 1830; M. Schneckenburger, Stuttgart, 1832; G. W, Theile, Leipaic, 1833; C. R. Jachmann, ib. 1838; F. H. Kern, Tübingen, 1838; C. A. Scharling, Copenhagen, 1841; C. E. Cellérier Geneva, 1850; A. Neander, Eng. transl., New York, 1852; A. Wiesinger, Königsberg, 1854; De Wette, Leipsic, 1865; F. Graupp, Breslau, 1861; R. Wardlaw, Edinburgh, 1862; H. Boumann, Utrecht, 1865; A. H. Blom, Dort, 1869; H. Ewald, Göttingen, 1870; J. C. C. Hoffmann, Nördlingen, 1875; H. Alford, *Greek Testament*, vol. iv., London, 1877; E. H. Plumptre, in *Cambridge Bible, * Cambridge, 1878; J. T. Demarest, New York, 1879; D. Erdmann, Berlin, 1888; K. F. Keil, Leipsic, 1883; P. Schegg, Munich, 1883; W. Beyschlag, Göttingen, 1888; A. F, Manoury, Bar-le-Duc, 1888; C. F. Deems, New York, 1889; E. T. Winkler, Philadelphia, 1889; A. Plummer, in *Expositor's Bible*, London, 1891; B. Weiss, in *TU*, viii. 2 (1892); P. Feine, Eisenach, 1893; J. Adderley, London, 1900; W. H. Bennett, in *Century Bible*, ib. 1901; C. A. Bigg, ib. 1902; C. Brown, ib. 1906; F. J. Taylor, *Fourteen Addresses*, ib. 1907.
JAMES, SAINT, OF COMPOSTELLA, ORDER OF James, Saint, of Compostella, Order of

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMES, SAINT, OF COMPOSTELLA, ORDER OF:** A military order, founded in 1161, as the Knights of St. James of the Sword (*de Spada*), by Pedro Fernandez of Fuente Encalada, in the diocese of Astorga, Spain, united in 1170 with the Canons of San Loyo (St. Eligius) of Compostella. Toward the end of the century it was confirmed by Pope Celestine III. In purpose and character the order was like those of Alcantara and Calatrava (qq.v.), but it never equaled them in importance. It came to an end in 1835. See COMPOSTELLA. (O. ZÖCKLER†.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: G. Giucci, *Iconografia storica degli ordini religiosi e cavallereschi*, i. 96-100, Rome, 1836; P. B. Gams, *Die Kirchengeschichte von Spanien*, iii., 1, p. 56, Regensburg, 1876; Currier, *Religious Orders*, p. 217.
JAMES, JOHN ANGELL James, John Angell

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMES, JOHN ANGELL:** English Congregationalist; b. at Blandford Forum (17 m. n.e. of Dorchester, Dorset) June 6, 1785; d. at Birmingham Oct. 1, 1859. After serving four years as an apprentice to a linen-draper at Poole, Dorset, he entered the theological academy at Gosport in 1802, and qualified under the Toleration Act as a dissenting preacher the following year. He was called to Carr's Lane Chapel, Birmingham, in 1805, and ordained pastor there early the following year. He remained in this pastorate till his death. He was chairman of the board of education of Spring Hill College, Birmingham (now Mansfield College, Oxford), from 1838 till his death; and in 1846 he was one of the chief promoters of the Evangelical Alliance. He was held in high esteem as a preacher and author, and as a public man. Though a Calvinist in creed, he laid more stress on Christian duty than on doctrinal niceties. He published numerous single sermons and addresses and a dozen small volumes, of which the best known are *Christian Charity * (London, 1828); and *The Anxious Enquirer after Salvation * (Birmingham, 1834), which was widely circulated in England and America and translated into Welsh, Gaelic, and Malagasy. Other writings by James will be found in his *Works * (17 vols., London, 1860-64). BIBLIOGRAPHY: James's *Autobiography * was published as the last volume of the *Works*, ut sup. Consult also: J. Campbell, *Review of J. A. James' History and Character*, London, 1859; R. W. Dale, *Life and Letters of John Angell James*, ib. 1861; *DNB*, xxix. 215-217.
JAMES, MONTAGUE RHODES James, Montague Rhodes

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMES, MONTAGUE RHODES:** Church of England; b. at Livermere (6 m. n.e. of Bury St. Edmund's), Suffolk, Aug. 1, 1862. He studied at King's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1885), and in 1903 was appointed Sanders Reader in bibliography. Since 1905 he has been provost of King's College, and is also director of the Fitzwilliam Museum. He has written or edited *Psalms of Solomon* (in collaboration with H. E. Ryle; Cambridge, 1891); *Testament of Abraham * (in collaboration with W. E. Barnes; 1892); *The Gospel according to Peter and the Revelation of Peter* (in collaboration with J. A. Robinson; London, 1892); *Apocrypha Anecdota* (2 vols., Cambridge, 1893-97); *On the Abbey of St. Edmund at Bury* (1895); *The Life and Miracles of St. William of Norwich * (in collaboration with A. Jessopp, 1896); *Sources of Archbishop Parker's Collection of Manuscripts* (1899) ; *Verses in the Windows of Canterbury Cathedral* (1901); *Ancient Libraries of Canterbury and Dover* (1904); and *Ghost Stories of an Antiquary * (1904); as well as descriptive catalogues of the manuscripts (especially western) in the libraries of Eton College (Cambridge, 1895), the Fitzwilliam Museum (1895), and Lambeth Palace (1900), and of the following Cambridge colleges: Jesus (1895), King's (1895), Sidney Sussex (1895), Peterhouse (1899), Trinity (4 vols., 1900-05), Emmanuel (1904), Pembroke (1905), Christ's (1905), Clare (1906), Queen's (1906), Trinity Hall (1907), and Gonville and Caius (2 vols., 1907-08).
JAMES, WILLIAM James, William

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMES, WILLIAM:** American psychologist and philosopher; b. in New York Jan. 11, 1842. He studied in private schools, then at the Lawrence Scientific School and the Harvard Medical School (M.D., 1869). He has taught at Harvard since 1876, having been instructor in philosophy 1872-76, assistant professor of anatomy and physiology 1876-80, assistant professor of philosophy 1880-85, professor of philosophy 1885-89, professor of psychology 1889-97, and professor of philosophy again since 1897. He holds a position in the front rank of modern psychologists, and in this field has exercised a potent influence both in Europe and America. In philosophy he represents what may be called empirical idealism as opposed to absolute idealism. His works have been widely translated, and are characterized by keen analysis, apt illustration, lucid exposition, and a charm of style rarely encountered in works on philosophy. He has published *The Principles of Psychology* (2 vols., New York, 1890); *Psychology--Briefer Course* (1892); *The Will to Believe, and Other Essays in Popular Philosophy * (1897); *Human Immortality: Two Supposed Objections to the Doctrine * (Boston, 1898); *Talks to Students on Psychology, and to Teachers on Some of Life's Ideals * (New York, 1899); *Varieties of Religious Experience: A Study in Human Nature * (1902), Gifford Lectures delivered at Edinburgh 1900-01, a work which has attracted much attention, and establishes his claim to mention in a religious encyclopedia; *Pragmatism: A New Name for Some Old Ways of Thinking * (1907); and *Pluralistic Universe * (Hibbert *Lectures; * 1909). In 1908 a volume of *Essays Philosophical and Psychological * was published in his honor in New York.
JAMESON, ANNA BOWNELL Jameson, Anna Brownell

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAMESON,** jê'me-sun, **ANNA BROWNELL:** English authoress; b. in Dublin, Ireland, May 17, 1794; d. at Ealing (9 m. w. of St. Paul's, London), Middlesex, Mar. 17, 1860. She was the daughter of Denis Brownell Murphy, an Irish miniature-painter, who came to England in 1798 and settled with his family at London in 1803. After spending a number of years as governess in the family of the marquis of Winchester, and in other noted families, she contracted an unhappy marriage with Robert Jameson, a young barrister, in 1825. She practically separated from her husband in 1829, when he went to Dominica as puisne judge. In 1836 she joined him in Canada, where he had secured, through her influence, an important legal appointment in 1833, but left him after six months, though she did not return to England till 1838. In the course of her literary work she spent much time in France, Italy, and Germany. Her most important work is *Sacred and Legendary Art*, in four sections, *Legends of the Saints * (2 vols., London, 1848), *Legends of the Monastic Orders as Represented in the Fine Arts* (1850), *Legends of the Madonna as Represented in the Fine Arts * (1852), and *The History of Our Lord as Exemplified in Works of Art * (2 vols., 1864), which was completed by Lady Eastlake. Other works deserving mention are the popular *Diary of an Ennuyée * (1826); the excellent *Characteristics of Women * (2 vols., 1832), essays on Shakespeare's heroines dedicated to Fanny Kemble; *Visits and Sketches * (4 vols., 1834), a charming work; *Winter Studies and Summer Rambles in Canada. * (3 vols., 1838); and *Memoirs and Essays * (1846). In her later life Mrs. Jameson became interested in the work of Sisters of Charity and wrote *Sisters of Charity * (1855) and *The Communion of Labour * (1856). BIBLIOGRAPHY: G. Macpherson, *Memoirs of the Life of Anna Jameson*, London, 1878; *DNB*, xxix. 230-232.
JANNES AND JAMBRES Jannes and Jambres

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JANNES AND JAMBRES:** The names given in II Tim. iii. 8 to the adversaries of Moses, who opposed their magic to his miracles, but were overcome by him (Ex. vii. 11 sqq.). Paul derived the names from Jewish tradition. Jambres appears in the forms *Yambris, Yombros; * the Talmudists write it *mamre'* and *mamrey*, "the rebel." *Jannes* appears as *Yannis* and *Yonos*, and in the Talmud as *Yohannan* (*Yohanne*). Buxtorf and Levy consider this last to be the original form; but the analogy of Jambres suggests that it also had an adjectival quality expressing a hostile character and that it was later confounded with the usual name Johannes. The names probably read *Yani we Yamri*, Aram. *Yanne we Yamre*, "he who seduces and he who makes rebellious." Jewish tradition makes them sons of Balaam (Targum of Jonathan on Num. xxii. 22), and places their rise at the time the Pharaoh gave command to kill the first-born of Israel (*Sanhedrin*, f. 106a; *Sotah* 11a), and supposes them to have been teachers of Moses, the makers of the golden calf (Midrash Tanhuma, f. 115b), and to have accompanied their father Balaam. These names were doubtless familiar to the apostle educated in the school of Gamaliel, and they seem also to have been well known in the heathen world. Origen and Ambrose mention an apocryphal book about Jannes and Mambres (see PSEUDEPIGRAPHA, OLD TESTAMENT, II., 37). The Pythagorean Numenius (second century) knew of the two Egyptian magi (Eusebius, *Praeparatio evangelica*, ix. 8), Apuleius had heard of them (*Apologia*, ii.). The two names occur in the Gospel of Nicodemus (chap. v.), in the *Martyrium Petri et Pauli* (chap. xxxiv.; R. A. Lipsius, *Acta apostolorum apocrypha*, Leipsic, 1891, pp. 148-149), in the *Acta Petri et Pauli * (chap. lv.; Lipsius, ut sup. p. 202), and elsewhere. The apostle has been blamed for employing so unimportant a tradition, but may be justified by the resemblance between these men and the false teachers of II Tim. iii. 6 sqq. C. VON ORELLI. BIBLIOGRAPHY: Schürer, *Geschichte*, iii. 292-294, Eng. transl., II., iii. 149-150. The forms are discussed in the lexicons; e.g.: J. Buxtorf, ed. of Basel, 1639, pp. 945 sqq.; J. C. Suicerus, *Thesaurus ecclesiasticus*, s. v. "Iannes"; J. A. Fabricius, *Codex pseudepigraphus Veteris Testamenti*, i. 813 sqq., Hamburg, 1723; *DB*, ii. 549; *EB*, ii. 2327-29; *JE*, vii. 71.
JANOW, MATTHIAS OF Janow, Matthias of

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JANOW,** ya'nef, **MATTHIAS OF:** The first of the so-called precursors of Huss; d. in Prague Nov. 30, 1394. He descended from a noble Bohemian family and studied theology in Prague and Paris, where he remained nine years, to which was due his title of *magister Parisiensis.* In 1381 he was appointed canon in the cathedral of St. Vitus in Prague and confessor. He was not a great preacher, but exercised influence through his pastoral labors and writings. He considered that the abuses of the Church started from the papal schism, and that they could be healed only by moral renovation. Therefore he was intent upon church reform. In his writings he addressed himself to the common people. The reforms which he advocated were the abolition of all human additions to Christianity (doctrinal and ceremonial), and a return of believers to the love of Jesus and the simple foundation on which rested the Apostolic Church. He laid special stress on frequent communion, since he regarded the Lord's Supper as the most important means for spiritual growth, and emphasized the common priesthood of believers. He was a diligent student of the Bible and wrote from 1388 to 1392 various treatises which he later collected under the title *Regulae veteris et novi testamenti*. Parts of this work were erroneously ascribed to Huss and embodied in the Nuremberg collection of his works (vol. i., pp. 376-471). (J. LOSERTH.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. P. Jordan, *Die Vorläufer des Hussitentums in Böhmen*, Leipsic, 1846; F. Palacky, *Geschichte von Böhmen*, iii. 1, pp. 173 sqq., Prague, 1851; idem, *Documenta Joannis Hus*, pp. 699 sqq., ib. 1869 (the retractation of Janow); E. H. Gillett, *Life and Times of John Hus*, pp. 26 sqq., Philadelphia, 1870; A. H. Wratislaw, *John Hus*, pp. 61 sqq., London, 1882; J. Loserth, *Wiclif and Hus*, ib. 1889; Count Lützow, *John Hus*, pp. 3-60, ib. 1909.
JANSEN, CORNELIUS, JANSENISM Jansen, Cornelius, Jansenism

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JANSEN, CORNELIUS, JANSENISM. Origin of Movement (§ 1). Cornelius Jansen (§ 2). Jansenism Condemned by Pope (§ 3). Arnauld and Pascal (§ 4). Quesnel. The Bull Unigenitus (§ 5). Acceptants and Appellants (§ 6). Convulsionists (§ 7). Close of Controversies (§ 8). ### 1. Origin of Movement. The religious movement known as Jansenism originated in the controversy on the doctrine of grace. It divided the Roman Catholic Church of France for over a century and developed a puritanical and separatist spirit in many ways analogous to that of French Calvinism. Since the writings of Augustine, after Paul, chiefly determined the belief of both Luther and Calvin, the Counter-Reformation was driven into an attitude of practical, though veiled, hostility toward his special teachings. They had had a powerful influence in the Middle Ages on the mystics and the scholastics, which left its mark on the Thomistic theology of the Dominican order. At the Council of Trent, in regard to the doctrines of grace and of sin, they opposed the Scotist tendency toward semi-Pelagianism exemplified in the Franciscans and Jesuits. These latter, however, were victorious in the main, and soon boldly developed their deductions from the concessions made to them. The Pauline and Augustinian doctrine was now upheld especially by Michael Bajus (q.v.), professor of Louvain. The Franciscans obtained the condemnation of seventy-six of his propositions in 1567 and 1579. When the Jesuit Molina in 1588 taught semi-Pelagianism, the Dominicans brought serious charges against him. In order to settle the dispute between the two orders, Clement VIII. convoked in 1597 a *congregatio de auxiliis * to define decisively the relation of grace to conversion, but it was dissolved in 1607 by Paul V. As the gulf between the Roman Catholic Church and the churches of the Reformation became wider, the spirit of semi-Pelagianism in life and doctrine assumed larger dimensions in the Roman Catholic Church, and as Thomism degenerated into a lifeless scholasticism, it is not strange that the doctrine of Augustine became, in 1612, a new revelation for two young and zealous students of the University of Louvain, Cornelius Jansen and Duvergier de Hauranne, afterward abbé of St. Cyran (see D UVERGIER DE H AURANNE). ### Cornelius Jansen. Cornelius Jansen (b. at Acquoy in North Holland Oct. 28, 1585; d. at Ypres [66 m. w. of Brussels, Belgium] May 6, 1638) studied theology at the college of Adrian VI. in Louvain, where he formed an intimate acquaintance with Duvergier. He declined a position as teacher of philosophy, hating Aristotle as the father of scholasticism, and believing Plato's ideas of God and virtue superior to those of some Roman Catholic theologians. As president of the college of St. Pulcheria he taught theology. By continually reading the writings of Augustine, Jansen came to the conviction that the Roman Catholic theologians of both parties had deviated from the doctrine of the primitive Church, and in 1621 he resolved, with his friend Duvergier, to work for reform. For this purpose he entered into intimate connections with prominent Irish divines, and with the leaders of the new French Congregation of the Oratory. At his instigation, the University of Louvain excluded Jesuits from positions as teachers, and, in behalf of the university, he undertook journeys to Madrid, in 1623 and 1627, with reference to certain encroachments of the Jesuits. In 1630 he was appointed regius professor of Holy Scripture in Louvain, and in 1636 bishop of Ypres. He laid down the results of his studies of Augustine in his comprehensive work, *Augustinus, seu doctrina Sancti Augustini de humanae naturae sanitate, aegritudine, medicina adversus Pelagianos et Massilienses * (3 vols., Louvain, 1640). The first volume gives a historical exposition of the semi-Pelagian heresies; the second sets forth the Augustinian doctrine as to the state of innocence and the fall; while the third treats of the grace of Christ and of predestination in the spirit of Augustine. While the work was still in the press at Louvain, strenuous efforts were made by the Jesuit party there, through the papal nuncio at Cologne, to prohibit its appearance, but in vain. It was immediately reprinted in Paris and Rouen. The bull *In eminenti * (1642) reproached Jansen for the renewal of the heresies of Bajus, but he had then been dead for four years. It was only after a resistance of several years on the part of bishops, universities, and provincial estates that the bull was published in the Spanish Netherlands and its subscription enforced. ### 3. Jansenism Condemned by Pope. The leader of the Jansenist party after the death of Jansen and Duvergier was Antoine Arnauld (see ARNAULD), the learned doctor of the Sorbonne, who, in 1643, published *De la fréquente communion * on the basis of the doctrine of predestination as taught by Augustine and Jansen. At the same time the Jesuits were eagerly at work to effect the condemnation of the Jansenist principles, being aided in their efforts by the French Dominicans, while the Dominicans of Spain and Italy took the part of Jansen. The University of Louvain requested the assistance of the Sorbonne in repelling the encroachments of the Jesuits and preventing the condemnation of Jansen's doctrines. As no particular doctrines of Jansen had been condemned as heretical in the papal bull, the Jesuits attempted to formulate, in the shape of definite propositions, the heresy of which they accused him. These were finally reduced to five, and in 1650 forwarded to Rome. They are as follows: (1) Some commandments of God are impossible of execution by the just, and the grace by which they might be truly fulfilled is lacking; (2) in the state of fallen nature inward grace is never resisted; (3) in the fallen state merit and demerit do not depend on a liberty which excludes internal necessity; freedom from external constraint suffices; (4) the semi-Pelagians admitted the necessity of an inward prevenient grace for the performance of every (good) act, even for the first act of faith; their heresy consisted in their assertion that this grace was of such a nature that the will of man was able either to resist or to obey it; (5) it is semi-Pelagian to say that Christ died or shed his blood for all men without exception. Pope Innocent X. condemned these theses in 1653 in the bull *Cum occasione. * Although this bull was confirmed neither by the assembly of the clergy nor by parliament, it was sent to the different dioceses for subscription, at the instigation of the Jesuits. The Jansenists declared their willingness to condemn the five theses in their heretical sense, but not as propositions of Jansen. Most of the Jansenists admitted the infallibility of the pope in matters of faith, but not as to facts of merely human knowledge. In 1654 the pope declared that these condemned theses were really in Jansen's *Augustinus, * and that their condemnation as the teaching of Jansen would have to be subscribed on pain of deprivation. Under these circumstances hundreds of the "party of grace" signed the condemnation. ### 4. Arnauld and Pascal. In 1654 a priest at St. Sulpice, in Paris, refused absolution to the duke of Liancourt because of his protection of a priest who had refused subscription. Thereupon Antoine Arnauld (q.v.) published his *Lettre à une personne de qualité, * from which two propositions were immediately extracted by his opponents: (1) The grace of God, without which we can not do anything good, had left Peter at the time when he denied the Lord; (2) since not everybody can convince himself that the five condemned theses are in Jansen, a submission of respectful silence under the papal decision suffices; the submission of faith can not be required for the fact. Arnauld was expelled from the Sorbonne (1656), and eighty doctors went out with him rather than sign his excommunication. At this time Blaise Pascal (q.v.) sent forth his *Lettres à un provincial,* in the first of which he attacked the Thomists for opposing the teachings of Jansen and Arnauld, while they themselves, according to him, with their mechanical view of predestination, really shared their views. In the following letters he attacked the casuistry and moral theology of the Jesuits. But Louis XIV. was intent upon thoroughly eradicating Jansenism. In 1660, at an assembly of the French clergy, a formulary was prepared which condemned the five propositions of Jansen, and subscription was again required not only from the clergy, but now from nuns as well. Those who refused were imprisoned, De Sacy, one of the most excellent men of the Port Royal group, in the Bastile. Arnauld insisted upon the distinction between *fait * and *droit,* though in 1656 Alexander VII. in the constitution *Ad sanctam beati Petri sedem, * had again laid down the "fact" that Jansen had taught the five theses in an objectionable sense. In 1664 he issued a new constitution in which he required all clergy to accept by a new signature the papal pronouncements of 1642, 1653, and 1656. Four bishops would promise no more as to the fact, and a number of others signed with reservations intended to protect the doctrine of Augustine. The strength of the opposition impressed both the Curia and the king. After some hesitation, the distinction between *fait* and *droit * and the possibility of a "respectful silence" was admitted by Pope Clement IX. in 1668, and thus a temporary peace was established. This "peace of Clement IX." was evidently a defeat for the Curia, which practically admitted that the situation was beyond its control unless it was supported by the secular arm. ### 5. Quesnel. The Bull Unigenitus. The dissensions were revived by the publication of Quesnel's *Nouveau Testament en français avec des reflexions morales * (1693), which was dedicated to Noailles, at that time bishop of Châlons. But before the development of this new stage, Jansenism of the older period had come to an end. Louis XIV. became more and more jealous of his authority and inclined to assure the pardon of his sins by the persecution of heretics. He availed himself of a dissension which had broken out among the Jansenists themselves, by urging Pope Clement XI. to adopt severe measures against them. The pope was glad to seize an opportunity to assert his authority over the Gallican Church, and issued the bull *Vineam Domini* (1705) in which the five theses of Jansen were unconditionally condemned. The nuns of Port Royal refused to subscribe the bull, and their convent was suppressed in 1709 and destroyed a year later. In the mean time Cardinal de Noailles had become archbishop of Paris. By his protection of Quesnel's "New Testament " he had incurred the hatred of the Jesuits, who influenced the pope to condemn certain propositions which Le Tellier, the Jesuit confessor of the king, had selected from the New Testament of Quesnel. Thereupon the pope issued, in 1713, the bull *Unigenitus, * in which 101 propositions from Quesnel were condemned as Jansenistic or otherwise heretical. Among these, however, were not only some which may be found almost literally in Holy Scripture and in Augustine, but even some substantially identical with the decrees of the Council of Trent, as, for instance, the second, "The grace of Jesus Christ is necessary for all good works; without it nothing (truly good) can be done"; the twenty-sixth, "No grace is imparted except through faith"; the twenty-ninth, "Outside of the Church no grace is given"; and the fifty-first, "Faith justifies when it is operative, but it is operative only through love." The bull was laid before the assembly of the French clergy and accepted by the majority. Noailles prohibited the book; but before he accepted the bull, he asked the pope for several explanations. The parliament obeyed the order of the king to enter the bull in the laws of the kingdom, with the reservation, however, that its views regarding excommunication should not interfere with loyalty to the king. The Sorbonne split into different parties, and some of its most prominent teachers were banished from Paris or lost their right of voting. The king, intolerant of resistance, thought of settling the matter by a national council, but the pope would not hear of so risky a measure; and at his death in 1715, Louis XIV. left the Jansenist question in the greatest confusion and bitterness of feeling. ### 6. Acceptants and Appellants. The successor of Louis XIV., the frivolous duke of Orléans, cared for neither party, considering the principles of both equally foolish. The exiles were allowed to return, and the Sorbonne withdrew its half-hearted acceptance of the bull *Unigenitus*. Accordingly, the pope threatened Noailles with deprivation and even excommunication. But now a number of hitherto submissive bishops began to ask for explanations, and in 1717 several of them appealed from the pope and his bull to a future general council. These were called Appellants, in distinction from the Acceptants, who accepted the bull. Almost twenty bishops, the faculty of Paris and two other theological faculties, and a large part of the secular and monastic clergy joined the cause of the Appellants. They were stigmatized as Jansenists by their opponents, though in some cases unjustly. Noailles also took the part of the Appellants, after a vain attempt at mediation. The Party of the Acceptants was headed by Mailly, archbishop of Reims. But Dubois, the favorite of the regent, was ambitious of a cardinal's hat, and took sides against the Appellants; and Louis XV., led by his former teacher, Cardinal Fleury, oppressed them in every way. Noailles was compelled to submit (1728), and in 1730 the bull was formally registered as the law of the kingdom. ### 7. Convulsionists. A young Jansenist clergyman, François de Pâris, had died in 1727 as a result of his ascetic practises, with his "appeal" in his hand, and some miraculous cures performed at his grave were looked upon as a divine confirmation of the cause of the Appellants; even children fell into convulsions and trances on his grave, prophesying and testifying against the bull. Infidels were carried away by the fanaticism of the thousands who knelt at the grave of Pâris in the churchyard of St. Médard. In 1732 the king ordered the graveyard to be closed; but portions of earth which had been taken from the grave were equally efficacious, and the number of convulsionary prophets of coming ruin to Church and State continued to increase until the movement ended in strife, and sometimes in moral disorder, after giving occasion to the skeptics to draw conclusions unfavorable to the miracles of Christianity. ### 8. Close of Controversies. The Jansenists of the first generation had endeavored to enforce the practise of confession to the parish priest, not to friars and Jesuits, but the subsequent persecution compelled them to confess to appellant priests. On their death-bed, however, they had to confess to their regular pastor if they wished to be buried with the rites of the Church. Under the influence of the Jesuits, Beaumont, archbishop of Paris, resolved to refuse the last rites of the Church to all those who produced no evidence that they had confessed when in health to their parish priest. When a priest in 1752 accordingly refused absolution to an Appellant, the archbishop was summoned before parliament and threatened with confiscation of his revenues. Most of the bishops took the side of the archbishop, in defense of the unrestricted right of the Church to control the sacraments, while other parliaments took sides with that of Paris, on the ground that it was trying to protect citizens against clerical oppression. In 1753 the king forbade the parliament to meddle in ecclesiastical affairs, and its members were dispersed and banished; but in the following year they were recalled, although they still insisted upon their rights, and the archbishop who still refused absolution to Appellants was exiled. The bishops, supported by the king, requested the decision of the pope, who now manifested considerably more caution in regard to the bull *Unigenitus* by refusing the sacraments only to such Appellants as were recognized as such publicly and by law. The king referred grievances concerning the refusal of the sacraments to spiritual courts, but with the right of appeal to secular courts. The dissensions of Jansenism ceased only with the excitement preceding the expulsion of the Jesuits. The literature on these disputes from the time of the bull *Unigenitus* comprises three or four thousand volumes in the Bibliothèque Nationale of Paris. (PAUL TSCHACKERT.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: The best earlier literature is given in Schaff, *Creeds*, i. 102. Consult: T. Bouvier, *Hist. du Jansénisme*, Strasburg, 1864; S. P. Tregelles, *The Jansenists; their Rise, Persecutions and existing Fragments*, London, 1851; R. F. W. Guettée, *Jansénisme et Jésuitisme*, Paris, 1857; R. Rapin, *Hist. du Jansénisme*, Paris, 1865; idem, *Mémoires sur l'eglise 1644-99*, ed. L. Aubineau, 3 vols., ib. 1865; F. X. Linsenmann, *M. Bains und die Grundlegung des Jansenismus,* Tübingen, 1867; W. H. Jervis, *The Gallican Church*, i. chaps. xi.-xiv., ii. chaps. v. vi., viii., 2 vols., London, 1872; A. Schill, *Die Constitution Unigenitus*, Freiburg, 1878; E. L. T. Henke, *Neuere Kirchen-geschichte*, ed. Gass, ii. 97 sqq., Halle, 1878; A. Vandenpeerenboom, *Cornelius Jansenius*, Bruges, 1882; A. Ricard, *Les Premiers Jansénistes*, Paris, 1883; L. Séche, *Les Derniers Jansénistes, 1710-1870*, 3 vols.; ib. 1891; C. Gilardoni, *La Bulle Unigenitus,* Vitry-le-François, 1892; idem, L'Abbaye de Haute-Fontaine et le Jansénisme, ib. 1894; C. Callewaert, *Jansenius évêque d'Ypres*, Louvain, 1893; Mrs. M. Tollemache, *French Jansenists*, London, 1893; G. Doublet, *Le Jansénisme dans l'ancien diocèse de Vence*, Paris, 1901; J. Gaillard, *Un prélat janséniste. Choart de Buzeuval, évêque de Beauvais, 1651-79*, ib. 1902; A. M. P. Ingold, *Bossuet et le Jansénisme*, ib. 1904; V. Durand, *Le Jansénisme au xviii. siècle et Joachim Colbert, évêque de Montpellier* (*1696-1738*), ib. 1907; *Cambridge Modern History*, v. 82 sqq., New York, 1908. The bull Unigenitus is given in Lat. in Reich, Documents, pp. 386-389. The reader should consult also for further light on the subject the literature given under PASCAL, BLAISE; PORT ROYAL; and QUESNEL, PASQUIER.
JANSENIST CHURCH IN HOLLAND Jansenist Church in Holland

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JANSENIST CHURCH IN HOLLAND. Contributory Causes of the Schism of 1702 (§ 1). Its Immediate Occasion (§ 2). History (§ 3). Differences from the Roman Catholic Church (§ 4). ### 1. Contributory Causes of the Schism of 1702. The doctrines of Jansenism (see JANSEN, CORNELIUS, JANSENISM) left no permanent trace in Belgium or in France, but in Holland there has been for more than two centuries a church popularly called Jansenist. Its adherents reject the name, rightly calling themselves the Old Catholic Church of Holland, since the schism among the Dutch Roman Catholics in 1702, to which they owe their origin, sprang from the adherence of the Dutch clergy to the privileges of their church rather than from dogmatic principles. The first bishop in Holland was Willibrord (q.v.), consecrated bishop of Utrecht by Pope Sergius I. in 695. Among his successors were not a few who opposed the growing tendency to regard the pope as the unrestricted governor of all Christendom. The bishop of Utrecht was originally chosen by the clergy, and in 1145 the Emperor Conrad III. confirmed the right to the chapter of St. Martin's Cathedral. The choice was not always accepted by Rome. In 1559 in accordance with the wish of Philip II. of Spain, then ruler of the Netherlands, the pope elevated Utrecht to the rank of an archbishopric with five suffragan sees, and it was then agreed by pope and king that the latter should select the bishops, to be confirmed by the pope. Nine years later the War of Liberation broke out, lasting for eighty years, and involved the Roman Catholics in many difficulties. Though they joined. with the Protestants in fighting against the Spanish yoke, they were mistrusted, and about 1573 the public exercise of Catholic worship was forbidden?a prohibition which remained in force till the revolution of 1795. As the incumbents of the episcopal sees died, it was found difficult to fill their places. Sasbold Vosmeer, chosen general vicar by the Utrecht chapter in 1583, after the death of the archbishop in 1580, was consecrated archbishop by the pope in 1602, but with the title archbishop of Philippi. His successors were chosen and consecrated in the same way. Under the fifth of them, Petrus Codde (consecrated 1689), occurred the schism. ### 2. Its Immediate Occasion. More formidable opponents than the Protestants had appeared against the Roman Catholic clergy of Holland. During the turbulent conditions of the long war the country had been invaded by "regular" clergy especially by the Jesuits after 1590, who accused the Dutch clergy of the Jansenistic heresy. In 1697, during the negotiations of peace at Ryswik, there appeared an anonymous treatise in French, soon afterward also in Latin, and some years later in Dutch, under the title "Short Memorial concerning the Condition and Progress of Jansenism in Holland." Some copies fell into the hands of Codde, who hastened to send the book to Rome with an apology. He was declared innocent in Rome, although there was no end of insinuations. Since Alexander VII. had issued his constitution against the so-called five theses of Jansen in 1656, the accusation implied that the accused was suspected of agreeing with the five condemned theses, or of refusing to believe that Jansen had taught those theses in his *Augustinus*, and thereby given rise to the heresy condemned by the church. Codde and his subordinate ecclesiastics could easily defend themselves against the charge of agreeing with the content of the condemned theses, although the former did not express himself on the question whether Jansen had really taught them or not. But since the decision of Alexander, this point involved the absolute supremacy and infallibility of the pope, and the Jesuits were intent upon having this question decided. Codde was summoned to Rome in 1700, and in 1702 was declared guilty of heresy. There was great consternation in Holland when it was learned that he had been dismissed from office, and still more when Theodor de Kock, his opponent, was appointed general vicar. The estates took the part of Codde and forced his opponents to let him return to Holland, where he arrived in 1703. The question now was, what attitude would Codde, the Dutch clergy, and the Utrecht chapter assume. If they accepted Codde's dismissal, the independence of the Utrecht church was necessarily abolished. Codde himself, from love of peace, remained until his death in a passive attitude, stedfastly asserting his rights and those of his church, but refraining from exercising them. A large party of the Dutch clergy and laity, however, remained faithful to him, although another part followed De Kock. Thus Codde's dismissal led to a schism in the Dutch Roman Catholic Church which has never been healed. ### 3. History. It was to be expected that the church of the Jansenists, as Codde's party was now called, would decrease in numbers after Rome had spoken. Owing to the lack of higher ecclesiastics, the church of Utrecht was on the point of extinction, when aid came in an unexpected manner. Several French clergymen who refused to sign the bull *Unigenitus* in 1713 (see JANSEN, CORNELIUS, JANSENISM) sought refuge on Dutch soil. Moreover, in 1719, Dom Maria Varlet (chosen bishop of Babylon in 1718 and consecrated as bishop of Ascalon Feb. 19, 1719) spent some time in Amsterdam before he undertook his journey to the Orient. In Amsterdam he became acquainted with ecclesiastics of the Old Catholic Church and was active in their behalf. He had hardly reached the Orient when the pope suspended him as a Jansenist. He then returned to Holland, where the Utrecht chapter in 1723 had elected Cornelis Steenoven as archbishop to prevent the extinction of the Old Catholic Church. In 1724 Bishop Varlet consecrated him. The pope, of course, immediately put Steenoven under the ban, but the Utrecht church was saved from extinction. Steenoven died in 1725, and was succeeded by Barchman Wuytiers (d. 1733), who was followed by Theodor van der Croon (d. 1739), both consecrated by Varlet. The Utrecht church soon recognized the danger of making its continuance dependent upon the life of a single bishop, and consequently Hieronymus de Bock was consecrated bishop of Haarlem in 1742, and B. J. Bijevelt bishop of Deventer in 1758. Several attempts to reconcile the pope failed. A serious danger threatened the Old Catholic Church in Holland under the administration of the Roman Catholic king, Louis Bonaparte (1806-10), and under the régime of Emperor Napoleon (1810-13), who contemplated prohibiting the election of a new Old Catholic bishop; but this danger passed with the restitution of the independence of Holland, and in 1814 W. van Os was elected archbishop of Utrecht, and in 1819 Johannes Bon bishop of Haarlem (see EPISCOPACY, III.). The difficulties which threatened the church under King William I. and King William II., who desired to establish a concordat with the pope, passed as soon as the agreement failed. The law concerning church associations enacted in 1853 assured entire freedom to all ecclesiastical organizations, including the Old Catholics. In this way the small church has gradually increased its members from 5,000 to almost 8,000, and its parishes from twenty-five to twenty six. It is not strange that the Old Catholic bishops disapproved the dogma of the immaculate conception in 1854, and that of papal infallibility in 1870. ### 4. Differences from the Roman Catholic Church. The chief points of difference between the Old Catholics of Holland and their Roman Catholic opponents are the following: (1) The old Catholic Church considers the deposition of Archbishop Codde illegal, and asserts that, in spite of the Reformation of the sixteenth century and its influence upon the affairs of Holland, the Roman Catholic Church has existed without interruption, and has continuously retained its right to administer its own affairs as a national church, independent of the church in Rome. (2) It refuses to sign the formula of Pope Alexander VII., unless permitted to make a distinction between a signature *quoad jus* and *quoad factum; * namely, between the question whether the five incriminated theses were heretical, and the question whether Jansen had taught them in a heretical sense. (3) It rejects the bull *Unigenitus, * since this bull validates the moral system of the Jesuits for the whole Roman Catholic Church. The importance of the Old Catholic Church of Holland for all Roman Catholic Christendom lies not only in the fact that it is a monument of the spirit of the earlier centuries, but also in the fact that it has entered into relations with the Old Catholic movement in Germany and Switzerland. When the Old Catholic spirit was aroused in Germany in opposition to the dogma of infallibility in 1870, and the necessity of a bishop for the newly organized Old Catholic Church was felt, it was H. Heykamp, the Old Catholic bishop of Deventer, who, in 1873, consecrated J. H. Reinkens bishop of the German Old Catholics. See O LD C ATHOLICS. (J. A. GERTH VAN WIJK.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: C. P. Hoynck a Papendrecht, *Hist. ecclesiae Ultrajectinae,* Mechlin, 1725; T. Backhusius, *Bewijs-Schrift,* 3 vols., Utrecht, 1726-30; M. G. Dupac de Bellegarde, *Hist. abrégée de l'église métropolitaine d'Utrecht,* ib. 1852; J. W. Neale, *Hist. of the so-called Jansenist Church of Holland,* London, 1858; R. Bennink Janssonius, *Geschiedenis der Oud-Roomsch-Katholieke Kerk in Nederland,* The Hague, 1870; F. Nippold, *Die römisch-katholische Kirche . . . der Niederlande,* Leipsic, 1877; J. A. van Beek, *Geschiedenis der hollandsche Kerk, * Rotterdam, 1886; *Neerlandia Catholica, * Utrecht, 1888; J. de Huller, *Bijdrage tot de geschiedenis van het Utrechtsche Schisma,* The Hague, 1892; W. P. C. Knuttel, *De Toestand der nederlandsche Katholieken,* 2 vols., ib. 1892-94; J. Meyhoffer, *Le Martyrologe protestant des Pays-Bas, 1423-1597,* The Hague, 1907. The literature of the church is given by J. A. van Beek, *Lijst van boeken uitgeven in de Oud-Katholieke Kerk,* 3 vols., Rotterdam, 1892-93. Much of the literature under JANSENISM is pertinent, e.g., the work of Tregelles.
JANSSEN, JOHANNES Janssen, Johannes

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JANSSEN,** yans'sen, **JOHANNES:** Roman Catholic; b. at Xanten (15 m. s.e. of Cleves) Apr. 10, 1829; d. at Frankfort Dec. 24, 1891. He studied at Münster, Louvain, Bonn, and Berlin from 1849 to 1853 (Ph.D., Bonn, 1853), and was professor of history in the gymnasium of Frankfort from 1854 until his death. He was ordained to the priesthood in 1860, was a member of the Prussian House of Deputies in 1875-76, was created a domestic prelate to the pope and an apostolic prothonotary in 1880. His theological position was so ultramontanistic as to evoke sharp criticism from Protestant historians for his partizan views of the moral, economic, and religious results of the Reformation. Of his many books the chief is the monumental *Geschichte des deutschen Volkes seit dem Ausgang des Mittelalters* (8 vols., Freiburg, 1879-94), the last three edited and completed by L. Pastor; Eng. transl. by M. A. Mitchell and A. M. Christie, *Hist. of the German People at the Close of the Middle Ages, * 12 vols., London, 1896-1907; Pastor has also reedited the whole work, and has supervised the publication of a series of monographs in defense of it under the title *Erläuterungen und Ergänzungen zu Janssens Geschichte des deutschen Volkes * (6 vols., Freiburg, 1898-1908). Janssen replied to his critics in his *An meine Kritiker * (Freiburg, 1882) and *Ein zweites Wort an meine Kritiker * (1883). BIBLIOGRAPHY: L. Pastor, *Johannes Janssen, 1829-91, ein Lebensbild,* Freiburg, 1893; F. Meister, *Erinnerung an Johann Janssen,* Frankfort, 1896.
JANNSENS, ERASMUS (ERASMUS, JOHANNES) Jannsens, Erasmus (Erasmus, Johannes)

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JANNSENS, ERASMUS (ERASMUS JOHANNES):** Dutch Unitarian theologian; b. about 1540; d. at Clausenburg (220 m. e.s.e of Budapest) 1596. He became rector of the college at Antwerp in 1576, but because of his Socinian teaching was compelled by William of Orange to resign and go into exile. He became rector of the college at Emden, and in 1579 he went to Frankfort, where there seemed prospects of larger religious liberty. But his *Clara demonstratio Antichristum immediate post mortem apostolorum coepisse regnare in ecclesia Christi * (n.p., 1584) caused him new trouble, and he emigrated to Cracow in Poland. A disputation with Faustus Socinus Nov. 29-30, 1584, led to Janssens' *De unigeniti filii Dei existentia * (Cracow, 1595). A little later Janssens withdrew his opposition to the Unitarian doctrine, being offered the pastorate of the Unitarian church at Clausenburg, in the service of which he closed his life. His system of theology is stated in his *Antithesis doctrinæ Christi et Antichristi de uno vero Deo * (n.p., 1583; reprinted with refutation by J. Zanchius, Neustadt, 1586). He was author also of *Scriptum quo causas propter quas vita æterna contingat complectitur* (1589), and furnished the part on the prophets in the Latin Bible of Tremellius and Junius (Frankfort, 1579). BIBLIOGRAPHY: C. Sandius, *Bibliotheca antitrinitariorum,* passim, Freistadt, 1684; J. N. Paquot, *Mémoires pour servir à l'hist. littéraire de . . . Pays-Bas,* vii. 328-333, 18 vols., Louvain, 1763-70; J. C. A. Hoefer, *Nouvelle biographie générale,* xxvi. 357, Paris, 1861.
JANUARIUS, SAINT Januarius, Saint

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JANUARIUS, SAINT:** The patron saint of Naples; b., according to tradition, either at Naples or Benevento about the middle of the third century; martyred at Puteoli Sept. 19 (according to other accounts, May 1 or 2, Oct. 19, or Dec. 16), 305. Within a century after his death his relics are said to have been translated to a church before the gates of Naples, whence they were taken, about 820, to Benevento (the head being left in Naples), and were finally interred in a church of Benevento in 1129. Since 1497 they have rested in the Januarius chapel of the cathedral of Naples, the head and two glass flasks said to contain his blood being in the Cappella del Tesoro of the same structure. The famous miracle of the liquefaction of the blood in the flasks when brought near the head is said to have taken place first in the twelfth century, and is abundantly confirmed since the middle of the fifteenth century, as by Pius II. (Aeneas Sylvius), the physician Angelus Cato (1474), the Bollandists Henschen and Papebroch (Mar. 10, 1661), and the Bollandist Stilting (Aug. 21, 1754); cf. the account of J. P. Peters, in *American Church Magazine*, Aug. or Sept., 1902. It occurs three times a year--on the first Saturday of May, in the evening, on Sept. 19 and Dec. 16, between 9 and 10 A.M. "According as the liquefaction is rapid or slow it is considered a good or evil omen for the ensuing year." (Baedeker.) Other miracles are also related as occurring in the nineteenth century in connection with this phenomenon. There are other less important saints and beatified of the same name. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The early *Acta * and *Translatio, * with comment, are in *ASB, * Sept., vi. 762-894. A list of literature is given, Potthast, *Wegweiser,* p. 1385. Consult: Kirwan's *Romanism at Home,* pp. 81-94, New York, 1852; J. Peter, *La Légende de S. Janvier, * Lausanne, 1884; E. Gothein, *Die Culturentwicklung Süd-Italiens,* pp. 112-142, Breslau, 1886.
JAPAN Japan

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

### JAPAN. The Country and People. Native Religions. Shinto. Its Character (§ 1). Its Obscuration by Buddhism (§ 2). Its Revival (§ 3). Its Writings and Cosmogony (§ 4). Its Worship and Sects (§ 5). Buddhism. Its Establishment in Japan (§ 1). Its Dominance. Decline, and Recovery (§ 2). Buddhist Sects (§ 3). Modern Doctrinal Basis (§ 4). Christianity in Japan. Roman Catholic Missions. Introduction under St. Francis Xavier (§ 1). Conditions Favoring Christianity (§ 2). Beginnings of Persecution (§ 3). Dissensions among Roman Catholics (§ 4). Persecution under Ieyasu (§ 5). Period of Exclusion of Christianity (§ 6). Renewed Missionary Efforts (§ 7). Modern Roman Catholic Missions (§ 8). Results (§ 9). Missions of the Eastern Church. Initiation by Nicolai Kasatkin (§ 1). Results (§ 2). Protestant Missions. Beginnings in 1859 (§ 1). Alternating Advance and Reaction (§ 2). The Advance, 1873-88 (§ 3). The Obstacles Encountered (§ 4). The Reaction of 1889 (§ 5). The New Advance since 1899 (§ 6). Harmony of Protestant Effort (§ 7). General Results (§ 8). ### I. The Country and People: [Japan, called by its own people Nihon or Nippon, consists of a chain of nearly 4,000 islands, of which about 500 are inhabited, in the western Pacific, reaching from Formosa to the Kurile Isles, or from 22° to 51° north latitude, a distance of about 2,400 miles, and lying generally in direction n.e. to s.w. off the eastern coast of Asia. Its climate, consequently, ranges from the subtropical to the subarctic. Its central portion is the most important, consisting of the four great islands (named from north to south), Yezo, Honshin, Shikoku, and Kiushiu. Its territory, including Formosa, has an area of 162,154 square miles with a deeply indented coast line nearly 20,000 miles in length, favorably conditioned therefore for commerce by water. It is a country of high mountain ranges, deep valleys, few plains, no great rivers, many volcanoes, and frequent earthquakes, few of which are severe. Its population, slightly under 50,000,000, is of varied stock, the result of the fusion of several migrations possibly of Mongol stock with the original inhabitants. The Ainu, found only in the northern parts, seem to represent the aborigines. The Formosans betray a strong Malay infusion. The principal industries are agriculture and the fisheries, though the development of mining and manufactures during the last quarter century has been enormous. Its government, since 1889, is a constitutional monarchy, with two houses of parliament, the lower entirely elective by the people, the upper partly elective and partly appointive.] ### II. Native Religions.--1. Shinto: 1. Its Character. This indigenous cult of Japan combines nature worship, hero worship, and reverence for ancestors. At times its most distinguishing characteristic has been reverence for the imperial family, and the present tendency is to emphasize this feature; nevertheless through long periods of Japanese history the emperors were almost forgotten by the mass of the people, and the extreme honor shown at the present day is largely a growth of the last forty years. The name *Shinto* is the Chinese equivalent of the Japanese *Kami no michi,* "Way of the Superior Beings," the word *kami* (Chinese *shin*), although employed by Christians as the name for God, being used of supernatural beings--whether good or evil--of the spirits of departed heroes, and even of extraordinary natural objects. The number of these beings is said to be 800 myriads. The beginnings of the system are lost in antiquity; but its oldest elements are found in the worship of the forces of nature. Phallicism was once common, but in recent times the government has caused most of the symbols to be removed from public view. Shinto combines religious and non-religious elements, the former being sometimes so overshadowed by the latter as to be hardly discernible. In its present form it has no system of dogmas, no prescribed code of morals, and no sacred writings unless a few semi-historical books and some forms of addresses to the *kami * can be considered such. ### 2. Its Obscuration by Buddhism. Buddhism came to Japan in 552 A.D., and in the ninth century it taught that the *kami * were *avatars* (reincarnations) of Buddhist saints. Buddhism proved the stronger religious element in this combination, and most of the prominent Shinto shrines, with the exception of those at Ise and Izumo, were served by Buddhist priests, who introduced the images, incense, and elaborate ritual of their worship. Many of the smaller shrines remained unchanged, and there was nothing in either Shinto or Buddhism that made it seem inconsistent for the people to observe the rites of both. While every locality had its Shinto shrine where some hero or other superior being was honored as the patron saint of the community, it may be said that the people were at the same time Buddhists and Shintoists. There was, however, one marked distinction in their conceptions of the two systems. The chief concern of Shinto was with the present world, while Buddhism busied itself more with what came after death. The erection of buildings and the commencement of public works were preceded by Shinto rites, and infants were taken to the village shrine for consecration to the local deity; but funerals and memorial services for the dead were conducted by Buddhist priests. Hence graveyards were contiguous to Buddhist temples, while Shintoism avoided the pollution associated with death. In the rare cases where Shinto funerals were held, there were usually additional Buddhist rites. ### 3. Its Revival. In the seventeenth century a movement began for the revival of ancient Shinto, largely political in its motives. It was chiefly conducted by scholars who investigated old records and embodied the results in books that advocated a return to ancient ideas of government and ritual. Their writings, though reaching only a small section of people, had an important influence in bringing about the overthrow of the shogunate in 1868 and the restoration of imperial power. In connection with that great change the ancient department of Shinto rites was reestablished. Buddhist ornaments and ritual were banished from the ancient shrines, a grant equal to about $300,000 a year was made for their maintenance, and preachers were sent out to instruct the people in the ancient beliefs. This movement was shortlived. The department of Shinto rites was degraded until it became a subbureau of the home department, the Buddhists recovered many shrines, and in most respects people returned to their former ways. In 1899 the officials of the most honored Shinto shrine, that of Dai Jingu in Ise, obtained the government's consent to their request that they no longer be considered as forming a religious body, but as an association for performing rites in honor of the imperial ancestors and for conducting patriotic ceremonies. The tendency of recent years has been to consider Shinto itself a system for fostering patriotism and loyalty. This makes it possible, without violation of the freedom of conscience guaranteed by the national constitution, to claim that every Japanese ought to support it and take part in its ceremonies. While, however, the shrines are not considered religious buildings, there are frequently connected with them voluntary associations of a religious character called *kyokwai*, the name used by Christians to designate a church. ### 4. Its Writings and Cosmogony. The chief authority for the cosmogony and mythology of Shinto is the *Kojiki* ("Records of Ancient Matters"), a compilation of legends that was completed in 712 A.D. The *Nihongi* ("Chronicles of Japan"), though compiled only eight years later, is much more affected by Chinese ideas. The *Yengishiki* describes the ritual as practised in the Yengi era (901-923) and includes prayers that had come down from more ancient times. According to the *Kojiki*, after heaven and earth were separated from the original chaos, three *kami* came into existence on the Heavenly Plain and afterward passed away. They were succeeded by others until finally there came two named *Izanagi* ("Male who Invites") and *Izanami* ("Female who Invites"). Standing on the bridge of Heaven, these two thrust a spear into the liquid mass below them, and as they drew it back, the falling drops became an island, to which they descended. They there gave birth to the other islands of Japan and afterward to a number of gods and goddesses. The birth of the Fire-god caused the death of *Izanami. Izanagi* visited her in the underworld, but did not succeed in bringing her back to earth. After his return, as he purified himself from the pollution he had incurred, new deities were produced from each article of clothing and from different parts of his body. The most important of these was Amaterasu-O-Mi-Kami, the Sun-goddess, who, after a quarrel with one of her brothers, withdrew into a cave, leaving the earth in darkness. The 800 myriad deities lured her forth by offerings, dances, songs, and the exhibition of a mirror in which she seemed to see another being as splendid as herself. One of her descendants was Jimmu Tenno, the first emperor of Japan, whose ascension to the throne is said to have occurred 660 B.C. ### 5. Its Worship and Sects. A Shinto shrine in its purest form is of very simple architecture, being constructed of unpainted wood and thatched with bark or thin shingles. Before it is a *torii* or detached portal. There is no visible object of worship, but hidden within the sanctuary is something in which the spirit of the *kami* is supposed to reside. At the shrine in Ise there is a mirror said to have been bestowed by the Sun-goddess on her grandson when she sent him to subdue the land. Shrines where mirrors are exposed to view and those with tiled roofs or painted wood show the influence of Buddhism. Services consist chiefly of the recital of ancient prayers, the offering of articles of food, and dancing by priestesses. Ise and other prominent shrines are visited by large numbers of pilgrims, who carry home charms to be placed in their household shrines. Shinto lays stress on ceremonial purity. There is no formulated system of ethics, such being thought necessary only for the immoral people of other lands, while in Japan each person's heart teaches him what he ought to do. A number of popular sects have more of the religious element than has the Shintoism thus far described. The Kurozumi, Tenrikyo, and Remmonkyo sects are the best known. Springing up in the last century, they combine Shinto, Buddhist, and Confucian elements. Most of these sects make much of curing disease through faith or by incantations, and at times have gained large numbers of adherents. ### 2. Buddhism: 1. Its Establishment in Japan. Buddhism was introduced into Japan in 552 A.D. when the king of Kudara, a Korean state, sent to the mikado a golden image, some sutras, and other religious objects. A temple was built and put under the care of the prime minister. An epidemic that soon after broke out was attributed to the anger of the gods at the introduction of the foreign religion, and the temple was overthrown; but it is averred that all attempts to destroy the image proved vain, so that it is in existence at the present day, there being, however, two temples, each of which claims to possess it. Priests and nuns, with images and books, were soon after sent from Korea. Though Buddhism found much favor at court, there was a strong party that opposed the supplanting of Shinto by the foreign system, but an appeal to arms resulted in the defeat of the Shintoists. The new religion made a great gain when a Korean priest claimed to recognize in the mikado's infant son the reincarnation of a famous priest of China and obtained permission to superintend the boy's education. The prince, best known by his posthumous name, Shotoku Taishi (572-621), afterward became regent and was an earnest defender of Buddhism. An imperial edict in 621 made it the established religion of the country. There were at that time forty-six temples with 1,385 priests and nuns. Many of these had come from Korea and China, countries which had contributed to Japan their literature arts, and sciences through the teachers of Buddhism. Appreciation of the new civilization made progressive people more ready to listen to the religious doctrines of its representatives. ### 2. Its Dominance, Decline, and Recovery. Acceptance of the doctrine that the ruler of a nation gained great merit by abdicating and becoming a monk vastly increased the influence of the monasteries, which thus became allied with the imperial family. The new faith spread from the upper to the lower classes. Its progress was more easy because it did not demand the abandonment of old beliefs and forms of worship. As in other countries, Buddhism could accommodate itself to the religious ideas of those whom it desired to win. At the beginning of the ninth century the priest Kukai (better known by his posthumous title, Kobo Daishi) formulated the doctrine that the Shinto deities were *avatars* of Buddhist saints, while the classification of many deified heroes as *gongen, * temporary manifestations of Buddha, simplified the problem and provided for the apotheosis of future emperors and great men. Most of the Shinto shrines soon lost their former simplicity, images and decorations of various kinds being introduced into them, while the forms of worship combined Shinto and Buddhist elements in proportions that differed with time and locality. Buddhism became the chief religious force in Japan and gradually attained to great political influence and even military power. In the Middle Ages some of the monasteries were strong fortresses, the monks of which took an active part in war with rival sects or political enemies. In the last half of the sixteenth century these fortresses were destroyed by the military leaders, Nobunaga and Hideyoshi, while the power of Buddhism was further weakened by the success of the Roman Catholic missions. Under the Tokugawa shoguns (1603-1867) it was restored to favor. The advent of Christian missions has done much to arouse the Buddhist priests from the lethargy into which they had fallen. Some of the sects imitate Christian methods, establishing schools for boys and girls, young men's associations, women's societies, and charitable institutions, while many Buddhist journals are published. Preachers have been sent to Korea, China, Hawaii, and California, primarily for the sake of Japanese colonists; but also with the hope of gaining converts. ### 3. Buddhist Sects. Japanese Buddhism is divided into many sects. Some of these were brought from China, while others originated in Japan itself. Those now in existence, with the dates of their establishment, are as follows: Tendai (three subsects), 805; Shingon (two subsects), 806; Yuzu Nembutsu, 1127; Jodo (three suhsects), 1174; Rinzai (nine subsects), 1168; Shin, also called Monto or Ikko (ten subsects), 1224; Soto, 1227; Nichiren or Hokke (seven subsects), 1253; Ji, 1276; Obaku, 1650. The Rinzai, Soto, and Obaku sects are offshoots from the old Zen sect, by whose name they are sometimes called. The word *zen * signifies "contemplation," the earnest followers of this system giving much time to meditation, or rather to an attempt to induce a sort of hypnotic condition, in which there is a complete absence of thought. The Zen sects together with the Tendai and Shingon are sometimes called the learned sects, as they have attached much importance to the study of the Sanscrit texts. The sects having the moat influence with the people at the present time are the Jodo, Shin, and Nichiren. The name of the first signifies "Pure Land." It teaches that Amida (Amitabha), the object of its worship, made a series of vows to the effect that on attaining the state of a Buddha he would create a paradise into which those who had faith in him should enter after death. This faith is chiefly shown by use of the formula *Namu Amida Butsu* ("Hail, Amida Buddha!"). The Shin sect sprang from the Jodo, which it rebukes for seeking salvation through "self-effort depending on the merits of another," while it teaches reliance upon Amida's merit alone. This belief in salvation by faith, the rejection of penance, fasting, and other forms of asceticism, together with the fact that it permits its priests to marry, has caused the Shin sect to be called the Protestantism of Japanese Buddhism. The Nichiren sect highly esteems charms, amulets, and pilgrimages. Its temples are gorgeous and the services noisy, and its priests are considered expert in exorcising demons. Delighting in controversy, the priests attack the doctrines of other sects, while these declare that the Nichiren sect ought not to be considered as belonging to Buddhism. The Yuzu Nembutsu and the Ji sects have but a small following. ### 4. Modern Doctrinal Basis. Though three extinct sects belonged to the *Hinayana* ("Smaller Vehicle"), Japanese Buddhism of to-day belongs to the Mahayana (" Greater Vehicle "). The differences that divide the sects turn upon abstruse metaphysical and technical points, and often depend upon the sutras that are held in chief honor, here being one point in which the divisions of Buddhism differ from those of Christianity with its one Bible. It is to be remembered further that, as very few of these books have been translated into Japanese, they are read only by the priests. The common people have but slight knowledge of Buddhist doctrines. Simply following the religious customs that have been handed down in their families for generations, they know little about the meaning of the rites or the nature of the beings that they worship. The beliefs of the younger priests are being greatly influenced by Western ideas. One resulting movement has taken the name "New Buddhism." It is an attempt to bring Buddhist doctrines, or rather nomenclature, into harmony with modern thought. The doctrines are so explained as to bear little resemblance to what was formerly taught; and there is an attempt to replace the pessimism of Buddhism by a more hopeful philosophy. No formulated system has yet been constructed, as the leaders differ greatly among themselves; some being atheistic, some pantheistic, while others assert that they believe in a personal God. ### III. Christianity in Japan.--1. Roman Catholic Missions: 1. Introduction Under St. Francis Xavier. The Portuguese, who had previously visited the Liukiu Islands, reached Japan proper about 1542. Six years later one of their ships brought a young Japanese named Yajiro (the Paul Anjiro of the Jesuit accounts) to Malacca, where he met St. Francis Xavier. He was sent to the Jesuit college in Goa, and there, with his servant and another Japanese, was soon afterward baptized. In response to Yajiro's entreaties that missionaries be sent to his people, Xavier, with Fathers Cosmo and Torres and Brother Juan Fernandez, accompanied the three Japanese back to their own land, reaching Kagoshima Aug. 15, 1549. There they met a favorable reception, the daimio (feudal lord) of that region authorizing them to teach their religion and permitting his subjects to become Christians. With Yajiro's help Xavier prepared a summary of Christian doctrine in Japanese, which he wrote out in Roman letters, and since he never learned much of the language of the country, his direct evangelistic work while in Japan consisted chiefly in reading this book upon the streets to those who were drawn by curiosity to see and hear the foreigner. About 100 persona had been baptized in Kagoshima when the Buddhist priests stirred up the daimio to order that no more of his people should become Christians under penalty of death. After having been in Kagoshima a little more than a year, the missionaries went to Hirado, where Xavier says that "in a few days about 100 persons became Christians." He and Fernandez then pushed on to Kyoto, the capital, where it was their hope to convert the rulers of the land. That city was so convulsed by civil strife that it was impossible to obtain a hearing. They therefore returned to Yamaguchi, where they had spent a few days on their way to Kyoto, and where ere long a number of converts were secured. ### 2. Conditions favoring Christianity. In all, Xavier spent only twenty-seven months in Japan before returning to India. Though he led the way and inspired others, the real work was done by Torres and Fernandez, who spent the remainder of their lives in Japan, and by those who afterward joined the mission. Many circumstances favored their success. The Japanese were to a remarkable degree ready to listen to new doctrines. Shintoism had little religious influence; Buddhism was powerful, but its leaders were taking an active part in political and military affairs, and for this reason many of the daimios were ready to favor a movement that seemed likely to weaken the power of the arrogant priesthood. Some of the feudal lords were also desirous of attracting foreign commerce. The country had long been vexed by internal strife; and Nobunaga, the military leader who, by gaining control of the central provinces, began the work that finally resulted in the unification of the country, was a bitter enemy of the Buddhists and openly favored the missionaries. Among the early converts were several feudal lords and other men of high rank. Some of these confiscated the Buddhist temples, destroyed the images, and compelled their subjects to be baptized. Christianity soon gained a strong foothold in Kiushiu and in the region of Kyoto. Churches, monasteries, and schools were built, and many books of instruction or devotion were published. In 1583 the Christian lords of Kiushiu sent four young men on an embassy to the pope. In 1581 the Christians numbered about 150,000, and probably the highest number ever attained was 300,000 in 1596. ### 3. Beginings of Persecution. Hideyoshi, who, soon after Nobunaga's death (1582), gained control of political affairs, seemed at first inclined to favor the Christians, some of whom were among his leading officers. In 1587, however, he suddenly sent into exile Takayama Ukon (the Justo Ucondono of the Jesuit historians), the most prominent of the Christians, and ordered all the missionaries to leave the country within twenty days. The chief reasons given by Roman Catholic historians for this action are the scandalous lives of the Portuguese merchants, that Hideyoshi was angered at Christian maidens who would not yield to his lust and that the refusal of a Portuguese captain to bring into harbor a large ship that he wished to examine aroused suspicions. Japanese accounts say that from the first he had considered Christianity dangerous to the state and had only been waiting a favorable opportunity for attacking it, and also that the arrogant demeanor of the missionaries enraged him. Murdoch suggests that Hideyoshi probably had no desire to extirpate Christianity, but only to reduce it to the position of a serviceable tool. However this may be, he postponed the time of the missionaries' departure for six months, and even then did not insist upon the enforcement of the decrees, though he pretended to be angry at the failure to carry them into effect. The missionaries worked in a less public manner than formerly, but there continued to be many baptisms. ### 4. Dissensions Among Roman Catholics. Papal bulls by Gregory XIII., Jan. 28, 1585, confirmed by Clement III., 1600, had decreed that none but Jesuits should go as missionaries to Japan; and Philip II., ruler of Spain and Portugal, had given the merchants of the latter country a monopoly of trade with Japan. The Spanish colonists in the Philippines and the different religious orders that had established themselves there were very restive under these restrictions, and finally broke them. Franciscan monks, coming as envoys from the governor of the Philippines, were allowed by Hideyoshi to reside in Kyoto on condition that they would not attempt to teach their religion. Soon, however, they were engaged in the open propagation of Christianity. Bitter feeling arose between the two orders, and also between the Portuguese and Spanish merchants who allied themselves respectively with the Jesuits and the Franciscans. In 1595 the pilot of a Spanish ship wrecked on the coast of Japan was pointing out on a map the wide possessions of his king. When asked how so many lands in different parts of the earth had been brought under one sway, he replied: "The king first sends out teachers of religion. After they have gained the hearts of a sufficient number of persons, soldiers are sent to unite with these converts in subduing the desired territory." This speech was reported to Hideyoshi, who had always suspected that the missionaries had political ends in view. Thinking it time to give them another warning, he ordered arrests to be made, and six Franciscan missionaries and twenty Japanese Christians were taken to Nagasaki and crucified. A new edict forbade any of the daimios to become Christians, and ordered all missionaries to leave the country. By dressing Portuguese merchants in clerical robes and sending them on board a ship, the Jesuits pretended to be obeying the command, and thus, with a few exceptions, they were able to remain concealed in Japan. ### 5. Persecution Under Ieyasu. Hideyoshi died in 1598. The missionaries came out from their hiding-places and were reenforced by new arrivals. Unfortunately their work was weakened by dissensions between the orders. Augustinians and Dominicans, as well as Franciscans, disregarded the papal prohibitions and came to Japan from the Philippines. After a period of civil strife, Ieyasu, the founder of the Tokugawa line of shoguns, gained control of the country. His desire for commerce led him to adopt a kindly policy toward the missionaries; but some of the Christians were active supporters of his enemies, and they were also accused of plots with foreign rulers to effect his overthrow. Indeed, in all this history of Roman Catholicism in Japan, the chief cause of official opposition was the suspicion that its teachers were agents of the European nations that wished to gain possession of Japan. In 1614 Ieyasu ordered the expulsion of the missionaries and the suppression of Christianity, and the flames of persecution broke out. Not only missionaries, but many Japanese Christians were deported, and horrible tortures were invented to secure recantation. Although multitudes apostatized, there wire many that stood firm. Men, women, and even little children were beheaded, burned at the stake, or crucified. Many missionaries also suffered, for they had endeavored to remain in the country, and even those who had been once expelled returned under various disguises to face almost certain martyrdom. After Ieyasu's death (1616) the persecution was continued by his son, Hidetada. The final blow came in the suppression (1638) of a rebellion raised by the peasants living in Shimabara and Amakusa. Though largely a revolt against the oppression of their daimios, the leaders were Christians, and they fought under banners inscribed with the names of Jesus, of Mary, and also of St. James, the patron saint of Spain. The rebels seized an old castle where they defended themselves so bravely that they were put down only with the greatest difficulty. When finally defeated, all of them were put to death. The lawn against Christianity were thereafter enforced still more strictly, and the country was closed to all foreigners except the Dutch, who were per mitted under restrictions to have a trading-post in Nagasaki. ### 6. Period of Exclusion of Christianity. For more than two centuries Japan refused to have intercourse with foreign nations. The Christians were deprived of all the sacraments except baptism. In every town was posted a notice saying "The evil sect called Christian is strictly prohibited," and offering rewards for information against believers. Every Householder was required to procure annually from the Buddhist priest a certificate that no member of his family was a Christian. In many parts of the land all were compelled to trample on a cross or on a copper plate that bore a representation of the crucified Jesus. The publication of books containing references to Christianity was prohibited. The Dutch ships that came to Nagasaki were closely searched for priests and Christian books. Nevertheless Christianity was not completely extirpated, but was carefully handed down from parent to child. Sacred images were hidden in what had the appearance of Buddhist shrines, lay baptism was practised, in some villages nearly all the inhabitants were believers, and had their catechists and baptizers. Ways were devised for evading the tests used for the detection of believers, In some places where the officials were themselves Christians the plate on which the people trampled was engraved with Buddhist symbols. Elsewhere the believers, after stepping upon the cross, would wash their feet and drink the water while returning thanks that they had been permitted to touch the sacred symbol. But from time to time Christians were discovered by the officials and punished. ### 7. Renewed Missionery Efforts. The missionaries made some attempts to return. In 1642 five Jesuits entered the country and were put to death; they were followed a year later by five others, who were imprisoned until their death; as was also the case with Sidotti; an Italian priest who, in 1709, had himself set ashore on the coast of Japan. In 1844 a French war vessel left under the name of official interpreters a missionary and a Chinese evangelist in Liuchiu, which was a dependency of Japan. It was thought that they might there learn the Japanese language, do missionary work among the people, and be preparing for the opening of the Japanese group itself. They and others who succeeded them were so closely watched that they were able to have but little intercourse with the inhabitants. Protestants were also seeking entrance to Japan. In 1837 the ship *Morrison* attempted to restore some shipwrecked Japanese to their country. In addition to this philanthropic motive, there was a hope that the expedition might help to open the land to trade and the Gospel. Three missionaries from China accompanied it. The waifs were not allowed to land, and the *Morrison* was fired upon, so that it had to return without having accomplished anything. A number of British officers organized the Loochoo Naval Mission, and in 1845 sent Dr. Bettelheim, a medical missionary, to the Liuchiu Islands. Though subjected to the most annoying surveillance and opposition, he baptized a few persons. He also prepared Japanese translations of portions of the Scriptures, and some of these were printed. ### 8. Modern Roman Catholic Missions. In 1854 Commodore Parry succeeded in negotiating a treaty between the United States and Japan. This did not provide for the residence of Americans; but later treaties made with the United Staten and some other nations permitted their citizens after July, 1859, to live in certain ports. The Société des Missions * * to procure annually veer °useholder was ~ ' y from the Buddhist commenced work Ptrangisrea at once in Yokohama, gakOdate, and * * Nagasaki. At first the missionaries could do little except study the language and open schools, where they taught those desiring to learn French. In 1862 a church, nominally erected for the use of foreigners, was dedicated in Yokohama, and the missionaries soon found themselves engaged in addressing the crowds that gathered about them, and several of their auditors were arrested. The French minister secured the release of these persons by promising that there should be no more preaching in the Japanese language. In 1865 a church building was dedicated in Nagasaki. One morning, as M. Petitjean, the missionary in charge, was kneeling before the altar, three women drew near and kneeling near him, said in a low voice, "Our heart is one with yours," and then told him that all the people in the village from which they came were Christians. The descendants of the ancient Christians, for whom the missionaries had from the first been seeking, were found. The discovery of other Christian communities followed, and ultimately the missionaries learned of about 50,000 persons, most of them living near Nagasaki, who considered themselves Christians, though for various reasons about half of these refrained from entering into close relations with the missionaries. The missionaries became busily occupied in instructing and caring for these believers. Though they tried to exercise due caution, it was not long before arrests began to be made. After the new government was thoroughly established in 1868, the persecution became severe, and from one cluster of villages 3,000 persons were exiled to distant provinces. The official representatives of Western nations united in a protest, declaring that by persecuting Christians Japan was showing dishonor to the countries whose people believed in the same religion. The Japanese government at first refused to yield and told the foreign ministers that "it would resist the propagation of Christianity as it would oppose the advance of an invading army." In 1873, however, orders were issued for removing from public view the edicts against Christianity. Though the laws had not been repealed, it was evident that they would not be enforced. From that time Roman Catholics shared with others the constantly increasing degree of religious freedom which at last found expression in the following article of the constitution promulgated in 1890: "Japanese subjects shall, within limits not prejudicial to peace and order, and not antagonistic to their duties as subjects, enjoy freedom of religious belief." ### 9. Results. In comparing the growth of Roman Catholicism with that of Protestantism and of the Greek Church, it must be remembered that it began its new propaganda with several thousand adherents, while the others had none. On the other hand, it has been more hindered than they by the prejudices aroused three centuries ago against Christianity. Its work has spread into most of the large towns of Japan. It is governed by an archbishop who, with his coadjutor, lives in Tokyo; and there are four bishops, whose residences are in Tokyo, Sendai, Osaka, and Nagasaki. At the close of 1907 the missionaries, most of whom are French, numbered 124 men and 124 women. There were 33 Japanese priests and 303 catechists. The number of believers was 61,095, of whom more than half were in the island of Kiushiu. 1,551 adults and 3,604 infants were baptized in 1907. Schools for the training of priests had 20 students. There were several other schools, while in 19 orphanages 1,027 children found a home. Among other forms of charity, two hospitals for lepers deserve special notice. A large number of books is published, among them being a translation of the Bible. There are also two periodicals issued by the mission. ### 2. Missions of the Eastern Church: 1. Initiation by Nicolai Kasatkin. In 1861 Nicolai Kasatkin went to Hakodate as chaplain of the Russian consulate there. As a student he had been moved by a desire to give the Gospel to the Japanese, and this position furnished an opening for carrying out his wish. His first convert was a Shinto priest whose prejudice against Christianity led him to come to the chaplain either to conquer him in argument, or to assassinate him, who, however, became convinced that the foreigner's doctrine was true, and in 1868 he and two others were secretly baptized. When the Shogunate was overthrown, many of those who belonged to the defeated party went to Hakodate, among them several from the Sendai clan. Led in part by curiosity and in part by the thought that a new religion might subserve their political aims, some of them began to study Christianity. Many accepted it and returned as evangelists to their own province, or went elsewhere to teach what they had learned. In a visit to Russia, Nicolai organized a missionary society to support his efforts, and when in 1871 another priest took his place in Hakodate, he removed to Tokyo, where, besides engaging in direct evangelistic work, he opened a seminary for training evangelists and also a school for teaching languages and the sciences. In 1872 three evangelists in Sendai were arrested with several of their hearers, and there were arrests in Hakodate. Appeals to the imperial government resulted in the release of these persons. That same year Nicolai baptized ten persons in Tokyo; the greatest secrecy was observed, but a few days later a Buddhist priest showed him a sketch, drawn by a spy of the government, of the room in which the ceremony had taken place. But, as no arrests followed, anxiety gave way to confidence. Other spies entered the school as pupils and at least two became Christians. Great success attended the early efforts at evangelization, especially in Sendai and its vicinity. In 1875 the man mentioned above as the first convert was ordained as the first priest. ### 2. Results. Nicolai was made a bishop in 1880. The growth of the Eastern Church in Japan has been to a remarkable degree due to this one man. There have never been more than four other missionaries, and most of the time only one. He trained the Japanese priests and, in addition to the supervision of churches and schools, he prepared a translation of the New Testament and published several other books. A force of ten translators and writers is kept busy under his direction. The connection of this mission with Russia, and the relations of Church and government in that land have made it the object of much suspicion. The large cathedral in Tokyo occupies one of the most conspicuous sites in the city, and stands on ground leased in the name of the Russian legation, facts which have caused considerable ill-feeling, and even given rise to threats of destruction. Bishop Nicolai has, however, gained the respect of all; when war broke out in 1904 between Japan and Russia, he left it to his followers to decide whether he should remain in Japan or return to his own land. They urged him to stay with them, and this he did, to the general approval of the public. The statistics for 1907 show 265 churches, 30,166 members, 37 ordained Japanese priests, and 129 other evangelists. The contributions of the churches for the year amounted to 10,711 yen ($5,355.50). Workers for the Church are trained in a theological seminary and an evangelists' school. The former gives a liberal education and teaches theology in the Russian language; the latter is of a lower grade, and uses only the Japanese language. There are two boarding-schools for girls and several day schools, while three periodicals are published. In 1907 Nicolai was made an archbishop, another Russian being sent out as bishop. ### 3. Protestant Missions: 1. Beginnings in 1859. The treaty made by Japan with the United States in 1858 provided that in July of the next year certain ports should be opened for the residence of American citizens; also that "Americans in Japan shall be allowed the free exercise of their religion, and for this purpose shall have the right to erect suitable places of worship. No injury shall be done to such buildings, nor any insult offered to the religious worship of the Americans." This treaty was followed by similar ones with other Western nations. Though no permission was given for teaching Christianity to the Japanese, it was believed that this would soon become possible. Soon after the treaty was signed, Chaplain Wood, U. S. N., Dr. S. Wells Williams, the well-known missionary and diplomatist, and Rev. E. W. Syle met in Nagasaki. As a result of their conference, they decided to write to the Episcopal, Reformed (Dutch), and Presbyterian Boards in America, urging that they send missionaries to Japan. Within a year all three societies had done this. In May, 1859, two months before the time set for opening the ports, the Rev. J. Liggins, of the Episcopal Board, was in Nagasaki, where he was followed a month later by the Rev. (afterward Bishop) C. M. Williams. In October J. C. Hepburn (q.v.), of the Presbyterian Board, reached Kanagawa, while the next month saw the arrival of three missionaries of the Reformed Board--Rev. S. R. Brown and D. B. Simmons, M.D., at Kanagawa, and Rev. G. F. Verbeck (q.v.) at Nagasaki. The next April, Rev. J. Goble, who had been a marine on Perry's expedition, came to Kanagawa under the American Baptist Free Mission. At first the missionaries labored under great difficulties. They were surrounded by spies and were in danger of attack from those who hated all things foreign, and especially the Christian religion. One man became Dr. Hepburn's teacher with the intention of assassinating him. Japanese who showed any inclination toward Christianity were in danger of arrest. The teaching of English gave some opportunities for exerting an influence over young men. Even before missionaries came, Chaplain Wood, U. S. N., had held classes, and though extreme caution was necessary, the questions asked by students about words found in their books could be answered only by telling something concerning Christian beliefs. In 1861 the Shogun's court itself sent several persons to the missionaries for instruction in English. As many of those who were gathered in such classes afterward held places of influence, the honor in which they held their teachers and the ideas that they received concerning morals, politics, education, and religion had much influence in shaping the course of events in which these men became leaders. It was a great help to the propagation of the Gospel that educated Japanese could read Chinese. Their curiosity to learn about Western ideas led them to purchase not only works on geography, history, and science prepared by missionaries in China, but also those dealing directly with Christian truth, and even the Bible itself. ### 2. Alternating Advance and Reaction. In Jan., 1866, a meeting held by Christian believers of various nationalities living in Yokohama issued an address to the Christian world asking that special prayers be offered for Japan. It mentioned among encouraging changes that the missionaries were no longer watched by spies, but were in some instances employed by the goverment as school-teachers, that students of English no longer uttered the name of Jesus with bated breath, but manifested a readiness to talk about Christianity; and that some of them went daily to the missionaries "to read the English Bible, preferring this to the study of school-books." At Yokohama, in 1864 occurred the first Protestant baptism in Japan. In 1866 at Nagasaki a high official from Saga was baptized with his brother. The greatest secrecy had to be observed, as the new converts were liable to capital punishment. Up to the spring of 1872 only ten persons had been baptized. Soon after the restoration of imperial power in 1868, the attempt to revive the Shinto religion was accompanied by a renewal of strong opposition to Christianity. The new government posted edicts against it almost identical with those of the Shogunate. One of the few baptized Protestants was cast into prison. In 1870 and 1871 two teachers of missionaries were arrested under suspicion of being Christians, and one of them died in prison. Knowledge of these persecutions made other persons afraid for a while to visit the missionaries. Yet even before the removal of the edicts in 1873, it became evident that the government was becoming more liberal, and in Mar., 1872, the first Japanese church was organized in Yokohama with eleven members as a result of the work of the Reformed and the Presbyterian missionaries. Though this church has since become connected with the Nihon Kirisuto Kyokwai (Presbyterian), it at first had no denominational name. The next two churches, those of Kobé and Osaka, organized in 1874 in connection with the mission of the American Board, were of a similar nature, and it was the hope of most of the missionaries then in Japan that this policy could be continued; but that same year new churches in Yokohama and Tokyo were put "on a strictly Presbyterian basis." ### 3. The Advance, 1878-88. The year 1873 marked the beginning of a period of rapid advance. Among progressive Japanese there sprang up a great desire to adopt Western customs and ideas. Protestant Christianity, as the religion of England and America, was thought to be at least worthy of investigation, and large audiences listened to its proclamation. Some, like the popular leader Fukuzawa, argued that as a matter of policy it would be well for the country nominally to adopt Christianity. The Christian schools became crowded with earnest young men and women, many of whom became Christians and showed much zeal for carrying the Gospel to others. Bibles and other religious books had an increasing sale. The churches received large accessions to their membership, and several became self-supporting. In 1883 a general convention of the missionaries and a union meeting of the Japanese Christians were followed by marked religious awakenings. So rapid did the growth of the churches become that extravagant expectations were aroused, and even some enemies of Christianity said that ere the century closed it would be the most prominent religion of the land. The statistics of Protestant missions for 1888 showed 249 churches with a membership of 25,514, the number of adults baptized in the year being 6,959. Outside of the professedly missionary ranks there were those from foreign lands who did much to help on the movement. Among them may be mentioned President Clark of the Massachusetts Agricultural College, who, in 1876, went to Japan to assist in establishing a similar institution in Sapporo. Capt. Janes, U. S. A., who was employed as a teacher in the city of Kumamoto, invited his pupils to come to his house for the study of the Bible. Some of them became Christians, whereupon a severe persecution broke out. A number of these went, in 1876, to the Doshisha School which Joseph Neesima and missionaries of the American Board had opened the preceding year in Kyoto. Mr. Neesima was a young man who, at a time when an attempt to leave the country was a capital crime, had been led by his desire to learn about God and Western civilization to go to America (1864). He was there befriended by Alpheus Hardy, a Boston merchant, and given opportunities for study such as fitted him to do a noteworthy religious and educational work for his own people. ### 4. The Obstacles Encountered. The period of rapid growth was not without its difficulties. The movements of missionaries were hampered by regulations that limited freedom of travel in the interior. While the imperial government as a whole pursued a liberal policy, the educational department was much of the time in control of those who exerted a strong influence against Christianity. Local officials sometimes put hindrances in the way of evangelization, and there was much petty persecution by the relatives and neighbors of believers. Fear of losing office, trade, or popularity deterred many from following what they believed to be the truth. Buddhism awoke from its slumber to oppose the rival religion by means of lectures, tracts, schools, and societies. When elections were to be held in 1890 for the first national diet, the Buddhists entered the political arena and urged that the people should not choose any Christians to represent them. It was a bitter disappointment when returns showed that out of the 300 members of the House of Commons, thirteen were Christians, one of whom was made president, while another became chairman of the committee of the whole. Incidentally it may be mentioned that in subsequent diets Christians have several times held the same offices or that of vice-president, which is one of many facts that disprove the assertion that the influential classes in Japan are not reached by the Gospel. ### 5. The Reaction of 1889. The movement in favor of Christianity was checked by a reaction that began to be apparent about 1889. Failure to secure desired revision of treaties, with other untoward events, caused the Japanese to feel much irritation against foreign nations. Conservatives seized the opportunity to foster a nationalistic spirit; while the relations of Christianity with western lands had once been helpful, now they proved a hindrance. Preaching-places were no longer crowded; pupils left the Christian schools, there were few additions to the churches, and many defections. Hitherto there had been but little doctrinal discussion; this was now aroused by the coming of Unitarian and other liberal missions, as well as by the increased reading of books written in other lands. The fondness of the Japanese for novelty and the desire of many to show their independence of the missionaries who had been their teachers increased the tendency to advocate all sorts of views, while theological unrest led to spiritual decline and a relaxation of evangelistic efforts, and the growth of trade and manufactures fostered a commercial spirit that made it more difficult to interest men in religious themes. Nevertheless, some advance was made in this period, so that in 1900 there were 538 churches with 42,451 members. ### 6. The New Advance Since 1899. This reaction gradually spent its force. Revised treaties, becoming effective in 1899, lessened the feeling against foreigners and made it possible for missionaries to travel or reside in any part of the land, while the treaty of alliance with Great Britain (1902) increased the favor with which Christian lands, and consequently their religion, were regarded. Regulations issued by the government regarding buildings used by religious bodies were a practical recognition of Christianity and put it on the same standing as Buddhism. Moreover, the twentieth century opened with the manifestation of renewed earnestness and evangelistic zeal on the part of the Christians. The war with Russia did much to sober the thoughts of the people and incline them to consider other than material interests, and also opened up many oppor tunities for work in behalf of the soldiers, the military authorities cordially welcoming that carried on by the Young Men's Christian Association in Manchuria, the emperor himself contributing to its support, while in Japan there was much done for the soldiers on their way to the front, for the invalids in the hospitals, and for the families that were in distress. The statistics of Protestant missions show that at the close of 1907 there were 295 male missionaries and 255 unmarried women; the total, including wives, being 789. There were 529 organized churches, of which 102 were wholly self-supporting. The church-members (including probationers and baptized children) numbered 71,818, of whom 57,830 were communicants. The adult baptisms in the year had been 8,623; and the money raised by the churches amounted to 274,608 *yen * ($137,304). There were 469 ordained Japanese ministers, 626 evangelists, and 208 Biblewomen. ### 7. Harmony of Protestent Effort. While many varieties of Protestantism are represented in Japan, there has been a great degree of harmony among the different bodies. Nearly all have joined heartily in united evangelistic efforts, and have manifested a tendency toward the organic union of churches having similar forms of government. The churches connected with the various Presbyterian missions form the Nippon Kirisuto Kyokwai (Church of Christ in Japan); those connected with Episcopal missions of America. and England form the Sei Kokwai (Holy Catholic Church); and a similar union of Methodists was effected in 1907. These three bodies and the Kumi-ai Kyokwai (Congregational churches) are of nearly equal strength, their membership including more than five-sixths of the whole. Nearly all the churches except the Sei Kokwai use the same hymn-book; and by arrangement with the latter body 100 of its hymns are uniform with those of the Union Hymnal. Most of the missions are represented in the "Standing Committee of Cooperating Missions," which serves as "a general medium of reference, communication, and effort." The Japanese Christians are also united in an alliance that holds large conventions from time to time. Most of the missions have educational institutions of various grades; a few schools have been established by the Japanese Christians. In many of the government schools of higher grade tire are Christian associations. The International Young Men's Christian Association has sent secretaries to several of the larger cities of Japan, and these, in addition to work for the general associations, give counsel and help to those in the schools. The educational officials have also used their aid in securing from America men of good character and ability as teachers of English. In the island of Yezo the Church Missionary Society has a mission to the Ainu, an aboriginal race which is gradually becoming extinct. Of the 16,000 survivors, about 1,200 are Christians. Much successful work has been done among the Japanese emigrants in Hawaii and on the Pacific coast of the United States. Since Formosa came into the possession of Japan, some of the Japanese churches have sent evangelists there to labor for their own people and also for the native inhabitants. Other evangelists have been sent for similar work in Korea (q.v.) and the Chinese ports. ### 8. General Results. Even before the country was opened to foreign intercourse, most Japanese men were able to read more or less; and since the establishment of the educational system this ability has become almost universal among both men and women. This has made a great opening for Christian literature. The translation of the New Testament was completed in 1879, that of the Old Testament in 1877. For the most part the Scriptures are sold, and not given, to the people, the largest work of gratuitous distribution being in the army. Other Christian books and tracts were at first prepared by the missionaries or under their supervision, but now they come almost entirely from Japanese writers and are to a large extent published by Japanese firms. The same is true of Christian periodicals. Schools for poor children, orphan asylums, hospitals, dispensaries, leper asylums, schools for the blind, reform schools, and homes for released prisoners have been established, and these institutions have been founded and conducted by the Japanese Christians themselves. They have so far gained the approval and confidence of the people that believers and non believers alike have contributed toward their support, and some of them have received large gifts from the emperor and empress. The Christians are also recognized leaders in reform movements, such as those against intemperance, debasing exhibitions, and the system of licensed prostitution. The influence of Christianity is being felt in many ways that can not be tabulated. Partly because many literary men are Christians, or have been educated in Christian schools, Biblical quotations, theistic expressions, and arguments based on religious thought are common in newspapers and magazines. This shows that, in addition to what is visible to the eye, the leaven of Christian truth is silently working in the hearts of men. Apart from the directly religious results produced by the preaching of the Gospel, society is being in many ways affected by Christian ideas. No one can understand modern Japan who overlooks the influence that Christianity is exerting upon the thoughts and sentiments of the people. OTIS CARY. BIBLIOGRAPHY: F. Von Wenckstern, *Bibliography of the Japanese Empire, 1859-93*, vol. i., Leyden, 1895; vol. ii. Tokyo, 1907. On I. consult: E. Kaempfer, *Hist. of Japan*, 2 vols., London, 1728, new ed. 3 vols., New York, 1906; H. Faulds, *Nine Years in Nippon*, Boston, 1888; P. Lowell, *The Soul of the Far East*, ib. 1888; E. Lamairesse, *Le Japon, histoire, religion*, Paris, 1892; H. Norman, *Real Japan: Studies in Contemporary Manners, Morals, Administration and Politics*, New York, 1893; D. Murry, *The Story of Japan*, ib. 1894; J. Page, Japan, its People and Missions, London, 1895; C. Munzinger, *Die Japaner*, Berlin, 1898; W. G. Aston, *History of Japanese Literature*, New York, 1899; F. Brinkley, *Japan*, Boston, 1902; B. H. Chamberlain, *Things Japanese, and Art*, Boston, 1906; idem, *Mikado's Empire*, 2 vols., New York, 1903; idem, *The Japanese Nation in Evolution* ib., 1907; Augusta M. C. Davidson, *Present Day Japan, Social and Psychic*, New York * an Att 1904; idem, *Imperial Japan: the Country and its *People, London, 1905; I. O. Nitobe, *Bushido, the Soul of Japan*, New York, 1905 ; Mrs. E. Bickersteth, *Japan*, 1908. On II, 1, consult: the *Kojiki*, transl. by B. H. Chamberlain, the supplement to *Transactions of the Asiatic. Society of Japan*, vol. x., 1882; the *Nihongi*, transl. by W. G. Aston in the *Transactions of the Japan Society*, 1896; W. G. Aston, *Shinto*, New York, 1905; P. Lowell, *Occult Japan*, Boston, 1895; F. Rinder, *Old World Japan: Legends of the Land of Gods*, New York, 1895; J. Batchelor, *The Ainu and their Folklore*, London, 1901; F. Brinkley, *Japan*, ut sup.; W. E. Griffis, *The Religions of Japan*, New York, 1904; M. Revon, *Le Shintoisme*, Paris, 1907; G. W. Knox, *The Development of Religion in Japan*, New York, 1907; E. Buckley, *Phallicism in Japan*, Chicago, privately printed. There are many papers of importance in the *Transactions of the Asiatic Society of Japan*, e.g., E. Satow, *The Shinto Temples of Ise*, ii. 113; idem, *The Revival of Pure Shinto*, iii. appendix; idem, *Ancient Japanese Rituals*, iv. 409, vii. 97, ix. 183; P. Lowell, *Esoteric Shinto*, xxi.-xxii.; D. C. Greene, *Tenrikyo*, xxiii. 24; K. Florenz, *Ancient Japanese Ritual*, xxvii. 1; A. Lloyd and D. C. Greene, *The Remmonkyo*, xxiv. 1, 17; J. Leo, *Die Entwickelung des ältesten japanischen Seelenlebens*, Leipsic, 1907. On II, 2, consult: B. Nanjio, *A Short Hist. of the Twelve Japanese Buddhist Sects*, Tokyo, 1886; *World's Parliament of Religions*, 2 vols., Chicago, 1893; L. Hearn, *Gleanings in Buddha Fields*, Boston, 1897; idem, *Japan, an Interpretation*, ut sup.; F. Brinkley, ut sup.; W. E. Griffis, *The Religions of Japan*, ut sup.; and the following papers in the *Transactions of the Asiatic Society of Japan:* J. M. James, *Notes on Rosaries used by Different Sects of Buddhists*, ix. 173; J. Troup, *On the Tenets of Shinshiu*, xiv. 1; J. Summers, *Buddhism and Traditions concerning its Introduction into Japan*, xiv. 73; J. Troup, *The Gobunsho*, xvii. 101; A. Lloyd, *Developments of Japanese Buddhism*, xxii. 337. On III, 1, the most valuable sources of information are to be found in the letters and reports of the missionaries, of which J. Hay gives many in *De rebus Japonicis*, Antwerp, 1605. Consult: Abbé de Talon (J. Crasset), Hist. de l'église du Japon, 2 vols., Paris, 1689, Eng. transl., London, 1705; P. F. Charlevoix, *Hist. et description générale du Japon*, 9 vols., Rouen, 1736; idem, *Hist. du christianisme au Japon*, 2 vols., ib. 1715; L. Pages, *Hist. de la religion chrétienne au Japon*, 2 vols., Paris, 1869; *Le Premier Missionnaire catholique du Japon au xix. siècle*, Lyons, 1885 (largely composed of the letters of T. A. Forcade); F. Marnas, *La Religion de Jésus ressuscitée au Japon*, 2 vols., Paris, 1896; B. A. Wilberforce, *Dominican Missions and Martyrs in Japan*, London, 1897; J. Murdoch and Y. Yamagata, *History of Japan 1542-1651*, Kobé, 1903; M. Steichen, *The Christian Daimyo*, Yokohama, 1903; part of the literature under FRANCIS XAVIER; also the letters and reports in *Annals of the Propagation of the Faith and Catholic Missions*, periodicals published in London. On III, 2, consult: C. Hale, *Missions of the Russian Church, in American Church Review*, Oct., 1878; G, W, Taft, *Bishop Nicolai*, in *Japanese Evangelist*, June, 1896; The first two volumes of a compendious history in Japanese, *Nihon Seikyo Dendo Shi*, were published Tokyo, 1900. On III, 3, consult: *Proceedings of the General Conference of Protestant Missionaries of Japan*, Yokohama, 1883; *General Conference of Protestant Missionaries of Japan*, Tokyo, 1901; H. Ritter, Dreissig Jahre protestantischer Mission in Japan, Berlin, 1890, Eng, transl., *History of Protestant Missions in Japan*, Tokyo, 1898: M. L. Gordon, *An American Missionary in Japan*, Boston, 1892; Jinzo Nsruse, *A Modem Paul in Japan: Account of the Life and Work of Rev. P. Sawayana*, ib. 1893; R. B. Peery, *The Gist of Japan*, New York, 1897; idem, *Lutherans in Japan*, Newberry, S. C., 1900; A. D. Hail, *Japan and its Rescue*, Nashville, 1898; E. Stock, *Japan and the Japan Mission of the Church Missionary Society*, London, 1898; O. Cary, *Japan and its Regeneration*, New York, 1904; W. E. Griffis, *Dux Christus*, ib. 1904; H. Moore, *The Christian Faith in Japan*, London, 1904; E. W. Clement, *Christianity in Modern Japan*, Philadelphia, 1905; H. K. Miller, *Hist. of the Japan Mission of the Reformed Church*, 1879-1904, ib. 1905; A. Arnold, *The Light of Japan. Church Work in . . . South Tokyo, Osaka, and Kiushiu under the Church of England*, Hartford, 1906; W. M. Imbrie, *The Church of Christ in Japan*, Philadelphia, 1908; *The Christian Movement in its Relation to the New Life of Japan*, an annual published in Tokyo, 1903 sqq.; R. Allier, *Le Protestantisme au Japon*, Paris, 1908; O. Cary, *Hist. of Christianity in Japan*, New York, 1909.
JAPHET Japhet

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAPHET.** See TABLES OF THE NATIONS, § 4.
JASON Jason

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JASON:** A Greek name borne often by Jews of Maccabean or later times and by Jewish Christians. On account of its resemblance to the Hebrew-Jewish name Jesus or Joshua, it was often assumed by Jews inclined to Greek culture or living in a Greek environment. The following are notable bearers of the name. **1.** A brother of the high priest Onias III., himself occupying the office 174-172 B.C. Two very different accounts of him exist, the first in II Macc. iv. 7 sqq., v. 5 sqq. (cf. i. 7), and the second in Josephus, *Ant*. XII., v. 1 (cf. XV., iii. 1). According to the first account, Jason became an apostate from the Jewish religion, bought from Antiochus IV. the office of high priest for 440 talents, and for 150 more the right to erect in Jerusalem training-places for Greek athletics and to enroll Jerusalemites as citizens of Antioch. He encouraged Greek sports, and sent an embassy with a gift to the Heracles-Melcarth festival at Tyre. After three years he was superseded by Menelaus, who outbid him for the office. He fled to the Ammonites across the Jordan, but returned in 170 B.C. with a band of 1,000 men, when a report was spread that Antiochus had died on his second Egyptian expedition, took Jerusalem, and inflicted great slaughter there. He was compelled again to flee, first to the Ammonites, then to the Arabian Prince Aretas, next to Egypt, and finally to Lacedaemonia, where he died. According to Josephus he came into the office in an orderly manner, after the death of his brother, fell into disfavor with Antiochus, and was compelled to yield his office to his brother Menelaus, who was the real sponsor for Greek culture. Willrich accepts Josephus' account on the ground that II Maccabees is a falsified "tendency-writing," but the majority of scholars are against this. **2.** The son of Eleazar, who, according to I Macc. viii. 17 (cf. II Macc. iv. 11 and Josephus, *Ant*. XII., x. 6), was sent about 161 B.C. with Eupolemus to Rome by Judas Maccabeus as ambassador to make a treaty of friendship. The treaty was made, though its results were not actually apparent. Willrich casts doubts upon the historicity of the event. **3.** Jason of Cyrene, a Hellenistic Jew who, according to II Macc. ii. 19, wrote a history in Greek in five books on the Maccabees, the purification of the temple, the wars of the Jews against Antiochus Epiphanes and Eupator, and the divine help which came in those times. It embraced the period 171-161 B.C., and is the basis of II Maccabees, the author of which lays the responsibility for his form of statement of the facts upon Jason, though probably Jason is also a mask through which his own personality speaks. Jason wrote between 162 and 125 B.C., and probably in Egypt. **4.** In Rom. xvi. 21 Paul speaks of a kinsman Jason, who possibly lived in Corinth (cf. Rom. xvi. 1). **5.** According to Acts xvii. 5-9, Paul, while at Thessalonica, dwelt at the house of a Jason, who is probably to be distinguished from the foregoing. **6.** For the Jason of the "Dialogue between Jason and Papiscus" see ARISTO OF PELLA. (R. KRÄTZSCHMAR†.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: A treatment of the whole subject may be found in *DB*, ii. 551-552; *EB*, ii. 2336-37; and of 1-3 in *JE*, vii. 74-75. For 1 consult: H. Willrich, *Juden und Griechen vor der makkabäischen Erhebung*, Göttingen, 1895; A. P. Stanley, *Lectures on the Hist. of the Jewish Church*, iii. 324, London, 1884; J. Wellhausen, *Israelitische und jüdische Geschichte*, p. 325, Berlin, 1895; A. Büchler, *Die Tobiaden und die Oniaden*, pp. 106 sqq., Vienna, 1899; Schürer, *Geschichte*, i. 220, 194-196, Eng. transl., I., i. 202-205, 231 (on 1 and 2). On 3: Trieber, in *Nachrichten der königlichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen*, 1895, pp. 401, 408; Willrich, ut sup., chap. ii.; idem, *Judaica*, chap. iv., Göttingen, 1900; A. Schlatter, in *Festschrift der Universität Greifswald*, Greifswald, 1899; Schürer, ut sup., i. 40, 359-361, Eng. transl., I., i. 47, II., iii. 211-216. On 5 consult: W. M. Ramsay, *St. Paul the Traveller*, p. 231, London, 1897.
JASPER, JOHN Jasper, John

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JASPER, JOHN:** Colored Baptist pulpit orator; b. a slave on the Peachy plantation on the James River, in Fluvanna Co., Virginia, July 4, 1812; d. in Richmond, Va., Mar. 30, 1901. His father was Philip Jasper, his mother's name was Nina, and he was her twenty-fourth child, born two months after his father's death. When grown to manhood he came to Richmond as a slave and was employed as a stemmer in the large tobacco factory of Samuel Hargrove, a prominent Baptist. He had no education, but with the help of a colored man almost as ignorant as himself he learned to read six months before his conversion, which occurred on Thursday, July 25, 1839. His father had been a preacher, and he followed his example. He soon became a favorite among the colored people of Richmond, then his fame spread, especially as a funeral preacher, until he was known all over the State. He made himself master of the Bible, and was a formidable opponent of those who questioned his interpretation. When emancipated he gathered about him a congregation and soon had a building to preach in. More and more came to hear him until at length the Sixth Mount Zion Church was built for him, and there he preached to several thousand people every Sunday. In 1878, in the regular course of his ministry, he preached from Ex. xv. 3, "The Lord is a man of war; the Lord is his name." He began with Biblical illustrations of the almighty power of God, but branched off into the demonstration by Biblical texts literally construed of the proposition that "the sun do move." The sermon was prepared to end a dispute upon the question of the sun's motion and was delivered without any desire to cause talk. It made a sensation, had to be repeated again and again, and he was even sent out by a lecture bureau to repeat it outside of Richmond. But it only made his name a by-word and obscured to many the fact that he really had solid claim to be considered a pulpit orator. Even this particular sermon was saved from being ridiculous by the Preacher's profound reverence for the Bible, simple faith in the Bible miracles, and his logical power and remarkable eloquence of a rude but genuine kind. He had also humor of the most delicious variety. In short, in him the type of the ante-bellum uneducated but gifted, pious, and witty colored preacher reached its culmination. BIBLIOGRAPHY: W. E. Hatcher, *John Jasper*, New York, 1908.
JASPIS, ALBERT SIGISMUND Jaspis, Albert Sigismund

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JASPIS, ALBERT SIGISMUND:** General superintendent of Pomerania; b. at Nossen (19 m. w. of Dresden) Feb. 15, 1809; d. at Stettin Dec. 20, 1885. He studied at the gymnasium in Freiburg-on-the-Mulde and at Leipsic. In 1832 he became catechist and afternoon-preacher in St. Peter's Church in Leipsic. In 1835 Jaspis became pastor in Lugau, three years later diaconus in Lichtenstein, and pastor in Rödlitz. His faithfulness and especially his success with children and young people won him the hearts of his parishioners in both places. In 1845 he went over to the Prussian State Church, after having been elected third preacher of the Evangelical Lutheran congregation in Elberfeld. In 1855 he was called to Stettin as general superintendent of Pomerania. He represented a pietistic confessionalism, and his gifts lay in the direction of the practical cure of souls. He was not without success as a writer of devotional and pastoral literature, and some of his tracts found a large circulation. But the publication which carried his name far beyond the borders of Evangelical Germany was his compilation of Luther's small catechism for the instruction of young people to be confirmed. This booklet is one of the most successful attempts at the solution of the catechetical problem of the Church as it was conceived in the middle of the nineteenth century in the circles of pietistic confessionalism. (HANS KESSLER.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Sketches were written by his son, one prefixed to Jaspis' *Erinnerungen an eine Zeit wo es trübe und finster war*, Cologne, 1888, the other in *Bilder aus dem kirchlichen Leben . . . in Pommern*, pp. 205 sqq., Stettin, 1895.
JAUFFRET, GASPARD JEAN ANDRÃ JOSEPH Jauffret, Gaspard Jean André Joseph

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAUFFRET,** zho"frê', **GASPARD JEAN ANDRÉ JOSEPH:** Bishop of Metz; b. at Roque-Brussane (15 m. n. of Toulon), Provence, Dec. 13, 1759; d. in Paris May 13, 1823. He studied at Toulon, Aix, and Paris, where, in 1791, he established the *Annales de la religion et du sentiment* to oppose the civil constitution of the clergy. After the Revolution he was one of the principal collaborators on the *Annales religieuses*. About 1801 he became vicar-general of Lyons. Subsequently he was recalled to Paris as secretary of the grand almonry. He became bishop of Metz in 1806. In 1811 he was appointed by Napoleon to the archbishopric of Aix, but was never instituted. His best-known works are: *De la religion à l'Assemblée Nationale* (Paris, 1790); *Du culte public* (2 vols., 1795); Meditations sur les souffrances de la croix de Notre-Seigneur Jésus-Christ (1800), and *Entretiens sur le sacrement de la confirmation* (1809).
JAVAN Javan

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAVAN:** A designation common to the Old Testament and the entire Orient for Greeks in general and those of Asia, Minor in particular. The name is an example of a tribal name being given to a whole people, and the Hebrew (*Yawan*) form corresponds to the Greek *Iaones* or *IaFones*. In an inscription of Sargon II. (722-705 B.C.), also in one of the Indian King Asoka, the name occurs as *Javana*, and on one of Darius as *Jauna.* The reason why all Greeks were called Ionians in the Orient is that after the eighth century before Christ the Ionians controlled the commerce of the East. Old-Testament mention is found in Ezek. xxvii. 13, where Javan is mentioned with Tubal and Meshech, and refers probably to the Ionians settled in Asia Minor on the coast of the Black Sea; Isa. lxvi. 19 (Septuagint) connects Lud, Meshech, Tubal, and Javan; Javan in Ezek. xxvii. 19 is a corruption of the text, as the Septuagint shows. The word has the general sense of "Greeks" in Gen. x. 2, 4; in verse 2 they are connected with Tubal and Meshech, but in verse 4 the term includes Elishah (probably Sicily), Tarshish in Spain, Kittim (Cyprus), and Rodanim (see DODANIM), and therefore covers the people of the Mediterranean. The priestly writer who wrote this verse knew of the supersession of the Phenicians by the Greeks, in commercial matters. Joel iii. 6 mentions the Greeks, Zech. ix. 13 speaks of the Greek empire, Dan. viii. 21 has in mind Alexander's kingdom, and x. 20 that of the Seleucidæ. (H. GUTHE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: B. Stade, *De populo Javan*, Giessen, 1880, also in *Reden und Abhandlungen*, pp. 123-142, ib. 1899; E. Meyer, *Geschichte des Altertums*, i. 490-494, ii. 433, 685 sqq., Stuttgart, 1884-93; A. H. Sayce, *Higher Criticism and the Monuments*, London, 1894; *DB*, ii. 552-553; *EB*, ii. 2338-39; also literature under TABLE OF THE NATIONS.
JAY, WILLIAM Jay, William

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAY, WILLIAM:** English dissenting preacher and author; b. at Tisbury (13 m. w. of Salisbury), Wiltshire, May 8, 1769; d. at Bath Dec. 27, 1853. After serving for two years as apprentice to his father, a stonecutter and mason, he entered the religious seminary of Cornelius Winter at Marlborough in 1785, and began to preach in the neighboring villages the same year. On leaving Marlborough in 1788 he preached at Surrey Chapel, London, and achieved considerable notoriety as the "boy preacher." After short ministries at Christian Malford, near Chippenham, and Hope Chapel, Clifton, he became pastor of the Argyle Independent Chapel at Bath Jan. 30, 1791. He retired from this pastorate sixty-two years later. His preaching attracted hearers from all classes and from all denominations. John Foster calls him the prince of preachers, and Sheridan styles him the most natural orator he had ever heard. Some of his writings have been widely circulated and frequently reprinted in America. His best-known works are: *The Mutual Duties of Husbands and Wives* (London, 1801); *An Essay on Marriage * (Bath, 1806); *The Domestic Minister's Assistant * (London, 1820); *The Christian Contemplated * (1826); *Morning Exercises in the Closet * (2 vols., 1829); and *Evening Exercises for the Closet * (2 vols., 1831). His *Works* (12 vols., Bath, 1842-48) were edited by himself. BIBLIOGRAPHY: His *Autobiography*, ed. G. Redford and J. A. James, appeared London, 1855. Consult T. Wallace, *Portraiture of W. Jay*, ib. 1854; S. Wilson, *Memoir of W. Jay, * ib. 1854; C. Jay, *Recollections of William Jay*, ib. 1859 (by his son); *DNB*, xxix. 255-256.
JAYNE, FRANCIS JOHN Jayne, Francis John

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JAYNE, FRANCIS JOHN:** Church of England bishop of Chester; b. at Llanelly (15 m. s.e. of Carmarthen), Carmarthenshire, South Wales, Jan. 1, 1845. He was educated at Wadham College, Oxford (B.A., 1868), and became deacon and priest in 1870. He was fellow of Jesus College, Oxford, 1868-73, and lecturer in the same college and tutor of Keble College, Oxford, 1871-79. He was curate of St. Clement's, Oxford, 1870-71; principal of St. David's College, Lampeter, as well as sinecure rector of Llangeler, 1877-86; rural dean of Lampeter, 1885-86; vicar and rural dean of Leeds, 1886-88; and was consecrated bishop of Chester in 1889. He was also Whitehall Preacher, 1875-77, and select preacher at Oxford in 1884.
JE JE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JE:** The product resulting, according to the critical school, from the union of the J document and the E document in the Hexateuch (q.v.). See HEBREW LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, II., §§ 4, 7.
JEALOUSY, TRIAL OF Jealousy, Trial of

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEALOUSY, TRIAL OF.** See ORDEAL.
JEANNE D'ALBRET Jeanne d'Albret

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEANNE D'ALBRET,** zhan dal"brê': Queen of Navarre; b. at Pau (56 m. e.s.e. of Bayonne) Jan. 7, 1528; d. at Paris June 9, 1572. She was the eldest child of Henry of Navarre and Margaret of Angoulême-Alençon, the sister of Francis I. of France. By the death of her brother John, she became heir-presumptive of Navarre-Béarn, a kingdom which was important on account of its position between France and Spain. She received a thorough education, although her trend was practical and ambitious rather than scholarly, nor could she sympathize with the intellectualism and mysticism of her famous mother. Suitors for her hand were numerous, and as early as 1535 Francis had intended to marry her to Anthony of Bourbon, but when, in 1540, Charles V. of Spain sought her as a wife for his son Philip, her uncle decided to wed her to Duke William of Cleves. Despite her resistance, the ceremony was performed on June 14, 1541, but her youth made the marriage a mere form, and her ill health obliged her to remain in France while her husband returned to Germany. The change of political conditions caused Francis to desire an annulment of the marriage, and a brief of Paul III. on Oct. 12, 1545, declared the enforced wedlock void. Three years later (Oct. 20, 1548) she married Duke Anthony of Bourbon-Vendôme. The first two children of this union died while still infants, but on Dec. 14, 1553, she gave birth at Pau to her son Henry, afterward Henry IV. of France. The death of her father on May 29, 1555, made her queen of Navarre, and she succeeded in having Anthony recognized as king, although the actual sovereignty devolved on her. It was in her relation to the Reformation that Jeanne was most important. She had been brought up in an atmosphere favorable to the new teaching, although Margaret of Navarre never formally became a convert to Protestantism. Jeanne remained true to Roman Catholicism, even after her husband entered into correspondence with Calvin in 1557, and became the mainstay of the Reformed. Her disaffection with the Roman Catholic Church, however, steadily increased, and on Christmas of the same year she publicly renounced her former faith and received communion according to the Reformed rite. Within a year her court became the center of the Reformed, and her zeal for her new creed and its adherents was most pronounced. She educated her son in the Reformed faith, and Navarre was thoroughly Calvinized by Raymond Merlin in 1563-64. Many statues were forcibly torn from the churches, and the monasteries were transformed into schools, while their incomes were devoted to the establishment of educational institutions. A sudden opponent arose, however, in the person of Pius IV., who, in a bull of Sept. 28, 1563, cited her to appear before the tribunal of the Inquisition or to forfeit her territories both for herself and her children. This peril was obviated by her suzerain, Charles IX., and the bull was annulled, but the peace which she now hoped to enjoy was broken by the wars of religion which broke out anew, and she was forced to flee from Navarre and to take refuge in La Rochelle. During the war she was untiring in her encouragement of her coreligionists, and her son Henry (then sixteen years of age) was the nominal head of the Huguenot party, with Coligny and Andelot as his advisers, a course by which Jeanne increased her own prestige. Meanwhile Navarre-Béarn had been overrun by the royal troops under Terndes, Pau was captured, and only the little fortress of Navarrein still held out. Thither Jeanne sent Montgomery, who reconquered the country for its queen within two months. Jeanne thereupon forbade the exercise of the Roman Catholic religion, and expelled the priests and monks, but in Navarre, where her power was limited, she tolerated it. In the Peace of St. Germain (Aug. 8, 1570) her counsels and perseverance were important factors in obtaining favorable terms for the Protestants, and she remained at La Rochelle until Aug., 1571, declining to be present at the marriage of Charles IX. with Elizabeth of Austria (Nov. 26, 1570), but attending the third Reformed synod held at La Rochelle Apr. 2-10, 1571. Though she had pleaded the length of the journey, she was, in reality, deeply distrustful of the court, and repeatedly declined invitations to visit it, despite the fact that she was planning a marriage of her son with Margaret, the daughter of Henry II. This match had been proposed by Henry himself as early as 1556, but had been forgotten until negotiations were renewed during the war in the autumn of 1569, and again in Jan., 1571, this time in earnest. In Nov. the reluctance of Jeanne was overcome, despite the difference in religion of Henry and Margaret, for she hoped that the princess would become a convert to Protestantism. In Jan., 1572, the queen of Navarre consented to visit the French court, and in the following month met Catherine. Negotiations for the marriage dragged, but in April it was decided that the ceremony should be performed at Paris. On Apr. 11 the marriage-contract was signed, but the pope would not give the requisite dispensation, although Charles IX. earnestly advocated the union which was so necessary for the peace of the land. Jeanne then hastened to Paris to make the final preparations for the marriage and on June 3 received communion at Vincennes with a number of her coreligionists, but died six days later. It was this marriage which was followed by the massacre of St. Bartholomew's Day. (THEODOR SCHOTT†.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: The best account, based on documentary evidence, of the life of Jeanne d'Albret is in the three works of A. de Ruble, *Le Mariage de Jeanne d'Albret*, Paris, 1877, *Ant. de Bourbon et Jeanne d'Atbret*, 4 vols., ib. 1881-86, and *Jeanne d'Albret et la guerre civile*, ib. 1897; for her later life very important is *Lettres d 'Antoine de Bourbon et de Jeanne d'Albret*, ib. 1877. Consult further: W. G. Soldan, *Geschichte des Protestantismus in Frankreich*, 2 vols., Gotha, 1856; G. von Polenz, *Geschichte des französischen Calvinismus*, 5 vols., Leipsic, 1857-69; N. de Boodenave, *Hist. de Béarn et Navarre*, Paris, 1873; J. Delaborde, *Eléonore de Roye*, ib. 1876; idem, *Gaspard de Coligny*, vol. i., ib. 1879; H. M. Baird, *Hist. of the Rise of the Huguenots*, 2 vols., New York, 1880; *Cambridge Modern History*, iii. 6, 11, 13, 17-18, New York, 1905.
JEBB, JOHN Jebb, John

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEBB, JOHN:** Bishop of Limerick; b. at Drogheda (26 m. n, of Dublin), Ireland, Sept. 27, 1775; d. at East Hill, near Wandsworth (6 m. s.w. of London), Surrey, Dec. 9, 1833. He studied at the Londonderry grammar-school, and in 1791 entered Trinity College, Dublin (M.A., 1801; B.D. and D.D., 1821). He was ordained in 1799 and instituted to the curacy of Mogorbane, Tipperary county, in 1801. He became Archbishop Brodrick's examining chaplain in 1805 and archdeacon of Emly in 1820. For his services in maintaining order in his parish during the disturbances that followed the famine of 1822 he was rewarded with the bishopric of Limerick in Dec. Of that year. In 1827 a stroke of paralysis incapacitated him for active work. There after he resided at various places in England, devoting himself to literary pursuits. He had a strong tendency toward High-church ritual, and is regarded as a forerunner of the Oxford movement. His chief works are: *Sermons * (London, 1815); *Sacred Literature * (1820); *Practical Theology * (2 vols., 1830); and a *Biographical Memoir of William Phelan* (1832). His correspondence with Alexander Knox was edited by C. Forster (2 vols., 1834). BIBLIOGRAPHY: C. Forster, *Life and Letters of John Jebb*, London, 1851; Anne Mozley, *Letters of J. H. Newman*, i. 440, 470, ib. 1890; *DNB*, xxix. 259-261.
JEBUS, JEBUSITES Jebus, Jebusites

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEBUS,** jî'bus, **JEBUSITES,** jeb'u-saits: Upon the basis of Judges xix. 10-11 and I Chron. xi. 4-5 Jebus was formerly supposed to have been the pre-Israelitic name of Jerusalem (cf. II Sam. v. 6). But Judges xix.-xxi, took its present form in post-exilic times, and probably Jebus did not occur in the original text; consequently the testimony for Jebus as the name of a city is late, for in all early narratives only the name Jerusalem is found, as it is in the Amarna Tablets (see AMARNA TABLETS, III.). The passages cited, therefore, embody the erroneous conclusion that the earlier name of the city was Jebus. It is to be noted, however, that the Jebusites were not spoken of as limited in their dwelling-place to the city, but as inhabiting the immediate region thereabout (II Sam. v. 6) or the mountain region in particular (Num. xiii. 29; Josh. xi. 3). The better conclusion therefore is that the people derived its name from a district rather than a city. They are represented as holding an important point in the highland after Israel had carried on a victorious campaign against the *tnasnites*, and from the mountain fortress of Zion ruling a small territory limited on the north by the Benjaminitic Nob, Gibeah of Saul, and Ramah, and on the south by Bethlehem of Judah. Their independence was not especially important until the time of David, when he wished to unite his northern and his southern territories, and therefore captured the place ( II Sam. v. 6-8; I Chron, xi. 4-6). After that they were in part freemen on their own possessions (implied by the story of Araunah or Ornan, II Sam. xxiv. 16; I Chron. xxi. lb), and in part slaves (under Solomon, I Kings ix. 20-21). The text of the description of the boundary between Judah and Benjamin calls the hill north of the Valley of Hinnom "the Shoulder of the Jebusites " ( Josh. xv. 8, xviii. 16), whence it may be concluded that the part of the city which the Jebusites occupied in later times was that to the southeast. It might be concluded from Josh. x. 5 that as Adonizedek is reckoned to the Amorites the Jebuaites were also Amorites; but this is not conclusive, as it may be held that the Amorites had recently come in, while the Jebusites were regarded as early inhabitants of the land. From the frequent mention of the people (e.g., Gen. x. 16; Deut. vii. 1, xx. 17) nothing certain can be gathered regarding the racial affinities of the Jebusites. (H. GUTHE.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: The subject is treated in the literature under AMARNA TABLETS and JERUSALEM. Consult also: G. F. Moore, *Commentary on Judges, * New York, 1895; K. Budde, *Das Buch der Richter*, Göttingen, 1896; *DB*, ii. 554-555; *EB*, ii. 2415-16.
JEFFERS, ELIAKIM TUPPER Jeffers, Eliakim Tupper

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEFFERS, ELIAKIM TUPPER:** Presbyterian; b. at Stewiacke, Nova Scotia, Apr. 6, 1841. He studied at Jefferson College, Canonsburg, Pa. (B.A., 1862), and Princeton Theological Seminary (1862-1865), and at the United Presbyterian Theological Seminary, Allegheny, Pa. (1865-66). He was pastor of the United Presbyterian Church at Oxford, Pa. (1865-72), after which he was president of Westminster College, New Wilmington, Pa., until 1890, and professor of theology in Lincoln University, Oxford, Pa. (1883-90). He was pastor of the First Presbyterian Church, Oil City, Pa. (1890-93) and since 1893 has been president of the York Collegiate Institute, York, Pa. He has written *Shortest Road to Cæsar* (New York, 1896).
JEFFERS, WILLIAM HAMILTON Jeffers, William Hamilton

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEFFERS, WILLIAM HAMILTON:** Presbyterian; b. at Cadiz, O., May 1, 1838. He was graduated from Geneva College, Northwood, Pa. (now Beaver Falls, O.; A.B., 1855), and at the United Presbyterian Theological Seminary at Xenia, O. (1859). He was pastor of the combined United Presbyterian churches of Bellefontaine and Northwood, O. (1862-1866); was professor of Latin and Hebrew in Westminster College, New Wilmington, Pa. (1866-69); professor of Greek in the University of Wooster, Wooster, O. (1869-75); pastor of the Euclid Avenue Presbyterian Church, Cleveland, O. (1875-77); and professor of historical theology in the Western Theological Seminary, Allegheny, Pa. (1877-1903). He has since resided at Los Angeles, Cal., and lectures on church history. While at Bellefontaine he was a member of the committee to revise the United Presbyterian metrical version of the Psalms.
JEFFERSON, CHARLES EDWARD Jefferson, Charles Edward

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEFFERSON, CHARLES EDWARD:** Congregationalist; b. at Cambridge, O., Aug. 29, 1860. He was educated at Ohio Wesleyan University (A.B., 1882); was superintendent of public schools in Worthington, O. (1882-84); studied at the School of Theology attached to Boston University (1884-1887). He was pastor of the Central Congregational Church, Chelsea, Mass., from 1887 to 1898. Since 1898 he has been pastor of the Broadway Tabernacle, New York City. He has written: *Quiet Talks with Earnest People in My Study * (New York, 1898); *Quiet Hints to Growing Preachers in My Study * (1901); *Doctrine and Deed * (1901); *Things Fundamental * (1903); *Faith and Life * (1905); *The Minister as Prophet * (1905); *The New Crusade* (1907); *The Old Year and the New * (1907); *Character of Jesus * (1908); and *My Father's Business: Series of Sermons to Children * (1909).
JEHOAHAZ Jehoahaz

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEHOAHAZ,** je-ho'a-haz: **1.** Eleventh king of Israel, son and successor of Jehu. His dates, according to the old chronology, are 856-840 B.C.; according to Kautzsch, 814-798 B.C. Under him the oppression of the northern kingdom by the Arameans reached its height, the army being reduced to fifty horsemen, ten chariots, and 10,000 foot soldiers. An addition to II Kings xiii. 22 in the Septuagint shows that the Arameans operated from the southwest as well as from the north against Jehoahaz. Under him the Asherah worship seems to have revived (II Kings xiii. 6). **2.** Sixteenth king of Judah, third son and successor of Josiah (called Shallum, Jer. xxii. 11). He reigned only three months, according to the old chronology, in 610 B.C.; according to Kautzsch, 609 B.C.; according to Peake, 608 B.C. He was evidently regarded as more energetic than his elder brother (see JEHOIAKIM), since the people elevated him to the throne; but both the Book of Kings and Joaephus give him a bad character (II Kings xxiii. 30 sqq; *Ant*. X., v. 2). Pharaoh Necho, on his return from his campaign to the Euphrates, summoned Jehoahaz to Riblah and threw him into chains to be carried to Egypt, whence he never returned, and put his brother Jehoiakim (Eliakim) in his place as king. Whether the name Shallum (="retribution"?) was symbolically applied or was his original name, discarded when he became king, is a subject of debate. [The list of Josiah's sons in I Chron. iii. 17-18 erroneously makes Shallum to be a different person from Jehoahaz.] The name appears also in II Chron. xxi. 17 as that of King Ahaziah of Judah, and also, II Chron. xxxiv. 8, of a recorder under Josiah of Judah. (E. KAUTZSCH.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Sources are: II Kings xiii. 1-9, xxiii. 30-35; II Chron. iii. 19-18, xxxvi. 1-3; Jer. xxii. 10-12. Consult the pertinent sections of the histories mentioned under AHAB; and ISRAEL, HISTORY OF; and the articles in *DB*, *EB*, and *JE*.
JEHOIACHIN Jehoiachin

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEHOIACHIN,** je-hei'a-kin: Eighteenth king of Judah, son and successor of Jehoiakim. He reigned only three months, in 598 B.C. according to the old chronology, 597 B.C. according to nearly all modern historians. The difference in his age at his accession and in the length of his reign as given in II Kings xxiv. 8 and II Chron. xxxvi. 9 is probably due to a shifting in the Chronicler's narrative of the numeral ten from his age to the length of his reign. When Jehoiachin ascended the throne, Jerusalem was already under siege by the Babylonians or was besieged soon after, and he rendered himself prisoner to the besiegers, with his household and his officers, and was carried into exile to Babylon, where he remained a prisoner until Evil-Merodach set him free in 562 (II Kings xxiv. 10-15, xxv. 27 sqq.) and gave him an honorable place at the court of Babylon. (E. KAUTZSCH.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Sources are II Kings xxiv. 8-15, xxv. 27-30; II Chron. xxxvi. 9-10; Jer. xxii., xxiv., xxvii.-xxix. Consult the pertinent sections in the works on the history of Israel cited under AHAB, and the articles in the Bible dictionaries; J. W. Rothstein, *Die Genealogie des Königs Jojachin und seiner Nachkommen*, Berlin, 1902.
JEHOIADA Jehoiada

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

**JEHOIADA,** je-hei'a-da: High priest in the time of Athaliah and Joash, king of Judah. His wife, Jehosheba, sister of Ahaziah, saved Joash from death at the time of the slaughter of the seed royal by Athaliah. Six years after that event Jehoiada set Joash on the throne, and had Athaliah killed. He followed this up by destruction of the Baal temple and the slaying of the priest of Baal, and renewed the service in the temple of Yahweh. While Jehoiada was practically regent during the minority of Joash, the independence of the king on reaching maturity is indicated in II Kings iii. 7. The Chronicler relates that Jehoiada died at the age of 130 and was buried among the kings because of his good deeds (II Chron. xxiv. 15-16). Others of the name are the father of Benaiah, one of David's heroes, and a son of Eliashib, a priest among the returning exiles named in Neh. iii. 10 sqq. (E. KAUTZSCH.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: Sources are II Kings xi.-xii. 16; II Chron. xxii. 10-xxiv. 18. Consult the pertinent sections in the works on the History of Israel mentioned under AHAB, and the articles in the Bible Dictionaries.
출처: public_domain